Mercedes Benz 2005 E Class Wagon Owners Manual S211.boo
Mercedes-Benz-2005-E-Class-Wagon-Users-Manual-398588 mercedes-benz-2005-e-class-wagon-users-manual-398588
2015-09-07
: Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz-2005-E-Class-Wagon-Owners-Manual-763331 mercedes-benz-2005-e-class-wagon-owners-manual-763331 mercedes-benz pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 491
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG Ê5/tbÁ3Ë 2115846696 Order No. 6515 1130 13 Part No. 211 584 66 96 USA Edition B, 2005 Operator’s Manual E-Class Wagon Operator’s Manual E-Class Wagon E 320 E 320 4MATIC E 500 4MATIC Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz. 앫 Please read this manual carefully, then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for your reference. Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service. 앫 Please follow the recommendations contained in this manual. They are designed to assist you with the operation of your Mercedes-Benz. 앫 Please pay attention to the warnings and cautions contained in this manual. They are designed to help improve the safety of the vehicle operator and occupants. Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To help assure your driving pleasure, as well as your and your passengers' safety, we ask you to make a small investment of time: We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe, pleasurable driving. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC A DaimlerChrysler Company Contents Introduction .......................................... 9 Product information................................ 9 Operator’s Manual ............................... 10 Service and warranty information .. 10 Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11 Maintenance .................................. 12 Roadside Assistance ...................... 12 Change of address or ownership.... 12 Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada ............ 13 Where to find it.................................... 14 Symbols............................................... 15 Operating safety .................................. 16 Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16 Problems with your vehicle.................. 17 Reporting safety defects...................... 18 Reporting safety defects ................ 18 Vehicle data recording......................... 19 Information regarding electronic recording devices........................... 19 At a glance .......................................... 21 Cockpit................................................. 22 Instrument cluster ................................ 24 Multifunction steering wheel ................ 26 Center console ..................................... 27 Upper part ...................................... 27 Lower part ...................................... 28 Overhead control panel ........................ 29 Door control panel................................ 30 Getting started ................................... Unlocking ............................................. Unlocking with the SmartKey ......... Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*......... Starter switch positions.................. Adjusting .............................................. Seats .............................................. Steering wheel................................ Mirrors............................................ Driving.................................................. Fastening the seat belts ................. Starting the engine ......................... Switching on headlamps................. Turn signals .................................... Windshield wipers........................... Rear window wiper/washer ........... Problems while driving.................... Parking and locking.............................. Parking brake ................................. Switching off headlamps................. Turning off engine........................... 31 32 32 33 34 38 38 40 41 44 44 47 51 51 52 54 55 56 56 57 57 Contents Safety and Security ........................... Occupant safety................................... Air bags .......................................... Seat belts ....................................... Children in the vehicle.................... Blocking of rear door window operation........................... Panic alarm .......................................... Activating ....................................... Deactivating ................................... Driving safety systems......................... ABS ................................................ BAS ................................................ ESP................................................. SBC brake system .......................... Four wheel electronic traction system (4MATIC) with the ESP ....... Anti-theft systems................................ Immobilizer..................................... Anti-theft alarm system .................. Tow-away alarm ............................. 61 62 63 69 73 84 86 86 86 87 87 89 89 92 95 97 97 98 99 Controls in detail ............................. 101 Locking and unlocking ....................... 102 SmartKey ..................................... 102 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ...... 107 Opening the doors from the inside 114 Opening the tailgate..................... 115 Closing the tailgate ...................... 117 Automatic central locking ............ 122 Locking and unlocking from the inside ........................................... 122 Seats ................................................. 124 Easy-entry/exit feature ............... 124 Removing and installing front seat head restraints ..................... 126 Rear seat head restraints ............. 127 Drive-Dynamic seat* with multicontour features................... 130 Seat heating*............................... 132 Seat ventilation* .......................... 133 Folding bench seat in cargo compartment ............................... 134 Memory function ............................... Storing positions in memory ........ Recalling positions from memory. Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position ........................... Lighting ............................................. Exterior lamp switch .................... Combination switch ..................... Hazard warning flasher ................ Interior lighting ............................ Door entry lamps ......................... Interior lighting in the rear ........... Instrument cluster ............................. Instrument cluster illumination .... Coolant temperature indicator..... Trip odometer .............................. Tachometer.................................. Outside temperature indicator ..... 138 139 139 140 141 141 145 146 147 149 149 150 150 151 151 152 152 Contents Control system .................................. Multifunction display.................... Multifunction steering wheel........ Menus .......................................... Standard display menu ................ AUDIO menu ................................ NAV* menu.................................. Distronic* menu........................... Vehicle status message memory menu.............................. Settings menu.............................. Trip computer menu..................... TEL menu* ................................... Automatic transmission..................... One-touch gearshifting................. Gear ranges ................................. Gear selector lever position ......... Automatic shift program .............. Driving tips................................... Emergency operation (Limp Home Mode) ...................... 153 153 154 156 158 158 160 160 161 162 178 179 183 185 186 187 188 189 190 Good visibility ..................................... 191 Headlamp cleaning system* ......... 191 Rear view mirror ........................... 191 Sun visors ..................................... 193 Roller sunblind* in the rear doors. 194 Rear window defroster.................. 195 Dual-zone automatic climate control .. 196 Deactivating the dual-zone automatic climate control system. 201 Setting the temperature................ 201 Adjusting air distribution............... 201 Adjusting air volume ..................... 202 Defrosting ..................................... 203 Air recirculation mode .................. 204 Air conditioning............................. 206 Residual heat and ventilation*...... 207 4-zone automatic climate control*..... 208 Deactivating the 4-zone automatic climate control system 213 Setting the temperature ............... 214 Adjusting air distribution .............. 214 Adjusting air volume ..................... 215 Defrosting..................................... 215 Maximum cooling MAX COOL....... 216 Air recirculation mode .................. 216 Air conditioning ............................ 218 Residual heat and ventilation....... 219 Rear air conditioning..................... 219 Power windows .................................. 221 Opening and closing the windows 221 Synchronizing power windows...... 223 Summer opening feature .............. 223 Convenience closing feature......... 224 Power tilt/sliding sunroof*................ 225 Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof ....................... 225 Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding sunroof ....................... 227 Contents Driving systems ................................. Cruise control............................... Distronic*..................................... Airmatic DC (Dual Control)* ......... Loading .............................................. Split rear bench seat .................... Expanding the cargo compartment................................ Loading instructions..................... Cargo tie-down rings .................... Cargo management system* (Canada only) ............................... Storage box in cargo compartment (Canada only) ......... Twin roller blind............................ Useful features .................................. Storage compartments................. Cup holders.................................. Ashtrays ....................................... Cigarette lighter ........................... 12-V socket* ................................ Heated steering wheel* ............... Floormats ..................................... Telephone*................................... Tele Aid* ...................................... Garage door opener ..................... 228 228 232 244 247 247 249 250 251 252 255 256 259 259 262 265 266 266 267 268 268 269 277 Operation ......................................... The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ......... Driving instructions............................ Drive sensibly – save fuel............. Drinking and driving ..................... Pedals .......................................... Power assistance ......................... Brakes.......................................... Driving off .................................... Parking......................................... Tires ............................................. Hydroplaning................................ Tire traction.................................. Tire speed rating .......................... Winter driving instructions ........... Standing water............................. Passenger compartment .............. Driving abroad.............................. Control and operation of radio transmitter ................................... Catalytic converter....................... Emission control .......................... Coolant temperature.................... 283 284 285 285 285 285 286 286 288 288 288 289 290 290 291 292 293 293 293 294 294 295 At the gas station .............................. Refueling...................................... Check regularly and before a long trip ....................................... Engine compartment ......................... Hood ............................................ Engine oil ..................................... Transmission fluid level................ Coolant level ................................ Battery ......................................... Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*......... Tires and wheels................................ Important guidelines .................... Tire care and maintenance........... Direction of rotation..................... Loading the vehicle ...................... Recommended tire inflation pressure....................................... Checking tire inflation pressure ... Tire labeling ................................. Load identification ....................... DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................. Maximum tire load ....................... Maximum tire inflation pressure .. 296 296 297 299 299 300 303 303 305 306 307 307 308 310 310 316 318 323 327 327 329 329 Contents Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (U.S. vehicles) ............. Tire ply material ........................... Tire and loading terminology........ Rotating tires ............................... Winter driving .................................... Winter tires .................................. Block heater* (Canada only) ........ Snow chains................................. Maintenance...................................... Clearing the maintenance service indicator........................... Maintenance service term exceeded ..................................... Calling up the maintenance service indicator........................... Resetting the maintenance service indicator........................... Setting the date for special works ........................................... Calling up the maintenance service data information .............. Vehicle care....................................... Cleaning and care of vehicle ........ 330 332 332 335 337 337 338 338 339 340 340 341 341 342 343 344 344 Practical hints .................................. 351 What to do if … ................................... 352 Lamps in instrument cluster ......... 352 Lamp in center console................. 360 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display..................... 362 Where will I find ...? ............................ 401 First aid kit.................................... 401 Vehicle tool kit, jack and spare wheel .................................. 401 Unlocking/locking in an emergency .. 404 Unlocking the vehicle.................... 404 Locking the vehicle ....................... 405 Fuel filler flap emergency release . 405 Manually unlocking the gear selector lever ........................ 405 Opening/closing in an emergency..... 407 Tilt/sliding sunroof*..................... 407 Replacing SmartKey batteries ............ 408 SmartKey ...................................... 408 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ....... 409 Replacing bulbs .................................. 410 Bulbs............................................. 410 Replacing bulbs for front lamps .... 413 Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ..... 415 Replacing wiper blades ...................... 416 Removing wiper blades................. 416 Installing wiper blades .................. 417 Flat tire............................................... 418 Preparing the vehicle .................... 418 Mounting the spare wheel ............ 419 Batteries............................................. 424 Disconnecting the battery ............ 426 Removing the battery ................... 426 Charging and reinstalling the battery .......................................... 427 Reconnecting the battery ............. 427 Jump starting...................................... 428 Towing the vehicle.............................. 430 Installing towing eye bolt .............. 433 Fuses.................................................. 434 Aids for replacing fuses ................ 434 Fuse box in passenger compartment ................................ 435 Fuse box in cargo compartment ... 435 Contents Technical data.................................. Parts service ...................................... Warranty coverage............................. Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet...................... Identification labels............................ Layout of poly-V-belt drive ................. E 320/E 500 ............................... Engine................................................ Rims and tires.................................... Same size tires ............................. Mixed size tires ............................ Minispare wheel ........................... Electrical system................................ Main dimensions................................ Weights.............................................. 437 438 439 439 440 441 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. .......... Capacities .................................... Engine oils.................................... Engine oil additives ...................... Air conditioning refrigerant .......... Brake fluid.................................... Premium unleaded gasoline ......... Gasoline additives ........................ Fuel requirements ........................ Coolants....................................... Windshield and headlamp washer system ......................................... 450 450 453 453 453 453 454 454 455 455 458 Technical terms............................... 459 Index................................................. 465 Introduction Product information 왔 Product information Please observe the following in your own best interest: We recommend using genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion parts and accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle model. We have tested these parts to determine their reliability, safety and special suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held responsible for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other agencies should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety, performance or reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use them. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will receive comprehensive information, also on permissible technical modifications, and where proper installation will be performed. 9 Introduction Operator’s Manual This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal of useful information. We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manual. Therefore, you may find explanations for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle. If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment, your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper procedures. 10 We continuously strive to improve our product, and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might differ from your vehicle. Service and warranty information 앫 New Car Limited Warranty Optional equipment is also described in this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are special-order items, the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your vehicle. 앫 Emission System Warranty 앫 Emission Performance Warranty 앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty (California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont only) 앫 State Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon Laws) If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator’s Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures.The Operator’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle. The Service and Warranty Information Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your Mercedes-Benz, including: Introduction Operator’s Manual Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz automobiles Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty after a reasonable number of repair attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18000 miles (approximately 29000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs: (1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the need for its repair, (2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for its repair, or (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days. Written notification should be sent to us, not a dealer, at Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Customer Assistance Center, One Mercedes Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350. 11 Introduction Operator’s Manual Maintenance Roadside Assistance Change of address or ownership The Maintenance Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be performed at regular intervals. The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program provides factory trained technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance number If you change your address, be sure to send in the “Change of Address Notice” found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in your own interest that we can contact you should the need arise. Always have the Maintenance Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for service. The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada) will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. For additional information refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure in your vehicle literature portfolio. 12 If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator. If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used Car” found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. Introduction Operator’s Manual If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that: Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program. For details, consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to: 앫 service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available, In the USA: 앫 unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available; the use of leaded fuels will damage the catalysts, 앫 gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can cause engine damage. Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 13 Introduction Where to find it This Operator’s Manual is designed to provide comprehensive support information for you, the vehicle operator. For easy access, each section has its own reference color: At a glance Here you will find an overview of all the controls that can be operated from the driver’s seat. Controls in detail Technical data Here you will find detailed information about the equipment installed in your vehicle. This section expands on the “Getting started” section and also describes technical innovations. If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle, this section will be of particular interest to you. All important technical data for your vehicle can be found in this section. Operation Getting started Here you will find all the information you need for your first drive. You should read this section first if this is your first Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are renting or borrowing this vehicle. Safety and Security Here you will find descriptions of the safety and security features of your vehicle. 14 Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your vehicle. Practical hints This section provides fast assistance for dealing with problems you may encounter. Indexes The glossary provides explanations of the most important technical terms. The table of contents and the index are designed to help you find information quickly and easily. The following publications are part of your vehicle documentation: 앫 this Operator’s Manual 앫 the Maintenance Booklet Separate operating instructions will be provided as required depending on the equipment options installed in your vehicle. Introduction Symbols 왔 Symbols The following symbols are found in this Operator’s Manual: * Optional equipment is identified with an asterisk. Since standard equipment varies between models, the descriptions and illustrations in this manual may differ slightly from the actual equipment of your vehicle. Warning! G Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. 왘 This symbol points to instructions for you to follow. 왘 A number of these symbols appearing in succession indicates a multiple-step procedure. 컄 Page ! Highlights hazards that may result in damage to your vehicle. 컄컄 This continuation symbol marks an interrupted procedure which will be continued on the next page. -> In the glossary of technical terms, this symbol is used to indicate cross-references to term definitions. DISPLAY Words appearing in the multifunction display are printed in the type shown here. i Helpful hints or further information you may find useful. This symbol tells you where to look for further information on a topic. 15 Introduction Operating safety Warning! G Work improperly carried out on electronic components and associated software could cause them to cease functioning. Because the vehicle’s electronic components are interconnected, any modifications made may produce an undesired effect on other systems. Electronic malfunctions could seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle. See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for repairs or modifications to electronic components. Other improper work or modifications on the vehicle could also have a negative impact on the operating safety of the vehicle. Some safety systems only function while the engine is running. You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving. 16 Warning! G Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or tires/wheels, for example when running over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole, may cause serious damage to and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a sudden strong vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage to your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road. Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or other qualified maintenance or repair facility for further inspection or repairs. Proper use of the vehicle Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are familiar with the following information and rules: 앫 the safety precautions in this manual 앫 the “Technical data” section in this manual 앫 traffic rules and regulations 앫 motor vehicle laws and safety standards Warning! G Various warning labels are attached to your vehicle. These warning labels are intended to make you and others aware of various risks. You should not remove any of these warning labels unless explicitly instructed to do so by information on the label itself. Removal of any of these labels may cause you and others to be unaware of certain risks which may result in an accident and/or personal injury. Introduction Problems with your vehicle 왔 Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses: In the USA: Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada: Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 17 Introduction Reporting safety defects For the USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966.” Reporting safety defects If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. 18 Introduction Vehicle data recording 왔 Vehicle data recording Information regarding electronic recording devices (Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951) Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system, may transmit some data in certain accidents. This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety. DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others 앫 for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes 앫 with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee 앫 in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency 앫 for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or 앫 as otherwise required or permitted by law. Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted via that system. 19 20 At a glance Cockpit Instrument cluster Multifunction steering wheel Center console Overhead control panel Door control panel 21 At a glance Cockpit 22 At a glance Cockpit Item 1 Parking brake pedal 2 Hood lock release 3 Steering wheel adjustment stalk Heated steering wheel* 4 Parking brake release Page 49, 56 299 41 267 Item 8 Headlamp washer button* e Starter switch 34 f Overhead control panel 29 236 g Mobile phone/Glasses box 259 앫 Distronic* 232 h Glove box lid release, glove box lock 259 j Glove box 259 a Instrument cluster Turn signals 51 앫 Windshield wipers 52 c Horn 앫 High beam 51 d Lever for voice control system*, see separate operating instructions 7 Exterior lamp switch Page Cruise control 앫 30 Item 앫 b Multifunction steering wheel 6 Door control panel 191 9 Cruise control lever 49 5 Combination switch Page 24, 150 26, 154 k Center console 27 141 23 At a glance Instrument cluster 24 At a glance Instrument cluster Item Page 1 L Left turn signal indicator lamp 2 v ABS/ ESP warning lamp Page 8 Tachometer with: 353 3 Speedometer 4 Multifunction display 153 5 l Distance warning lamp 357 Vehicles without Distronic*: Warning lamp without function. It illuminates when the ignition is on. It should go out when the engine is running. 7 Coolant temperature display with: Page 1 Supplemental restraint system indicator lamp 359 355 - Antilock Brake System (ABS) malfunction indicator lamp 352 ± Engine malfunction indicator lamp, Canada only < Seat belt telltale 357 H Tire pressure warning lamp* 358 390 B Low beam headlamp indicator 51 A High beam headlamp indicator 145 앫 Selector lever position 앫 Program mode a Clock with: 356 Item ? Engine malfunction indicator lamp, USA only 355 b Fuel display with: A Fuel reserve warning lamp 357 c Reset button for: 9 Main odometer with: 6 K Right turn signal indicator lamp • Coolant temperature warning lamp Item 47 앫 Resetting trip odometer 151 앫 Adjusting instrument cluster illumination 150 앫 Confirming new time settings 167 188 167 ; Brake warning lamp, USA only 354 3 Brake warning lamp, Canada only 354 25 At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Item 1 Multifunction display in speedometer Operating control system 2 Selecting the submenu or setting the volume: 153 Item 4 Menu systems: Press button 154 è for next system ÿ for previous system 5 Moving within a menu: Press button Press button æ up/to increase j for next display ç down/to decrease k for previous display 3 Telephone*: Press button s to take a call to dial a call t to end a call to reject an incoming call 26 Page Page At a glance Center console 왔 Center console Upper part Item 1 Dual-zone automatic climate control 4-zone automatic climate control* Page 196 Seat ventilation*, front passenger side 8 Rear window wiper 9 Seat heating*, driver’s side 208 2 COMAND system, see separate operating instructions 3 Seat heating*, front passenger side Item Seat ventilation*, driver’s side a Hazard warning flasher switch 132 b Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp Page 54 132 133 146 80 133 4 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) control switch 91 5 Central locking/unlocking switch 123 6 Opening/closing button for storage tray or CD changer*, see separate operating instructions 260 7 Rear seat head restraints switch, folding down 127 27 At a glance Center console Lower part Item 1 Ashtray 2 KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button 28 Page 265 36 3 Selector lever for automatic transmission 47, 183 4 Adaptive damping system (ADS)* switch 244 Item Page 5 Vehicle level control switch* 245 6 Thumbwheel for setting distance for Distronic* 239 7 Distance warning function* on/off switch 240 8 Program mode selector for automatic transmission 188 At a glance Overhead control panel 왔 Overhead control panel Item Page Item Page 1 Rear interior lighting on/off 149 7 Tele Aid (emergency call system) button 269 2 Automatic interior lighting 147 8 Rear view mirror 191 3 Front interior lighting on/off 147 9 Reading lamps 147 a Garage door opener 277 4 Temperature sensor b Tow-away alarm button 5 Right reading lamp on/off 148 c Ambient lighting 6 Tilt/sliding sunroof* 225 d Interior lighting e Left reading lamp on/off 99 173 148 29 At a glance Door control panel Item 1 Door handle 2 Seat adjustment 3 Memory function (for storing seat, exterior mirror and steering wheel settings) 4 Exterior rear view mirror adjustment 30 Page 114 39 138 42 5 Switches for opening/ closing front and rear side windows, rear window override switch 221 6 Remote tailgate release switch, Tailgate opening system* 122 Getting started Unlocking Adjusting Driving Parking and locking 31 Getting started Unlocking The “Getting started” section provides an overview of the vehicle’s most basic functions. Unlocking with the SmartKey Warning! When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. If you are already familiar with the basic functions described here, the “Controls in detail” section will provide you with further information. The corresponding page references are located at the end of each segment. SmartKey 1 ‹ Lock button 2 Š Unlock button for tailgate* 3 Œ Unlock button 4  Panic button (컄 page 86) 32 G 왘 Press unlock button Œ on the SmartKey. 앫 All turn signal lamps flash once. 앫 An acoustic signal sounds once (if equipped and feature activated). For more information, see “Factory setting” (컄 page 104). 앫 The locking knobs in the doors move up. 앫 The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. Getting started Unlocking i The SBC brake system is activated. 왘 Get in the vehicle and insert the SmartKey in the starter switch. For more information, see “Locking and unlocking” (컄 page 102). Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* Warning! G 왘 When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. With KEYLESS-GO your can open your vehicle without using the buttons on the SmartKey. Pull the outside door handle. 앫 All turn signal lamps flash once. 앫 An acoustic signal sounds once (if equipped and feature activated). For more information, see “Factory setting” (컄 page 110). 앫 The locking knobs in the doors move up. 앫 The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. i The SBC brake system is activated. i To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be outside the vehicle, no further than approximately 3 feet (1 meter) away from the door. 왘 Get in the vehicle. For more information, see “SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 107). 33 Getting started Unlocking Starter switch positions Warning! SmartKey G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 34 Starter switch 0 For removing SmartKey 1 Power supply to some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment 2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical consumers) and driving position. All lamps (expect low beam headlamp indicator lamp, high beam headlamp indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on when the ignition is switched on, have it checked and replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on after starting the engine or comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument cluster” (컄 page 352). 3 Starting position Getting started Unlocking i ! SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* When you switch on the ignition, the indicator and warning lamps (expect low beam headlamp indicator lamp, high beam headlamp indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. This indicates that the respective systems are operational. The indicator and warning lamps (expect low beam headlamp indicator lamp, high beam headlamp indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator lamps if activated) should go out when the engine is running. If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the starter switch, the starter battery may not be sufficiently charged. Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the gear selector lever corresponds to turning the SmartKey to the various starter switch positions. i The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P. 왘 Check the battery and charge it if necessary (컄 page 408). 왘 Get a jump start (컄 page 428). To prevent accelerated battery discharge or a completely discharged battery, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch when the engine is not in operation. If you firmly depress the brake pedal during pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, the engine starts automatically. i The function of the SmartKey overrules the KEYLESS-GO function. For information on starting the engine using the SmartKey, see “Starting the engine” (컄 page 47). 35 Getting started Unlocking Position 0 Ignition (or position 2) Before you press the KEYLESS-GO start/ stop button, the vehicle's on-board electronics have status 0 (as with SmartKey removed). 왘 Position 1 왘 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button 1 USA only 2 Canada only The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be located in the vehicle. 왘 Make sure the gear selector lever is set to P. 왘 Do not depress the brake pedal. 36 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once. This supplies power to some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment. i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button 앫 앫 once again, the ignition (position 2) is switched on. twice, the power supply is again switched off. Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button twice. This supplies power to all electrical consumers. All lamps in the instrument cluster (expect low beam headlamp indicator lamp, high beam headlamp indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) come on. If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on when the ignition is switched on, have it checked and replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on after starting the engine or comes on while driving, see “Lamps in instrument cluster” (컄 page 352). i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once, the power supply is again switched off. Getting started Unlocking i When you switch on the ignition, the indicator and warning lamps (expect low beam headlamp indicator lamp, high beam headlamp indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. This indicates that the respective systems are operational. The indicator and warning lamps (expect low beam headlamp indicator lamp, high beam headlamp indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator lamps if activated) should go out when the engine is running. For information on starting the engine using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, see “Starting with KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 48). 37 Getting started Adjusting Warning! G All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fastening of seat belts, must be done before the vehicle is put into motion. G Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving. Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The seat back and seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and belts are properly positioned on the body. 38 Never place hands under the seat or near any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted. Warning! Seats Warning! Your seat must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt (컄 page 44). G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle, the power seats can be operated when the respective door is open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Warning! G According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. For additional information, see “Children in the vehicle” (컄 page 73). A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Getting started Adjusting Seat adjustment Seat fore and aft adjustment Seat cushion tilt The seat adjustment switches are located on the front doors. 왘 왘 Press the switch forward or backward in the direction of arrow 4. Adjust a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal safely. The position should be as far to the rear as possible, consistent with ability to properly operate controls. Backrest tilt 왘 i 1 Head restraint height 2 Seat height 3 Seat cushion tilt 4 Seat fore and aft adjustment 5 Backrest tilt 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34). or 왘 When moving the seat, be sure there are no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise you could damage the seats. Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 3 until your upper legs are lightly supported. Press the switch forward or backward in the direction of arrow 5 until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel. Seat height 왘 Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 2. The memory function (컄 page 138) lets you store the setting for the seat position together with the setting for the steering wheel and the exterior rear view mirrors. Open the respective door. 39 Getting started Adjusting Head restraint tilt Head restraint height 왘 Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 1. Warning! Warning! G Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident. Manually adjust the angle of the head restraint. 왘 Push or pull on the lower edge of the head restraint cushion. i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible. For more information on seats, see the “Controls in detail” section (컄 page 124). 40 G Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints. Adjust head restraint so that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation. Steering wheel When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock your vehicle. Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle, the steering wheel adjustment feature can be operated when the driver’s door is open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Getting started Adjusting Steering wheel adjustment Adjusting steering column in or out The stalk for steering wheel adjustment is located on the steering column (lower left). 왘 Move stalk forward or back in the direction of arrow 1 until a comfortable steering wheel position is reached with your arms slightly bent at the elbow. Mirrors Adjust the interior and exterior rear view mirrors before driving so that you have a good view of the road and traffic conditions. Adjusting steering column up or down 왘 1 Adjusting steering column, in or out 2 Adjusting steering column, up or down 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34). or 왘 Open the driver’s door. Move stalk up or down in the direction of arrow 2. Make sure your legs can move freely and that all the displays (incl. malfunction and indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster are clearly visible. i The memory function (컄 page 138) lets you store the setting for the seat position together with the setting for the steering wheel and the exterior rear view mirrors. For more information, see “Heated steering wheel*”(컄 page 267). Warning! G In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks. Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary. ! Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can only be completely removed while in their liquid state and by applying plenty of water. 41 Getting started Adjusting Interior rear view mirror 왘 Manually adjust the interior rear view mirror. The buttons are located on the driver’s door. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34). 왘 Press button 3 for the driver’s side exterior rear view mirror or button 1 for the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. 왘 Push adjustment button 2 up, down, left or right according to the setting desired. For more information, see “Rear view mirror” (컄 page 191). Exterior rear view mirror Warning! G Exercise care when using the passenger side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes. 42 1 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror button 2 Adjustment button 3 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror button Getting started Adjusting ! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the front), reposition it by applying firm pressure until it snaps into place. The mirror housing is now properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror normally. For more information, see “Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position” (컄 page 192). For more information, see “Rear view mirror” (컄 page 191). i The memory function (컄 page 138) lets you store the setting for the seat position together with the setting for the steering wheel and the exterior rear view mirrors. At low ambient temperatures, the exterior rear view mirrors will be heated automatically. 43 Getting started Driving Warning! G Do not lay any objects in the driver’s footwell. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in the driver’s footwell have sufficient clearance for the pedals. During sudden driving or braking maneuvers the objects could get caught between the pedals. You could then no longer brake or accelerate. Fastening the seat belts Warning! G Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Always make sure all of your passengers are properly restrained, even those sitting in the rear and pregnant women. 44 Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident. You and your passengers should always wear seat belts. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt. The air bags can only provide the protection they were designed to afford if the occupants are using their seat belts (컄 page 69). Warning! G According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. For additional information, see “Children in the vehicle” (컄 page 73). A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Getting started Driving Warning! G Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available. Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. Warning! G Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body. Warning! G Read and observe the additional warning notices printed in the “Safety and Security” section (컄 page 66) and (컄 page 69). 1 Retractor 2 Latch plate 3 Buckle 4 Release button 45 Getting started Driving 왘 Place the shoulder portion of the belt across the top of your shoulder and the lap portion across your hips. 왘 Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3 until it clicks. 왘 If necessary, tighten the lap portion to a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up. Belt outlet height adjustment 1 Release button 왘 Press release button 1 and move the seat belt height adjuster upward or downward. 46 Proper use of seat belts 앫 Do not twist the belt when fastening. 앫 Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder (it should not touch the neck). Never pass the shoulder portion of the belt under your arm. 앫 Check your seat belt periodically during travel to make sure that it is properly positioned. 앫 Make sure that the seat belt is always fitted snugly. Take special care of this when wearing loose clothing. Warning! G 앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips (over hip joint) and not across the abdomen. Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They could tear. 앫 Place the seat backrest in a nearly upright position. Do not allow the belt to get caught in the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. This could damage the belt. 앫 Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. 앫 Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same time. When using a seat belt to secure infant or toddler restraints or children in booster seats, always follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions. Never attempt to make modifications to seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the belts. Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection. Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Getting started Driving Starting the engine Warning! Automatic transmission For information on turning off the engine with the SmartKey, see “Turning off engine” (컄 page 57). G Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death. Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open. Starting with the SmartKey 왘 Make sure the gear selector lever is set to P. 왘 Do not depress the accelerator. 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 and hold until the engine starts (컄 page 34). Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission i P Park position with gear selector lever lock R Reverse gear N Neutral D Drive position For more information, see the “Controls in detail” section (컄 page 183). You can also use the “touch-start” function. Turn the SmartKey to position 3 and release it again immediately. The engine then starts automatically. 왘 Depress the brake pedal. The selector lever lock is released. 47 Getting started Driving Starting with KEYLESS-GO* Warning! G As long as the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in your vehicle, the vehicle can be started. Therefore, never leave children unattended in the vehicle, as they could otherwise accidentally start the engine. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. You can start your vehicle without the SmartKey in the starter switch using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the gear selector lever. For information on turning off the engine with KEYLESS-GO, see “Turning off with KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 59). The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be located in the vehicle. 48 왘 Make sure the gear selector lever is set to P. 왘 Depress the brake pedal during the starting procedure. Do not depress accelerator. The selector lever lock is released. 왘 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button 1 USA only 2 Canada only Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once. The engine starts automatically if the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in the vehicle. Getting started Driving Starting difficulties If the engine does not start as described, carry out the following steps: 왘 If you are starting the engine with the SmartKey, turn SmartKey in starter switch to position 0 and repeat starting procedure. 왘 If you are starting the engine with KEYLESS-GO: Close any doors that may be open to allow for better detection of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO. Or: Start the engine with the SmartKey as radio signals from another source may be interfering with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO. 왘 Repeat the starting procedure (컄 page 47). Remember that extended starting attempts can drain the battery. 왘 Get a jump start (컄 page 428). If the engine does not start after several starting attempts, there could be a malfunction in the engine electronics or in the fuel supply system. 왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Parking brake Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking brake, which could result in an accident and/or serious injury. 왘 Release the parking brake by pulling on release handle 2. The warning lamp ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only) in the instrument cluster goes out. 1 Parking brake pedal 2 Release handle 49 Getting started Driving Driving ! 왘 Depress the brake pedal. 왘 Move selector lever to position D or R. If you hear a warning signal and a message appears in the multifunction display when driving off, you have forgotten to release the parking brake. i Wait for the gear selection process to complete before setting the vehicle in motion. 왘 Release the brake pedal. 왘 Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic central locking system engages and the locking knobs drop down. i You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so. 50 Release the parking brake. After a cold start the automatic transmission engages at a higher revolution. This allows the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature earlier. Warning! G On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control. Warning! G It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. For more information on driving, see “Driving instructions” (컄 page 285). ! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear. Getting started Driving Switching on headlamps High beam Low beam headlamps The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column. Turn signals The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column. The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel. Combination switch Exterior lamp switch 1 Off 2 Low beam headlamps on 왘 Turn exterior lamp switch to position B. The low beam headlamp indicator lamp B in the instrument cluster comes on (컄 page 141). 1 High beam 2 High beam flasher 왘 Turn combination switch in direction of arrow 1. The high beam headlamp indicator lamp A in the instrument cluster comes on (컄 page 24). Combination switch 1 Turn signal, right 2 Turn signal, left 왘 Press combination switch in direction of arrow 1 or 2. The corresponding turn signal indicator lamp L or K in the instrument cluster flashes. For more information on headlamps, see “Lighting” (컄 page 141). 51 Getting started Driving The combination switch resets automatically after major steering wheel movements. i Windshield wipers The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column. Switching on windshield wipers 왘 Turn the combination switch to the desired position depending on the intensity of the rain. 0 Windshield wipers off To signal minor directional changes such as changing lanes, press combination switch only to point of resistance and release. The corresponding turn signals will flash three times. I Intermittent wiping II Normal wiper speed III Fast wiper speed i Combination switch 1 Single wipe 2 Switching on windshield wipers 왘 52 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34). Intermittent wiping interval is dependent on wetness of windshield. After the initial wipe, pauses between wipes are automatically controlled by the rain sensor. Getting started Driving ! Intermittent wiping ! Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent setting when the vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during windshield cleaning. Wipers will operate in the presence of water sprayed on the windshield, and wipers may be damaged as a result. The combination switch should not be left in intermittent setting as the wipers will wipe the windshield once every time the engine is started. Dust that accumulates on the windshield might scratch the glass and/or damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on a dry windshield. 왘 If anything blocks the windshield wipers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off immediately. Turn the combination switch to position I. i Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is opened. 앫 For safety reasons, 앫 Single wipe 왘 Press switch briefly in the direction of arrow 1. The windshield wipers wipe one time without washer fluid. Wiping with windshield washer fluid 왘 Push switch in the direction of arrow 1 past the resistance point. The windshield wipers operate with washer fluid. turn off the engine by turning the SmartKey to position 0 and withdraw SmartKey from starter switch or 앫 turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button and open the driver’s door (with the driver’s door open, starter switch is in position 0, same as with SmartKey removed from starter switch) before attempting to remove any blockage. For information on filling up the washer reservoir, see “Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*” (컄 page 306). 53 Getting started Driving 앫 Remove blockage. Rear window wiper/washer 앫 Turn the windshield wipers on again. The switch is located on the center console. Deactivating intermittent wipe 왘 Indicator lamp 2 goes out. If windshield wipers fail to function at all in switch position I, 앫 set the combination switch to the next highest wiper speed 앫 have the windshield wipers checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Wiping with window washer fluid 왘 Press and hold lower half 3 of the switch. The rear window is wiped for a further five seconds after the switch is released. 1 Intermittent wipe 2 Indicator lamp 3 Rear window washer system Activating intermittent wipe 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34) 왘 Press upper section 1 of the switch. Indicator lamp 2 comes on. 54 Press upper section 1 of the switch again. Getting started Driving Problems while driving The coolant temperature is above 248°F (120°C) The engine runs erratically and misfires The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling the engine. In case of accident If the vehicle is leaking fuel: 왘 Do not start the engine under any circumstances. 왘 Notify local fire and/or police authorities. 앫 An ignition cable may be damaged. 앫 The engine electronics may not be operating properly. 앫 Unburned gasoline may have entered the catalytic converter and damaged it. 왘 Give very little gas. 왘 왘 Have the problem repaired by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. If no damage can be determined on the 왘 Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and turn off the engine. Allow engine and coolant to cool. 왘 Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary (컄 page 303). If the extent of the damage cannot be determined: Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 앫 major assemblies 앫 fuel system 앫 engine mount: 왘 Start the engine in the usual manner. 55 Getting started Parking and locking You have now completed your first drive. You have properly stopped and parked your vehicle. End your drive as follows. Warning! Parking brake Warning! G With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. 1 Parking brake pedal 2 Release handle 왘 Step firmly on parking brake pedal 1. When the engine is running, the warning lamp ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only) in the instrument cluster will be illuminated. 56 G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking brake and/or move the gear selector lever from position P, either of which could result in an accident and/or serious injury. Getting started Parking and locking Warning! G Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in position P is dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline, position P alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or objects. Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P. When parked on an incline, turn front wheels towards the road curb. Switching off headlamps 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to M (컄 page 51). Turning off with the SmartKey 왘 For more information, see the “Controls in detail” section (컄 page 141). i Turning off engine 왘 The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P. Place the gear selector lever in position P. i Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P. On slopes, turn the front wheels towards the road curb. Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch (컄 page 34) to position 0 and remove it. The immobilizer is activated. 왘 Press the seat belt release button (컄 page 45). Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by guiding the latch plate. 컄컄 57 Getting started Parking and locking 컄컄 왘 i With the SmartKey removed and the driver’s door open, a warning sounds and the message Switch off lights appears in the multifunction display if the vehicle’s exterior lamps are not switched off. Warning! 앫 All turn signal lamps flash three times. 앫 An acoustic signal sounds three times (if equipped and feature activated). For more information, see “Factory setting” (컄 page 104). 앫 The locking knobs in the doors move down. 앫 The anti-theft alarm system is armed. G To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the door openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are around. Before closing doors, make sure that there is no possibility of someone getting caught in a door during closing. 58 After exiting the vehicle press the lock button ‹ on the SmartKey (컄 page 32). Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. For more information, see the “Controls in detail” section (컄 page 102). Getting started Parking and locking Turning off with KEYLESS-GO* ! 왘 Place the gear selector lever in P. 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button to shut off the engine. If you hear a warning signal, you have either With the driver's door closed, the starter switch is now in position 1. With the driver’s door opened, the starter switch is set to position 0, same as SmartKey removed from starter switch (컄 page 34). 왘 Press the seat belt release button (컄 page 45). 앫 forgotten to switch off the vehicle’s exterior lamps before opening the driver’s door, or 앫 tried to turn off the engine while the gear selector lever is not in P. Warning! G To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the door openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are around. Before closing doors, make sure that there is no possibility of someone getting caught in a door during closing. Turn off the lights or place the gear selector lever in P. Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by guiding the latch plate. 59 컄컄 Getting started Parking and locking 왘 컄컄 After exiting the vehicle, press lock button 1 on the door handle or on the tailgate. 앫 All turn signal lamps flash three times. 앫 An acoustic signal sounds three times (if equipped and feature activated). For more information, see “Factory setting” (컄 page 110). 앫 The locking knobs in the doors move down. 앫 The anti-theft alarm system is armed. 1 Lock button on the door handle 60 Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. For more information, see the “Controls in detail” section (컄 page 107). Safety and Security Occupant safety Panic alarm Driving safety systems Anti-theft systems 61 Safety and Security Occupant safety In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint system components of the vehicle. 앫 Seat belts (컄 page 69) 앫 Child restraints (컄 page 73) 앫 Lower anchors and tethers for children (LATCH) (컄 page 83) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) with 앫 Air bags (컄 page 63) 앫 Air bag control unit (with crash sensors) 앫 Emergency tensioning device (ETD) for seat belts (컄 page 72) 62 Air bag system components with 앫 75 indicator lamp (컄 page 80) 앫 Front passenger seat with Occupant Classification System (OCS) (컄 page 76) As independent systems, their protective functions work in conjunction with each other. i For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle” (컄 page 73). The SRS system conducts a self-test when the ignition is switched on and in regular intervals while the engine is running. This facilitates early detection of malfunctions. The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on and goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine has been started. The SRS components are in operational readiness if the 1 indicator lamp is not lit when the engine is running. A malfunction in the system has been detected if the 1 indicator lamp: 앫 fails to go out after approximately four seconds after the engine was started 앫 does not come on at all 앫 comes on after the engine was started or while driving Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning! G In the event that the 1 indicator lamp comes on during driving or does not come on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a malfunction. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked; otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury. In addition, improper repair work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a local authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) for details. Air bags Warning! G Air bags are designed to reduce the potential of injury and fatality in certain frontal impacts (front air bags), side impacts (side impact air bags and head protection window curtain air bags) or rollovers (head protection window curtain air bags). However, no system available today can totally eliminate injuries and fatalities. The deployment of the air bags temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the air bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door. 63 Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning! G 앫 Adjust the driver seat as far as possible rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance from the center of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the air bag cover on the steering wheel must be at least 10 in (25 cm) or more. You should be able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 앫 Do not lean your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dashboard. Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants. 앫 Keep hands on the outside of steering wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand/arm injury when driver front air bag inflates. If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you make the buyer aware of this safety information. Be sure to give the buyer this Operator’s Manual. 앫 Adjust the front passenger seat as far as possible rearward from the dashboard when the seat is occupied. To reduce the risk of injury when the front air bags inflate, it is very important for the driver and front passenger to always be in a properly seated position and to wear their respective seat belts. For maximum protection in the event of a collision always be in normal seated position with your back against the backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure that it is properly positioned on your body. Since the air bag inflates with considerable speed and force, a proper seating and hands on steering wheel position will help to keep you at a safe distance from the air bag. Occupants who are unbelted, out of position or too close to the air bag can be seriously injured by an air bag as it inflates with great force in the blink of an eye: 앫 64 Sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with your back against the seat backrest. 앫 Occupants, especially children, should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door where the side impact air bag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the air bag be triggered. Always sit nearly upright, properly use the seat belts and use an appropriately sized infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning! G Accident research shows that the safest place for children in an automobile is in the rear seat. It should be noted that with respect to both front and rear side impact air bags there is a possibility for a side impact air bag related injury if occupants, especially children, are not properly seated or restrained when next to a side impact air bag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job. To help avoid the possibility of injury, please follow these guidelines: (1) Occupants, especially children, should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door where the side impact air bag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the side impact air bag be deployed. (2) Always sit nearly upright, properly use the seat belts and for children 12 years old and under, use an appropriately sized infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. (3) Always wear seat belts properly. If you believe that, even with the use of these guidelines, it would be safer for your rear seat occupants to have the rear mounted side impact air bags deactivated, then deactivation can be accomplished upon your written request to do so at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional cost. i Air bags are designed to deploy only in certain frontal impacts (front air bags), side impacts (side impact and head protection window curtain air bags) which exceed preset thresholds and in certain rollovers (head protection window curtain air bags). Only during these events will they provide their supplemental protection. The driver and passengers should always wear their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible for air bags to provide their supplemental protection. Please contact your local authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) for details. 65 Safety and Security Occupant safety In case of other types of impacts and impacts below air bag deployment thresholds, air bags will not be deployed. The driver and passenger will then be protected to the extent possible by a properly fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also needed to provide the best possible protection in a rollover. We caution you not to rely on the presence of the air bags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt. It is important to your safety and that of your passengers that you replace deployed air bags and repair any malfunctioning air bags to make sure that the vehicle will continue to provide supplemental crash protection for occupants. 66 Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency tensioning device and air bag Warning! 앫 No modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the SRS. This includes changing or removing any component or part of the SRS, the installation of additional trim material, badges etc. over the steering wheel hub, passenger front air bag cover, door trim panels, or door frame trims, and installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near SRS components and wiring. Keep area between air bags and occupants free from objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.). 앫 Do not hang items such as coat hangers from the coat hooks or handles over the door. These items may turn into projectiles and cause head and other injuries when curtain air bag is deployed. 앫 Never place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat. 앫 Air bag system components will be hot after an air bag has inflated. Do not touch. G 앫 Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked. Use only belts installed or supplied by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 앫 Air bags and emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD that was activated must be replaced. 앫 Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They could tear. 앫 Do not make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the belts. 앫 Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection. Safety and Security Occupant safety 앫 앫 앫 In addition, improper repair work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. For your protection and the protection of others, when scrapping the air bag unit or emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Given the considerable deployment speed, required inflation volume, and the textile structure of the air bags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other more significant injuries resulting from air bag deployment. Warning! G Front air bags Only use seat covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. Using other seat covers may interfere with or prevent the deployment of the front side impact air bags. Contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for availability. When you sell your vehicle we strongly urge you to give notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with an SRS by alerting them to the applicable section in the Operator’s Manual. 1 Driver’s air bag 2 Passenger air bag Driver and front passenger air bags are deployed: 앫 in the event of certain frontal impacts 앫 if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold 앫 independently of the side impact air bags 67 Safety and Security Occupant safety i The front air bags in this vehicle have been designed to inflate in two stages. This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as assessed by the air bag control unit. On the front passenger side, the front air bag deployment is additionally influenced by the passenger’s weight category as identified by the Occupant Classification System (OCS) (컄 page 76). The lighter the front passenger side occupant, the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required for the second stage inflation of the air bag. 68 The air bags will not deploy in impacts which do not exceed the system’s deployment thresholds. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts. Side impact air bags, window curtain air bags The passenger front air bag will only be deployed if: 앫 the system, based on OCS weight sensor readings, senses that the front passenger seat is occupied 앫 the 75 indicator lamp in the center console is not lit (컄 page 80) 앫 the impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold 1 Side impact air bags 2 Window curtain air bag The side impact air bags and window curtain air bags are deployed: 앫 on the impacted side of the vehicle 앫 in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold 앫 independently of the front air bags Safety and Security Occupant safety In addition, the window curtain air bags 2 are deployed: 앫 앫 and the vehicle speed does not exceed 15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt telltale < remains illuminated for as long as either the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt are not fastened. The seat belt telltale < will only go out if both the driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt (with the front passenger seat occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a front door is opened. 앫 and the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt telltale < starts flashing and a warning chime sounds with increasing intensity until both the driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt are fastened, or for a maximum of 60 seconds from the time the vehicle speed exceeded 15 mph (25 km/h) if either the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt remains unfastened. For more information, see “Practical hints” (컄 page 357). in certain vehicle rollovers The side impact air bags and window curtain air bags are not deployed in impacts which do not exceed the system’s deployment threshold. Seat belts When the engine is started the seat belt telltale < illuminates for approximately six seconds. A warning chime sounds to remind you to fasten your seat belt. If after these six seconds, the driver’s or the front passenger’s seat belt (with the front passenger seat occupied) are not fastened with all doors closed, If the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt remains unfastened after 60 seconds, the seat belt telltale < stops flashing and the warning chime stops sounding. The seat belt telltale < then continues to be illuminated for as long as either the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt are not fastened. The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint systems is required by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces. Even where this is not the case, all vehicle occupants should have their seat belts fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion. For more information, see “Fastening the seat belts” (컄 page 44). 69 Safety and Security Occupant safety i For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle” (컄 page 73). Warning! G Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Always make sure all of your passengers are properly restrained, even those sitting in the rear and pregnant women. Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident. You and your passengers should always wear seat belts. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are properly wearing your seat belt. Air bags can only protect as they are designed if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts. 70 Warning! G Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body. Warning! G Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available. Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning! G Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked. Warning! Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection. Have all work carried out only by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal (front air bags and ETD) and side (side impact and window curtain air bags and ETD) impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds and in certain rollovers (window curtain air bags and ETD). USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY 앫 Seat belts can only work when used properly. Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident. 앫 Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all times, because seat belts help reduce the likelihood of and potential severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint system includes SRS (driver air bag, passenger front air bag, side impact air bags, head protection window curtain air bags for side windows), ETD (seat belt emergency tensioning device), and front seat knee bolsters. Only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Do not make any modifications to the seat belts. This can lead to unintended activation or to failure. G 앫 Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. In a frontal crash, your body would move too far forward. That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries. The belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal or컄컄 gans such as your liver or spleen. 71 Safety and Security Occupant safety 컄컄 앫 앫 앫 앫 Never wear belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing, such as eyeglasses, pens, SmartKeys etc., as these might cause injuries. Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is positioned across your abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in a crash. Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another person or other objects. Belts should not be worn twisted. In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to distribute impact forces. The twisted belt against your body could cause injuries. 앫 Pregnant women should also use a lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen. 앫 Never place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat. 앫 When using a seat belt to secure infant or toddler restraints or children in booster seats, always follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions. Emergency tensioning device (ETD), seat belt force limiter The seat belts for the front and rear outer seats are equipped with emergency tensioning devices and belt force limiters. The ETD is designed to activate in the following cases: 앫 in frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding a preset severity level 앫 in certain vehicle rollovers 앫 if the restraint systems are operational and functioning correctly, see 1 indicator lamp i The ETDs for the front seats will only activate if the front seat belts are fastened (latch plate properly inserted into buckle). The ETDs for the rear outer seats will activate with or without the respective seat belts fastened. 72 Safety and Security Occupant safety In an impact, emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the belts. Belt force limiters reduce the force exerted by the seat belts on occupants during a crash. Warning! G An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that was activated must be replaced. When disposing of the emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be followed. These are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Automatic comfort-fit feature seat belt An automatic comfort-fit feature for front seats reduces the retracting force of the seat belts when they are in normal use. Children in the vehicle Infant and child restraint systems If an infant or child is traveling with you in the vehicle: We recommend all infants and children be properly restrained at all times while the vehicle is in motion. 앫 Secure the child using an infant or child restraint appropriate to the age and size of the child. 앫 Make sure that the infant or child is properly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion. Infant and child restraint seats and information on choosing an appropriate restraint system can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Center. All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s seat belt have special seat belt retractors for secure fastening of child restraints. To fasten a child restraint, follow child restraint instructions for mounting. Then pull the shoulder belt out completely and let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate that the special seat belt retractor is activated. The belt is now locked. Push down on child restraint to take up any slack. To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and let seat belt retract completely. The seat belt can again be used in the usual manner. 73 Safety and Security Occupant safety i Information on child seats with mounting fittings for tether anchorages (컄 page 82). For information on LATCH-type child seat mounts (컄 page 83). ! The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces. Infants and small children should be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system properly secured by a lap/shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a top tether anchorage point and a child restraint lower anchorage system that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2. 74 Warning! G Never release the seat belt buckle while the vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt retractor will be deactivated. ! A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of compliance with this standard can be found on the instruction label on the restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint. When using any infant or child restraint system, be sure to carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use. Please read and observe warning labels affixed to the inside of the vehicle and to infant or child restraints. Warning! G According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or child restraint recommended for the size and weight of the child. The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer's instructions. Safety and Security Occupant safety Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag. Note the following important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front passenger seat: 앫 Your vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to turn off the front passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the OCS senses the weight of a typical 12-month-old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front passenger seat. 앫 A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances, even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle. The only means to completely eliminate this risk is to never place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the back seat. 앫 If you must install a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat because circumstances require you to do so, make sure that the 75 indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front passenger air bag is deactivated. Should the light not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. Periodically check the indicator lamp while driving to make sure the lamp is illuminated. If the 75 indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates. 앫 If you have to place a child in a forward-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible, use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of the child, and secure child restraint with the vehicle's seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions. For children larger than the typical 12-month-old child, the front passenger air bag may or may not be activated (컄 page 78). 75 Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning! G Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant. During an accident, they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt. A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Children too big for a toddler restraint must ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a booster. 76 When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an accident. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if the children are secured in a child restraint system. Unsupervised children in a child restraint system may use vehicle equipment and may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Occupant Classification System The Occupant Classification System (OCS) automatically turns the front passenger front air bag on or off based on the classified occupant weight category determined by weight sensor readings from the front passenger seat. i The system does not deactivate the front passenger side impact air bag, the window curtain air bag and the emergency tensioning device. Occupants must sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with their back against the seat backrest and feet on the floor to be correctly classified. If the occupant's weight is transferred to another object in the vehicle (e.g. by leaning on armrests), the OCS may not be able to properly approximate the occupant’s weight category. Safety and Security Occupant safety Furthermore, the occupant weight may appear to increase or decrease due to objects hanging on the seat, other passengers pushing on the seat, objects lodged underneath the seat or stuffed between seat and middle console or between seat and door or due to objects applying pressure on the back of the seat. Always make sure that the seat has clearance in all directions at all times. i If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way, take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Only seat accessories approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used. Both driver and the front passenger should always use the 75 indicator lamp as an indication of whether or not the front passenger is properly positioned. Warning! G If the 75 indicator lamp illuminates when an adult or someone larger than a small individual is in the front passenger seat, have the front passenger re-position himself or herself in the seat until the light goes out, or check whether objects are caught under or around the seat. More information about air bag display messages (컄 page 369). In the event of a collision, the air bag control unit will not allow front passenger front air bag deployment when the OCS classified the front passenger seat occupant as being up to or less than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or if the front passenger seat is sensed as being empty. When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as being up to or less than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint, the 75 indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated, indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated. When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat is classified as being empty, the 75 indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated, indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated. 컄컄 77 Safety and Security Occupant safety 컄컄 When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as being heavier than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child seated in a standard child restraint or as being a small individual (such as a young teenager or a small adult), the 75 indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately six seconds when the engine is started and then, depending on occupant weight sensor readings from the seat, remain illuminated or go out. With the 75 indicator lamp illuminated, the front passenger front air bag is deactivated. With the 75 indicator lamp out, the front passenger front air bag is activated. If the 75 indicator lamp is illuminated, the front passenger front air bag is deactivated and will not be deployed. 앫 the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as assessed by the air bag control unit When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as an adult or someone larger than a small individual, the 75 indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately six seconds when the engine is started and then go out, indicating that the front passenger front air bag is activated. 앫 front passenger's weight category as identified by the Occupant Classification System (OCS). 78 If the 75 indicator lamp is not illuminated, the front passenger front air bag is activated and will be deployed: 앫 in the event of certain frontal impacts 앫 if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold 앫 independently of the side impact air bags. If the front passenger air bag is deployed, the rate of inflation will be influenced by: Warning! G According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or child restraint recommended for the size and weight of the child. The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer's instructions. Safety and Security Occupant safety Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag. Note the following important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front passenger seat: 앫 Your vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to turn off the front passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the system senses the weight of a typical 12-month-old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front passenger seat. 앫 A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances, even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle. The only means to completely eliminate this risk is to never place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the back seat. 앫 If you must install a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat because circumstances require you to do so, make sure that the 75 indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front passenger air bag is deactivated. Should the light not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. Periodically check the indicator lamp while driving to make sure the lamp is illuminated. If the 75 indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates. 앫 If you have to place a child in a forward-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible, use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of the child, and secure child restraint with the vehicle's seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions. For children larger than the typical 12-month-old child, the front passenger air bag may or may not be activated (컄 page 78). 79 Safety and Security Occupant safety i 앫 Deployment of the driver front air bag does not mean that the front passenger front air bag also should have deployed. The Occupant Classification System (컄 page 76) may have determined: 앫 that the seat was empty or occupied by the weight up to or less than that of a typical 12-month-old child seated in a standard child restraint - both instances where the system suppresses deployment of the passenger front air bag even though the impact met the criteria and was of sufficient severity to deploy the driver front air bag. that the seat was occupied by a small individual (such as a young teenager or a small adult) or a child weighing more than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint - instances where the system may suppress deployment of the passenger front air bag even though the impact met the criteria and was of sufficient severity to deploy the driver front air bag. The 75 indicator lamp is located in the center console. 1 Indicator lamp 80 The 75 indicator lamp 1 will be illuminated, except with the SmartKey removed or in starter switch position 0. Warning! G If the 1 indicator lamp and the 75 indicator lamp are lit at the same time, there is a malfunction in the Occupant Classification System. The front passenger front air bag will be deactivated in this case. In order to ensure proper operation of the airbag system and OCS: 앫 Have the system checked as soon as possible by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 앫 Do not place more than 4.4 lbs (2 kg) into the ruffled storage bag on the back of the front passenger seat. Otherwise, the OCS may not be able to properly approximate the occupant weight category. Safety and Security Occupant safety 앫 Do not place objects under and/or around the front passenger seat. 앫 Do not hang anything from or attach any items to the seats. 앫 Do not stuff objects such as books between the middle console and the front passenger seat. 앫 Do not move the front passenger seat backwards against stiff objects. 앫 Sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with your back against the seat backrest. 앫 Do not lean on the armrests or lift yourself from the seat by using the handle over the door as this may cause the OCS to be unable to correctly approximate the occupant weight category. 앫 Only have the seat repaired or replaced by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 앫 Read and observe all warnings in this chapter. Self-test Occupant Classification System After turning the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or twice, the 75 indicator lamp 1 located in the center console illuminates. If an adult occupant is properly sitting on the front passenger seat and the system senses the occupant as being an adult, the 75 indicator lamp will illuminate and go out after approximately six seconds. If the seat is not occupied and the system senses the front passenger seat as being empty, the 75 indicator lamp will illuminate and not go out. Warning! G If the indicator lamp should not illuminate, the system is not functioning. You must see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before seating any child on the front passenger seat. For more information, see the “Practical hints” section (컄 page 369). Warning! G Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces the effectiveness of the Occupant Classification System. The bottom of the child seat must make full contact with the passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause injuries to the child in case of an accident, instead of increasing protection for the child. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation of child seats. 81 Safety and Security Occupant safety Installation of infant and child restraint systems Prior to installing a tether strap, note the following steps: 왘 Roll up retractable luggage cover and partition net. 왘 Remove storage box (if so equipped) (컄 page 256). If the storage box is not removed: 앫 앫 왘 the top tether anchorage ring located on the floor (컄 page 83) for use with a child restraint in the rear center seat position cannot be accessed. 82 i Do not reinstall twin roller blind with a child seat and top tether installed in the left and center rear seat position. With a child seat and top tether installed in the right rear seat position and twin roller blind installed, make sure the top tether strap is positioned between seat backrest and twin roller blind. 왘 If you place a child seat in the right rear seat position, the twin roller blind can remain installed if so desired. 왘 Fold the rear backrest slightly forward (컄 page 247). 왘 Guide top tether strap between head restraint and top of seat back. Head restraints must be installed (if removable) and positioned such that the top tether strap can pass freely between the head restraint and top of the seat back. the hook of the top tether strap when attached to the anchorage ring on an outer rear seat backrest may push against the storage box and prevent the backrest from properly locking into position. If you place a child seat in the left or center rear seat position, remove twin roller blind (컄 page 258) and return seat to its original position. ! Make sure the tether strap is not twisted. 왘 Fold the rear backrest back until it locks in place (컄 page 248). Warning! G Always lock backrest in its upright position when rear seat bench is occupied by passengers, or the extended cargo compartment is not in use. Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on the backrest. Safety and Security Occupant safety Anchorage rings 1 are located on the back side of the outer rear backrests and on the floor behind the rear center seat. i Child seat anchors - LATCH type For safety, make sure the hook has attached to the ring beyond the safety catch, as illustrated below. This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) type anchors (at each of the outer rear seats) for the installation of a LATCH child seat with the matching mounting fittings. The anchors are located behind an upholstery blend. 1 Anchorage ring 2 Hook 왘 Fold up anchorage ring 1. 왘 Securely fasten hook 2, which is part of the tether strap, to anchorage ring 1. 1 Anchorage ring 2 Hook Once the top tether anchorage hook is attached, the child restraint itself can be secured. Secure the child restraint and tighten the top tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. 1 Indicates the position of the anchors 2 Anchors 83 Safety and Security Occupant safety 왘 Install child seat according to the manufacturer’s instructions. ! Make sure the seat belt for the center seat can operate freely with a child seat installed. i Non-LATCH type child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle’s seat belt system (컄 page 73). Install child seat according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Warning! G Children too big for a toddler restraint must ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a booster. Install child seat according to manufacturer’s instructions. The child seat must be firmly attached in the right and left side anchors 2. 1 Override switch 2 Indicator lamp 왘 Press override switch 1. An incorrectly mounted child seat may come loose during an accident which could result in serious injury or death to the child. Indicator lamp 2 comes on. The rear door windows can no longer be operated using the switches located in the rear doors. Damaged or impact damaged child seats or child seat mounting fittings must be replaced. ! Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if the children are secured in a child restraint system. 84 Blocking of rear door window operation Operation of the rear door windows with the switches located on the door control panel of the driver’s door is still possible. Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning! G Activate the override switch when children are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The children may otherwise injure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the window opening. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. For more information on power windows, see the “Controls in detail” section (컄 page 221). 85 Safety and Security Panic alarm An audible alarm and flashing exterior lamps will operate for approximately 2½ minutes. Deactivating 왘 Insert SmartKey in starter switch. Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: i (1) This device may not cause interference, and Press button 1 again. or 왘 USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1  button Activating 왘 Press and hold button 1 for at least one second. (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 86 i (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Safety and Security Driving safety systems 왔 Driving safety systems i In this section you will find information on the following driving safety systems: 앫 ABS (Antilock Brake System) 앫 BAS (Brake Assist System) 앫 ESP (Electronic Stability Program) 앫 SBC (Sensotronic Brake Control) 앫 4MATIC (Four Wheel Electronic Traction System) ABS In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the ABS, the BAS, the ESP, SBC and 4MATIC is only achieved with winter tires (M+S tires), or snow chains as required. Warning! G The following factors increase the risk of accidents: 앫 Excessive speed, especially in turns 앫 Wet and slippery road surfaces 앫 Following another vehicle too closely Warning! G Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS and significantly reduces braking effectiveness. The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure so that the wheels do not lock during braking. This allows you to maintain the ability to steer your vehicle. The ABS, BAS, ESP, SBC and 4MATIC cannot reduce this risk. The ABS is functional above a speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent of road surface conditions. Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even to light brake pressure. The - indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on when you switch on the ignition. It goes out when the engine is running. 87 Safety and Security Driving safety systems Braking Emergency brake maneuver If the ABS activates during braking, the ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster dial flashes. Because of the SBC brake system, you will not feel any pulsation in the brake pedal. 왘 왘 Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal. Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure yields the advantages provided by the ABS, namely braking power and the ability to steer the vehicle. The ABS/ESP warning lamp v flashes whenever the ABS is activated which can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. Keep continuous full pressure on the brake pedal. Warning! G When the ABS is malfunctioning, the BAS and the ESP are also switched off. When the ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability and extending the braking distance. Warning! G The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. For more information, see the “Practical hints” section (컄 page 353). 88 Safety and Security Driving safety systems BAS Warning! The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in emergency situations. If you apply the brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically provides full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing the braking distance. 왘 Apply continuous full braking pressure until the emergency braking situation is over. The ABS will prevent the wheels from locking. When you release the brake pedal, the brakes function again as normal. The BAS is then deactivated. Warning! G If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake system is still functioning normally, but without the additional brake boost available that BAS would normally provide in an emergency braking maneuver. Therefore, the braking distance may increase. G The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. ESP The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) is operational as soon as the engine is running and monitors the vehicle's traction (force of adhesive friction between the tires and the road surface) and handling. The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By applying brakes to the appropriate wheel and by limiting engine output, the ESP works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP is especially useful while driving off and on wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP also stabilizes the vehicle during braking maneuvers. The ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster flashes when the ESP is engaged. The ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster comes on when you switch on the ignition. It goes out when the engine is running. 89 Safety and Security Driving safety systems Warning! G Never switch off the ESP when you see the ABS/ESP warning lamp v flashing in the instrument cluster. In this case proceed as follows: 앫 While driving off, apply as little throttle as possible. 앫 While driving, ease up on the accelerator. 앫 Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions. Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid. The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed. Warning! G The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded. The ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. ! The ESP will only function properly if you use wheels of the recommended tire size (컄 page 443). ! Vehicles without 4MATIC: Because of the ESP’s automatic operation, the engine and ignition must be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* in position 0 or 1) when: 앫 the parking brake is being tested on a brake test dynamometer 앫 the vehicle is being towed with the front axle raised Active braking action through the ESP may otherwise seriously damage the brake system. For information on vehicles with 4MATIC, see “Four wheel electronic traction system (4MATIC) with the ESP” (컄 page 95). For more information, see the “Practical hints” section (컄 page 353). 90 Safety and Security Driving safety systems When you switch off the ESP Switching off the ESP Warning! G The ESP should not be switched off during normal driving other than in the circumstances described below. Disabling of the system will reduce vehicle stability in driving maneuvers. To improve the vehicle's traction, turn off the ESP in driving situations where it would be advantageous to have drive wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip such as: 앫 앫 starting out on slippery surfaces and in deep snow in conjunction with snow chains 앫 the ESP does not stabilize the vehicle 앫 the engine output is not limited, which allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip 앫 the traction control will still brake a spinning wheel 앫 the ESP continues to operate when you are braking 앫 you cannot activate Distronic* i When the ESP is switched off and one or more drive wheels are spinning, the ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the speedometer flashes. However, the ESP will then not stabilize the vehicle. The switch is located on the center console. 1 ESP off/on switch 왘 Press ESP switch 1 until the ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster comes on. The ESP is deactivated. in sand or gravel ! Turn on the ESP immediately if the aforementioned circumstances do not apply anymore. 91 Safety and Security Driving safety systems Warning! G When the ABS/ESP warning lamp v is illuminated continuously, the ESP is switched off. Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating status of the ESP. ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period with the ESP switched off. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. 92 Switching on the ESP 왘 Press ESP switch 1. The ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster goes out. You are now again in normal driving mode with the ESP switched on. ! Turn on the ESP immediately if the aforementioned circumstances do not apply anymore. SBC brake system The SBC brake system combines a hydraulic brake circuit with electronically controlled brake servo assistance. You have increased braking safety and improved braking comfort. Warning! G Never ignore a brake malfunction indicated in the speedometer display, for example by the ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only) warning lamp. Refer to the “Practical hints” section (컄 page 354). Also read and observe the messages in the instrument cluster display (컄 page 362). Safety and Security Driving safety systems Warning! G The SBC brake system requires electrical power to operate. A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. In such a case, the red brake warning lamp (컄 page 354) and warning messages in the instrument cluster (컄 page 362) come on while driving. To brake, the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes may only be applied to the front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! If there is a malfunction in the SBC brake system, we recommend that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. A tow bar must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the recommended towing methods and the vehicle requires towing with all four wheels on the ground. Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is only permissible for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, refer to “Towing the vehicle” (컄 page 430). The SBC brake system is automatically activated when you: 앫 unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO* 앫 open the driver’s or passenger door 앫 turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 앫 in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*, press the start/stop button on gear selector lever once 앫 depress the brake pedal 앫 release the parking brake 93 Safety and Security Driving safety systems i If the SBC brake system is activated as the brake pedal is first depressed, you may feel a reduced pedal resistance and longer pedal travel than normal. When releasing the pedal, you may also feel the brake pedal pulsate and you may hear a sound which is caused by the activation of the SBC brake system pump. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction. Pedal travel returns to normal when you release the brake pedal and the sound soon ceases. If you experience the above while driving and the red brake warning lamp (컄 page 354) illuminates and/or warning messages appear in the instrument cluster (컄 page 362), the brake system is malfunctioning. Follow the instructions of the warning message(s) and have the brake system checked immediately. 94 Warning! G Have brake pad replacement and other work on the SBC brake system carried out by qualified technicians only. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. The SBC brake system must be deactivated prior to working on the system. High pressure is intermittently built up in the system as part of its automatic self-test. In addition, the system is automatically activated when the vehicle is unlocked by SmartKey, when the driver or passenger door is opened, when the starter switch is turned to position 1, when the brake pedal is depressed or when the parking brake is released. Failure to deactivate the system prior to maintenance will cause brake pistons to extend and brake fluid to leak, which may result in injuries (contusions and acid burns). Extended brake pistons may also cause injury. The SBC brake servo assistance switches off automatically 앫 approximately two minutes after you turned the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 or removed the SmartKey 앫 approximately two minutes after you pressed the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button to turn off the engine or power supply and opened the driver’s door (with driver’s door open, the starter switch is set to position 0, same as SmartKey removed from starter switch) 앫 approximately 20 seconds after you locked the vehicle from outside Safety and Security Driving safety systems 앫 Note on driving with the SBC 앫 Following extended periods of only minor loads to your brake system, you should occasionally apply the brakes when traveling at high speeds. This improves the grip of the brake pads. Warning! G Be very careful not to endanger other road users when you apply the brakes. 앫 After driving on wet or snow-covered roads, you should apply your brakes firmly before parking your vehicle. This produces heat which serves to dry the brake disks and help prevent corrosion. On long and steep grades, shift to a lower gear (gear range 1, 2, or 3) to prevent the brakes from overheating and to reduce brake wear. Four wheel electronic traction system (4MATIC) with the ESP 앫 After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on for some time so that the air stream will cool down the brakes faster. 앫 Only Mercedes-Benz approved components (e.g. brake pads) should be installed on your vehicle. Brake pads not approved by Mercedes-Benz may impair the safety of your vehicle. The 4MATIC improves vehicle’s ability to use available traction, e.g. during winter operation in mountains under snowy conditions, by applying power to all four wheels. Models with all-wheel-drive only. Warning! G If you see the ESP warning lamp v flashing in the speedometer, proceed as follows: 앫 While driving off, apply as little throttle as possible 앫 While driving, ease up on the accelerator 앫 Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid. The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed. 95 Safety and Security Driving safety systems ! ! Do not tow with one axle raised. Because of the ESP’s automatic operation, the engine and ignition must be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* in position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is being tested on a brake test dynamometer. Otherwise the transfer case can be damaged, which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. ! Performance testing must only be conducted on a two-axle dynamometer. Otherwise the transfer case can be damaged, which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. 96 Active braking action through ESP may otherwise seriously damage the front or rear axle brake system. Operational tests with the engine running can only be conducted on a two-axle dynamometer. Safety and Security Anti-theft systems 왔 Anti-theft systems Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents unauthorized persons from starting your vehicle. Activating 앫 With the SmartKey: Removing the SmartKey from the starter switch activates the immobilizer. 앫 With KEYLESS-GO*: Turning off the engine by means of the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the gear selector lever activates the immobilizer. Deactivating i 앫 With the SmartKey: Inserting the SmartKey in the starter switch deactivates the immobilizer. 앫 With KEYLESS-GO*: Starting the engine by means of the start/stop button on the gear selector lever deactivates the immobilizer. In case the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle’s battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). 97 Safety and Security Anti-theft systems Anti-theft alarm system Once the alarm system has been armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered when someone opens 앫 a door 앫 the tailgate 앫 the hood. The alarm will stay on, even if the activating element (a door, for example) is immediately closed. The alarm system will also be triggered when 앫 someone attempts to raise the vehicle. 앫 opening the vehicle with the mechanical key. 앫 someone opens a door from the inside if the vehicle was locked from the outside with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. 98 i i If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system* (컄 page 269) provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated, and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available. If the turn signal lamps do not flash three times, one of the following elements may not be properly closed: 앫 a door 앫 the tailgate Close the respective element and lock the vehicle again. Arming the alarm system Disarming the alarm system The alarm system is armed within approximately ten seconds after locking the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*. The turn signal lamps flash three times to indicate that the alarm system is activated. The indicator lamp in the central locking switch (컄 page 27) begins to flash after arming the alarm system. The alarm system is disarmed when you unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*. The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate that the alarm system is deactivated. Safety and Security Anti-theft systems Canceling the alarm Tow-away alarm With the SmartKey Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual and audible alarm will be triggered when someone attempts to raise the vehicle. 왘 Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch. i or 왘 Press the Œ or ‹ button on the SmartKey. The alarm is canceled. With KEYLESS-GO* 왘 Pull the outside door handle. The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle. or 왘 The tow-away protection alarm is triggered, for example, if the vehicle is lifted on one side. Arming the tow-away alarm When you lock your vehicle, the tow-away alarm is automatically armed after about 30 seconds. When you unlock your vehicle, the tow-away protection disarms automatically. If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system* (컄 page 269), provided that the Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated, and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available. Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (컄 page 35). The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is canceled. 99 Safety and Security Anti-theft systems Disarming the tow-away alarm i Canceling tow-away alarm To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm feature, switch off the tow-away alarm before towing the vehicle, or when parking on a surface subject to movement, such as a ferry or auto train. You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm when the ignition is switched on. To cancel the alarm: The button is located on the overhead control panel. With the SmartKey 왘 Press button 1. The indicator lamp in the button comes on briefly. 왘 Exit and lock your vehicle with the SmartKey or (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) the lock button at each door handle. The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until you lock your vehicle again. 왘 Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch. or 왘 Press the Œ or ‹ button on the SmartKey. With KEYLESS-GO* 왘 Pull the outside door handle. The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle. or 1 Tow-away alarm off button 왘 Switch off the ignition and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (컄 page 35). The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is canceled. 100 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Seats Memory function Lighting Instrument cluster Control system Automatic transmission Good visibility Dual-zone automatic climate control 4-zone automatic climate control* Power windows Power tilt/sliding sunroof* Driving systems Loading Useful features 101 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking In the “Controls in detail” section you will find detailed information on how to operate the equipment installed on your vehicle. If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle, this section will be of particular interest to you. To quickly familiarize yourself with the basic functions of the vehicle, refer to the “Getting started” section of this manual. The corresponding page numbers are given at the beginning of each segment. For more information on locking and unlocking, see “Getting started” (컄 page 32) and (컄 page 56). SmartKey Your vehicle comes supplied with two SmartKeys, each with remote control and a removable mechanical key. The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two SmartKeys are a different color to help distinguish each key unit. The SmartKey provides an extended operating range. To prevent theft, however, it is advisable to only unlock the vehicle when you are in close proximity to it. The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks 102 앫 the doors 앫 the tailgate 앫 the fuel filler flap SmartKey with remote control 1 ‹ Lock button 2 Š Unlock button* for the tailgate 3 Mechanical key locking tab 4 Œ Unlock button 5 Battery check lamp 6  Panic button (컄 page 86) Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children to open a looked door from the inside, which could result in an accident and/or serious injury. ! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid exposing the SmartKey to high levels of electromagnetic radiation. i i USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. i The SBC brake system is activated (컄 page 92). i You can also open and close the power windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* using the SmartKey (컄 page 223). 103 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Factory setting i Global unlocking Global locking 왘 왘 Depending on production date, your vehicle may be equipped with an acoustic lock and unlock confirmation signal feature. If your vehicle is equipped with this feature and the feature is activated, an acoustic signal will sound when the vehicle is locked or unlocked using the SmartKey. To determine whether or not your vehicle is equipped with this feature, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If equipped and you wish to activate or deactivate the feature, or adjust its signal volume, also contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Press button Œ. Press button ‹. 앫 All turn signal lamps flash once. 앫 앫 An acoustic signal sounds once (if equipped and feature activated). All turn signal lamps flash three times. 앫 An acoustic signal sounds three times if equipped and feature activated). 앫 The locking knobs in the doors move down. 앫 The anti-theft alarm system is armed. 앫 The locking knobs in the doors move up. 앫 The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. The vehicle will lock again automatically and reactivate the anti-theft alarm system within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if: 앫 neither door nor trunk is opened 앫 the SmartKey is not inserted in the starter switch 앫 the central locking switch is not activated Selective setting If you frequently travel alone, you may wish to reprogram the SmartKey so that pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s door and the fuel filler flap. 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ simultaneously for about five seconds until battery check lamp 5 flashes twice. The SmartKey will then function as follows: 104 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking 앫 Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler flap 왘 Press button Œ once. 앫 All turn signal lamps flash once. 앫 An acoustic signal sounds once (if equipped and feature activated). For more information, see “Factory setting” (컄 page 104). 앫 The locking knob in the driver’s door moves up. 앫 The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. Global locking 왘 Press button Œ twice. 앫 All turn signal lamps flash once or twice. 앫 An acoustic signal sounds once (if equipped and feature activated). 앫 The locking knobs in the doors move up. Press button ‹. 앫 Global unlocking 왘 The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. All turn signal lamps flash three times. 앫 An acoustic signal sounds three times (if equipped and feature activated). 앫 The locking knobs in the doors move down. 앫 The anti-theft alarm system is armed. Restoring to factory setting 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ simultaneously for about six seconds until battery check lamp 5 flashes twice. ! If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey, then the batteries of the SmartKey are discharged, or the SmartKey is malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is drained. 앫 Check the batteries of the SmartKey (컄 page 112) and replace them if necessary (컄 page 408). 앫 Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver’s door (컄 page 404) as required. 앫 Have the vehicle batteries and their connections checked. 앫 Use the mechanical key to lock the doors (컄 page 405). If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 105 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Checking the batteries Unlocking and opening the tailgate Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key 왘 You can unlock and open the tailgate separately. If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key, you should do the following: A minimum height clearance of 6.76 ft (2.06 m) is required to open the tailgate. 왘 Have the SmartKey deactivated by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 왘 왘 Report the loss of the SmartKey or the mechanical key immediately to your car insurance company. 왘 If necessary, have the mechanical lock replaced. Press button ‹ or Œ. Battery check lamp 5 comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in order. ! If battery check lamp 5 does not come on briefly during check, then the SmartKey batteries are discharged. Replace the batteries (컄 page 408). You can obtain the required batteries at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. i If the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle, pressing the button ‹ or Œ will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly. Press and hold button Š until tailgate unlocks and begins to open. ! The tailgate swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance. Vehicles with tailgate opening/closing system: To stop the opening procedure, press button Š. The tailgate stops moving. i If the vehicle was previously centrally locked, the tailgate will lock automatically when closed. To confirm locking all turn signal lamps flash three times. 106 Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to supply you with a replacement. Controls in detail Locking and unlocking SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Warning! Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, each with remote control and a removable mechanical key. The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO are a different color to help distinguish each SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO unit. The function of the SmartKey overrules the KEYLESS-GO function. The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is checked every time you pull a door handle. If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid, your vehicle unlocks 앫 the doors 앫 the tailgate 앫 the fuel filler flap SmartKey 1 ‹ Lock button 2 Š Unlock button* for the tailgate 3 Mechanical key locking tab 4 Œ Unlock button 5 Battery check lamp 6  Panic button (컄 page 86) G When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children to open a locked door from the inside, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. ! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid exposing the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO to high levels of electromagnetic radiation. i When any outside door handle other than the driver’s outside door handle is pulled, the vehicle is centrally unlocked. 107 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking i i i USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: You can also open and close the power windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* using the SmartKey (컄 page 223). (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (1) This device may not cause interference, and i (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 108 When you unlock the vehicle, the SBC brake system is activated (컄 page 92). Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO 앫 You can also use the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey (컄 page 102). 앫 You can combine KEYLESS-GO functions with normal SmartKey functions (e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and locking with the ‹ button). 앫 Always carry the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you. Controls in detail Locking and unlocking 앫 Never store the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO together with: 앫 Electronic items such as a cellular phone or another SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO 앫 Metallic objects such as coins or metal foil 앫 If you have started the engine with the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (컄 page 36), you can only turn it off again with this button, even if you have put the SmartKey in the starter switch in the meantime. 앫 This does not apply if, after starting, the selector lever is still in position P and then the SmartKey is inserted in the starter switch. The SmartKey will then have priority over the KEYLESS-GO function and the vehicle’s electrical system will operate according to the position of the SmartKey in the starter switch, even stopping the engine. Doing so could impair the function of the KEYLESS-GO system. 앫 To lock or unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be located outside the vehicle within approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or the tailgate. 앫 In order to start the engine with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO: 앫 The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be located in the vehicle. 앫 All the doors must be closed. 앫 The brake pedal must be firmly depressed. Do not depress the accelerator. 앫 If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is positioned farther away from the vehicle and can no longer be recognized by the system, the vehicle cannot be locked or the engine started via the KEYLESS-GO system. 앫 If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is removed from the vehicle while the ignition is switched on (e.g. if passenger exits the vehicle with the SmartKey), the message Key not recognized will appear in the multifunction display. Find the SmartKey or change its present location immediately (e.g. place it on the front passenger seat or insert it in shirt pocket). 앫 Remember that the engine can be started by anyone with a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the vehicle. If you leave the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and locking the vehicle, the message Key still in vehicle will appear in the multifunction display. 109 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Factory setting i Depending on production date, your vehicle may be equipped with an acoustic lock and unlock confirmation signal feature. If your vehicle is equipped with this feature and the feature is activated, an acoustic signal will sound when the vehicle is locked or unlocked using the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO. To determine whether or not your vehicle is equipped with this feature, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If equipped and you wish to activate or deactivate the feature, or adjust its signal volume, also contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 110 Global unlocking Global locking 왘 왘 Pull the outside door handle. Press lock button at outside door handle (컄 page 60) or tailgate (컄 page 113). 앫 All turn signal lamps flash once. 앫 An acoustic signal sounds once (if equipped and feature activated). 앫 All turn signal lamps flash three times. 앫 The locking knobs in the doors move up. 앫 앫 The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. An acoustic signal sounds three times (if equipped and feature activated). 앫 The locking knobs in the doors move down. 앫 The anti-theft alarm system is armed. The vehicle will lock again automatically within approximately 40 seconds if neither door nor tailgate is opened. Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Selective setting 앫 The locking knob in the driver’s door moves up. 앫 The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. If you frequently travel alone, you may wish to reprogram the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO so when you pull the driver’s door handle only the driver’s door and the fuel filler flap unlocks. Global unlocking 왘 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ simultaneously for about five seconds until battery check lamp 5 flashes twice. The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will then function as follows: Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler flap 왘 Pull the driver’s outside door handle. 앫 All turn signal lamps flash once. 앫 An acoustic signal sounds once (if equipped and feature activated). For more information, see “Factory setting” (컄 page 110). Global locking 왘 Pull any outside door handle other than the driver’s outside door handle. 앫 All turn signal lamps flash once. 앫 An acoustic signal sounds once (if equipped and feature activated). 앫 The locking knobs in the doors move up. 앫 The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. Press lock button at outside door handle (컄 page 60). 앫 All turn signal lamps flash three times. 앫 An acoustic signal sounds three times (if equipped and feature activated). 앫 The locking knobs in the doors move down. 앫 The anti-theft alarm system is armed. Restoring to factory setting 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ simultaneously for about six seconds until battery check lamp 5 flashes twice. 111 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking ! Checking the batteries Unlocking and opening the tailgate If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO, then the batteries of the SmartKey are discharged, or the SmartKey is malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is drained. 왘 A minimum height clearance of 6.76 ft (2.06 m) is required to open the tailgate. 앫 Check the batteries of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO (컄 page 112) and replace them if necessary (컄 page 408). 앫 Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver’s door (컄 page 404) as required. 앫 Have the vehicle batteries and their connections checked. 앫 Use the mechanical key to lock the doors (컄 page 405). If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 112 Press button ‹ or Œ. Battery check lamp 5 comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in order. The handle is located in the rear license plate recess. ! If battery check lamp 5 does not come on briefly during check, then the SmartKey batteries are discharged. Replace the batteries (컄 page 408). You can obtain the required batteries at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. i If the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle, pressing the button ‹ or Œ will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly. You can unlock and open the tailgate separately. 왘 Pull on the handle. or 왘 Press and hold button Š until the tailgate unlocks and opens. Controls in detail Locking and unlocking ! The tailgate swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance. Global locking using the lock button at tailgate Vehicles with tailgate opening/closing system*: to stop the opening procedure, press button Š on the SmartKey. The tailgate stops moving. To confirm locking all turn signal lamps flash three times. To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the tailgate will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recognized in the rear shelf or inside the vehicle. i If the vehicle was previously centrally locked with KEYLESS-GO, the trunk will lock automatically after closing it. i If the vehicle was previously centrally locked, the tailgate will lock automatically when closed (컄 page 117). i 1 Lock button at tailgate 왘 Press the lock button 1. 앫 All turn signal lamps flash three times. 앫 An acoustic signal sounds once (if equipped and feature activated). For more information, see “Factory setting” (컄 page 110). 앫 The locking knobs in the doors move down. 앫 The anti-theft alarm system is armed. To confirm locking all turn signal lamps flash three times. i You can also lock the vehicle using the lock button at outside door handle (컄 page 60) or KEYLESS-GO locking/ closing switch (컄 page 121). 113 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Loss of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO If you lose your SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO, you should do the following: 왘 Have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO deactivated by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 왘 Report the loss immediately to your car insurance company. 왘 Have the mechanical lock replaced if necessary. Opening the doors from the inside You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so. i If the vehicle has previously been locked from the outside using the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do one of the following: Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to supply you with a replacement. 앫 Press the Œ or ‹ button on the SmartKey. 앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch. In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO* 1 Locking knob 2 Inside door handle 앫 Pull the outside door handle. The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle. 앫 Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (컄 page 36). The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be inside the vehicle. 114 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Front doors 왘 Opening the tailgate ! Pull on door handle 2 on the respective front door to open door. Opening the tailgate from the outside If door was locked, locking knob 1 will move up. A minimum height clearance of 6.76 ft (2.06 m) is required to open the tailgate. The tailgate swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance. Rear doors 왘 Pull up locking knob 1 on the respective rear door to unlock door. 왘 Pull on door handle 2 on the respective rear door to open door. The handle is located above the rear license plate recess. Vehicles with tailgate opening/closing system*: to stop the opening procedure, press button Š on the SmartKey. The tailgate stops moving. i The tailgate can also be opened using the Š button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO. i 왘 Pull on the handle. The tailgate opens. If the vehicle was previously centrally locked, the tailgate will lock automatically when closed (컄 page 117). To confirm locking all turn signal lamps flash three times. 115 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Opening the tailgate from the inside with handle You can open the tailgate from the inside if the vehicle is stationary. A minimum height clearance of 6.76 ft (2.06 m) is required to open the tailgate. The handle is located on the inside of the tailgate. ! Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance. i In vehicles with tailgate opening/closing system* you can open the tailgate from the inside if the vehicle is stationary. To lock the tailgate, move the catch 2 to the left. A minimum height clearance of 6.76 ft (2.06 m) is required to open the tailgate. The switch is located on the driver’s door. Warning! 1 Handle 2 Catch 왘 To unlock the tailgate, move the catch 2 to the right. 왘 Pull handle 1 down and swing tailgate upward. 116 Opening the tailgate from the inside automatically* G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. Children could open the tailgate from the inside, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. 1 Remote tailgate release switch with indicator lamp Controls in detail Locking and unlocking 왘 i Pull and hold remote tailgate release switch 1 until 앫 앫 The tailgate can also be opened using the Š button n the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*. the tailgate is completely open (opened to its full extent) or Closing the tailgate Limiting opening height of tailgate* the tailgate has reached the desired opening angle. The tailgate stops moving as soon as you release the switch. The indicator lamp in the switch comes on. It remains lit until the tailgate is closed again. ! The tailgate swings open upwards as long as you pull and hold the remote tailgate release switch. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance. To stop the opening procedure, release the remote tailgate release switch. Vehicles with tailgate opening/closing system*: The tailgate opening height can be limited when transporting goods on a roof rack (e.g. presence of an optional MB sport luggage container). When activated, the tailgate opens to approximately the height of the roof edge. 왘 Activate the limiting opening height of tailgate using the control system (컄 page 174). 1 Handle 왘 Lower tailgate using handle 1. 왘 Close tailgate with hands placed flat on it. 117 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Warning! G Only drive with the tailgate closed as, among other dangers such as visibility blockage, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior. i 1 Strap in vehicles with folding bench seat 왘 Pull the tailgate down from the inside of the vehicle using strap 1. Warning! G To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the cargo compartment opening when closing the tailgate. Be especially careful when small children are around. 118 To prevent an inadvertent lockout, do not place the SmartKey in the cargo compartment. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the tailgate will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recognized inside the vehicle or in the cargo compartment. Closing the tailgate from the outside (vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*) In vehicles with tailgate opening/closing system* you can close the tailgate separately from the outside using the tailgate closing switch. 1 Tailgate closing switch 왘 Press tailgate closing switch 1 briefly. The tailgate closes. i You can also close the tailgate by hand. If the tailgate comes into contact with an object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been piled too high), the closing procedure is stopped and the tailgate reopens slightly. Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Warning! G Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the cargo compartment opening when closing the tailgate. Be especially careful when small children are around. To stop the closing procedure, do one of the following: 앫 press the tailgate closing switch 1 앫 press the Š button on the SmartKey 앫 pull the remote tailgate switch (on the driver’s door) Even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch, the remote tailgate switch can be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Warning! G Only drive with the tailgate closed as, among other dangers such as visibility blockage, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior. Closing the tailgate from the outside (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) In vehicles with tailgate opening/closing system* you can close the tailgate separately from the outside using the tailgate closing switch. i Do not place the SmartKey in the open cargo compartment. You may lock yourself out. i If the vehicle was previously centrally locked, the tailgate will lock automatically after closing it. To confirm locking all turn signal lamps flash three times. 1 Tailgate closing switch 왘 Make sure you have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you. 왘 Press tailgate closing switch 1 briefly. The tailgate closes. 119 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking i You can also close the tailgate by hand. If the tailgate comes into contact with an object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been piled too high), the closing procedure is stopped and the tailgate reopens slightly. i To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the tailgate will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recognized in the rear shelf or inside the vehicle. Warning! G Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the cargo compartment opening when closing the tailgate. Be especially careful when small children are around. To stop the closing procedure, do one of the following: 앫 press the tailgate closing switch 1 앫 press the Š button on the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO 앫 pull the remote tailgate switch (on the driver’s door) Even with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO removed from the vehicle, the tailgate closing switch can be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 120 Warning! G Only drive with the tailgate closed as, among other dangers such as visibility blockage, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior. i If the vehicle was previously centrally locked, the tailgate will lock automatically after closing it. To confirm locking all turn signal lamps flash three times. Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Closing the tailgate and locking the vehicle from the outside (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) In vehicles with tailgate opening/closing system* and KEYLESS-GO, you can close the tailgate and lock the vehicle simultaneously from the outside using the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch. 왘 Press switch 1 briefly. 앫 All turn signal lamps flash three times. 앫 The locking knobs in the doors move down. 앫 The anti-theft alarm system is armed. i You can also close the tailgate by hand. If the tailgate comes into contact with an object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been piled too high), the closing procedure is stopped and the tailgate reopens slightly. 1 KEYLESS-GO* locking/closing switch 왘 Make sure you have SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you. i To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the tailgate will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recognized in the rear shelf or inside the vehicle. Warning! G Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the cargo compartment opening when closing the tailgate. Be especially careful when small children are around. To stop the closing procedure, do one of the following: 앫 press the tailgate closing switch 1 앫 press the Š button on the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO 앫 pull the remote tailgate switch (on the driver’s door) Even with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO removed from the vehicle, the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch can be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 121 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Warning! G Only drive with the tailgate closed as, among other dangers such as visibility blockage, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior. Automatic central locking The doors and the tailgate automatically lock when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so. i Locking and unlocking from the inside The doors unlock automatically after an accident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset threshold. The vehicle automatically locks when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. You could therefore lock yourself out when the vehicle The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or unlocked with the central locking switch. G 앫 is pushed or towed Warning! 앫 is on a test stand When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. For more information on towing the vehicle, see “Towing the vehicle” (컄 page 430). You can deactivate the automatic locking mode using the control system (컄 page 174). 122 You can lock or unlock the doors and the tailgate from inside using the central locking switch. This can be useful, for example, if you want to lock the vehicle before starting to drive. Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Depending on production date, your vehicle is equipped with either switch design A or B. If the vehicle was previously locked with the central locking switch 1 앫 while in the selective remote control mode, only the front door opened from the inside is unlocked. 앫 while in the global remote control mode, the vehicle is unlocked completely when a front door is opened from the inside. The switches are located in the center console. Switch design B 1 Central locking switch 2 Central unlocking switch Locking 왘 If all doors are closed, the vehicle locks. i Switch design A 1 Central locking switch 2 Central unlocking switch You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so. If the vehicle was previously centrally locked using the SmartKey, it will not unlock using the central unlocking switch 2. Press central locking switch 1. Unlocking 왘 Press central unlocking switch 2. The vehicle unlocks. 123 Controls in detail Seats For more information on seat adjustment, see the “Getting started” section (컄 page 39). Warning! Easy-entry/exit feature You must make sure that no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel and driver’s seat when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated. This feature allows for easier entry into and exit from the vehicle. The easy-entry/exit feature can be activated or deactivated in the Convenience submenu of the control system (컄 page 175). G To cancel seat/steering wheel movement, do one of the following: 앫 Press seat adjustment switch (컄 page 30). 앫 Move steering column stalk (컄 page 41). 앫 Press one of the memory buttons (컄 page 30). The steering wheel and driver’s seat stop moving. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could open the driver's door and unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. 124 When exiting the vehicle, with the easy-entry/exit feature activated and depending on your selection, the steering wheel tilts upwards and/or the driver’s seat moves a few inches to the rear when you: 앫 remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, or 앫 open the driver’s door with the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (컄 page 36) in position 1. Controls in detail Seats i If the current position for the steering wheel is in the uppermost tilt position, the steering wheel will no longer be able to move upward when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated. If the current seat position falls into a factory-set position range and the system recognizes the current seat position to be rearward enough for easy entry and exit, the driver’s seat will not move to the rear when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated. When entering the vehicle, with the easy-entry/exit feature activated, the steering wheel or, depending on your selection, the steering wheel and driver’s seat will return to their last set position or a factory-set maximum forward position when you: 앫 close the driver’s door, and switch on the ignition. or 앫 insert the SmartKey into the starter switch or press KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once with driver’s door closed. i For safety reasons, the driver’s seat will not return to its last set position with the easy-entry/exit feature activated if the system recognizes the last set position as an extreme forward position. Instead, the driver’s seat will remain at or move to a factory-set maximum forward position. To again fully return the driver’s seat to your last set position or to memory position, adjust the seat to the desired position or press and hold the respective memory position switch (컄 page 139). 125 Controls in detail Seats Removing and installing front seat head restraints For more information on head restraint adjustment, see the “Getting started” section (컄 page 40). i Removing front head restraints Tilt the backrest to the rear for easier removal and installation of the head restraints. 왘 Press switch 1 upwards and hold until the head restraint is fully extended. 왘 Pull out head restraint. Front seat head restraints Installing front head restraints: G 왘 Press switch 1 upwards and hold for about five seconds. For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints. 왘 Push the head restraint down until it engages. 왘 Adjust head restraint to desired position (컄 page 40). Warning! Adjust head restraint so that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation. Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident. Do not interchange head restraints from front and rear seat. 126 Controls in detail Seats Rear seat head restraints Folding head restraints back with switch in the center console Folding head restraints back manually (rear outer seats) 1 Head restraint release switch 1 Release button 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34). 왘 왘 Press the symbol-side on rocker switch 1 to release the head restraints. Folding head restraints back The rear seat head restraints can be folded backward for increased visibility. Warning! G For safety reasons, always drive with the rear head restraints in the upright position when the rear seats are occupied. Keep the area around head restraints clear of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the folding operation of the head restraints. Push release button 1 and fold the head restraints backward. The head restraints will fold backward. 127 Controls in detail Seats Placing head restraints upright Head restraint height (rear outer seats) Lowering: 왘 To lower the head restraint, push release button 1 and push down on the head restraint. Warning! G For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints. 왘 Pull the head restraint forward until it locks into position. ! Make sure the head restraints engage when placing them upright. Otherwise their protective function cannot be assured. 128 1 Release button Raising: 왘 Manually adjust the height of the head restraint by pulling it upward. If the head restraint is fully retracted, push release button 1 and pull the head restraint out. Adjust head restraint so that the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation. Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident. Controls in detail Seats Head restraint tilt (rear outer seats) Two different head restraint angle positions are available. Removing and installing rear seat head restraints Warning! G For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints. Adjust head restraint so that the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation. 1 Release button 왘 Press the release button 1 and tilt the head restraint to the desired position. 1 Release button Removing rear seat head restraints Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident. 왘 Fold back head restraint (컄 page 127). 왘 Pull head restraint to its highest position. Do not interchange head restraints from front and rear seat. 왘 Push release button 1 and pull out head restraint. 129 Controls in detail Seats Installing rear seat head restraints 왘 Insert head restraint and push it down until it engages. 왘 Push button 1 and adjust head restraint to desired position. ! When installing the head restraints, make sure that: 앫 앫 130 The proper head restraint for each seat is installed. The bars of the head restraint designed for the middle rear seat are of even length and shorter than those designed for use on the outer rear seats. The head restraints engage fully. Drive-Dynamic seat* with multicontour features The Drive-Dynamic seat automatically adjusts the lateral support provided by the backrest to your driving style. The Drive-Dynamic seat electronically controls the air pressure in the air chambers of the backrest side bolsters. This function improves driving comfort and pleasure. Additional the Drive-Dynamic seat has a movable seat cushion and inflatable air cushions built into the backrest to provide additional lumbar and side support. The seat cushion movement, backrest cushion height and curvature can be continuously varied with switches on the right side of the seat after turning the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 2 or pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button twice. 1 Backrest center 2 Backrest bottom 3 Seat cushion depth 4 Activate drive dynamic function 5 Backrest side bolsters 6 Massage function 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34). Controls in detail Seats Multicontour features Drive-dynamic features Seat cushion depth Activating 왘 왘 Adjust the seat cushion depth to the length of your upper leg using switch 3. 왘 Adjust the contour of the backrest to the desired position using æ or ç. 왘 Move the backrest support to the bottom by using button 2 or to the center by using button 1. Massage function (PULSE) The massage function can help prevent muscle tension during long drives. 왘 Press button 6 (컄 page 130). The indicator lamp in button 2 comes on. The air cushions in the lumbar area pulsate. i Backrest side bolsters 왘 When the engine is turned off, the last cushion setting is retained in memory. The cushion is automatically adjusted to this setting when the engine is restarted. Press button 4 (컄 page 130). The indicator lamp in the button comes on for five seconds and the following display appears in the multi-function display for about five seconds. Backrest contour i You can adjust the characteristics of the Drive-Dynamic seat using the control system (컄 page 177). Adjust the side bolsters so that they provide good lateral support using switch 5. i The massage function turns off automatically after approximately five minutes. Deactivating 왘 Press button 4 (컄 page 130) again. The indicator lamp in the button goes out. 131 Controls in detail Seats Switching seat heating off Seat heating* 왘 Both switches for the front seats are located in the center console. The red indicator lamps in the switch comes on to show which heating level you have selected. i Level off No indicator lamps on 1 One indicator lamp on The seat heater automatically switches off after approximately 20 minutes. 2 Two indicator lamps on The seat heater automatically switches to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. 3 Three indicator lamps on The seat heater automatically switches to level 2 after approximately five minutes. 132 Press switch 1 repeatedly until all indicator lamps go out. 1 Seat heating switch 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34). Switching seat heating on 왘 Press switch 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. One or more red indicator lamps on the switch show the selected heater level. If one or more of the lamps on the seat heater switch are flashing, there is insufficient voltage available since too many electrical consumers are turned on. The seat heater switches off automatically. The seat heater will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available. Controls in detail Seats Switching seat ventilation off Seat ventilation* 왘 The switch is located on the center console. Seat ventilation can be activated manually with the ignition on, or by the summer opening feature (컄 page 223). i The blue indicator lamps on the switch show the ventilation level selected: Level 3 Three indicator lamps lit Press button 1 repeatedly until all indicator lamps go out. 1 Seat ventilation switch 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34). 2 Two indicator lamps lit 1 One indicator lamp lit Switching seat ventilation on off No indicator lamp lit 왘 If one or all of the lamps flash on the seat ventilation switch, there is insufficient voltage due to too many electrical consumers being switched on. The seat ventilation switches off automatically. The seat ventilation will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available. Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set. i The seat ventilation is automatically set to the highest level if activated via summer opening feature (컄 page 223). 133 Controls in detail Seats Folding bench seat in cargo compartment i The folding bench seat in the cargo compartment is approved only for persons up to a height of 4.6 ft (1.40 m) and a maximum weight of 110 lbs (50 kg). The twin roller blind must be installed when the folding bench seat is in use. 134 Warning! G Warning! G When using the folding bench seat in the cargo compartment, the seats in front of it must be in the driving position. Make sure that the seat belt is positioned correctly on the body and is engaged in the seat belt buckle. Only drive when the head restraints for the folding bench seat have been properly adjusted. The head restraints should be adjusted so that the back of the head is supported at approximately eye level. This can reduce a child’s risk of injury in the event of an accident. Damaged covers should be replaced with original covers only. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even when they are secured in a child restraint system. Make sure that luggage and other objects are adequately secured. The load could otherwise injure someone in the event of an accident, during hard braking or steering maneuvers. Controls in detail Seats Folding out the folding bench seat 왘 i 왘 Hook seat belts into mountings 3. The rear seat backrests can be adjusted to a more reclined position to make the folding bench seat more comfortable (컄 page 249). 왘 Pull release handle 2 and fold seat cushion for the folding bench seat into sitting position. 왘 Press seat cushion as far down as it will go. Pull release handle 1 and fold seat backrest for the folding bench seat upward. The backrest will then also engage properly. 왘 1 Release handle for seat backrest 2 Release handle for seat cushion Fold head restraints into upright position. Before folding out the seat backrest, you must: 앫 fold the rear seat backrests into an upright position and lock them into place 앫 move the handle for the twin roller blind into the upper position 3 Mountings for seat belts 135 Controls in detail Seats Removing and installing seat cushions Installing Folding back folding bench seat 왘 Insert seat cushion 2 into seat guides 1 from behind 3 at a slight angle. 1 Tab 2 Backrest 왘 Fold seat cushion 2 back into original position 4 until it engages. 왘 i You must remove the seat cushion when you want to raise the loading floor, e.g. in the event of a flat tire. Removing 1 Seat guides 2 Seat cushion 왘 Fold seat cushion 2 upward and remove it from seat guides 1. 136 Pull seat cushion upward using tab 1 and fold it back into original position until it engages. Controls in detail Seats 1 Release knob 1 Release catch 왘 Press release knob 1 and fold head restraints down. 왘 Press release catch 1 and push head restraints as far in as they will go. ! 왘 Fold seat backrest of folding bench seat back into original position until it engages. To avoid damage, insert the head restraints completely into their guides and engage the seat belt buckles in their guides. 137 Controls in detail Memory function ! Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver should check and adjust the seat height, seat position fore and aft, and seat backrest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate control, reach and comfort. The head restraint should also be adjusted for proper height. See also the section on air bags (컄 page 63) for more information on proper seat positioning. You can store up to three different settings for each SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*. The following settings are stored when using the buttons on the driver’s door: 앫 Driver’s seat, backrest and head restraint position and settings for multicontour seat 앫 Steering wheel position 앫 Exterior rear view mirror positions In addition, adjust the steering wheel to ensure adequate control, reach, operation and comfort. Both the interior and outside rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rear vision. These SmartKey-dependent memory settings can be deactivated if desired. For information on SmartKey-dependent memory settings, see “Setting SmartKey-dependency” (컄 page 176). Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be seated in a properly secured restraint system that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2. The following settings are not SmartKey-dependent. They are stored when using the buttons on the front passenger door: 138 앫 Front passenger seat, backrest and head restraint position and settings for multicontour seat Warning! G Do not activate the memory function while driving. Activating the memory function while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Controls in detail Memory function The memory button and stored position button are located on the door. Storing positions in memory 왘 Adjust the seats, steering wheel and exterior rear view mirrors to the desired position (컄 page 38). 왘 Press memory button M. 왘 Release memory button and press stored position button 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. All the settings are stored at the selected position. M Memory button 1, 2, 3 Stored positions 왘 ! Do not operate the power seats using the memory button if the seat backrest is in an excessively reclined position. Doing so could cause damage to front or rear seats. 왘 Press and hold stored position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering wheel and exterior rear view mirrors have completely moved to the stored positions. Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34). i Open the respective door and insert the SmartKey in the starter switch. Releasing the stored position button stops movement to the stored positions immediately. or 왘 Recalling positions from memory 139 Controls in detail Memory function Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position For easier parking, you can adjust the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror so that you can see the right rear wheel as soon as you engage reverse gear R. For information on activating the parking position, see “Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position” (컄 page 192). i You can store a parking position for the passenger side exterior rear view mirror for each SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*. Adjust the exterior rear view mirror with button 2 so that you see the rear wheel and the road curb. 왘 Press memory button M. 왘 Within three seconds, press bottom of adjustment button 2. The parking position is stored if the mirror does not move. 1 Passenger side, exterior rear view mirror 2 Adjustment button 왘 Stop the vehicle. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34). 왘 Press button 1. The passenger-side exterior rear view mirror is selected. 140 왘 i If the mirror does move, repeat the above steps. After the setting is stored, you can move the mirror again. Controls in detail Lighting 왔 Lighting For information on how to switch on the headlamps and use the turn signals, see the “Getting started” section (컄 page 51). i Exterior lamp switch The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel. If you drive in countries where vehicles drive on the other side of the road than the country where the vehicle is registered, you must have the headlamps modified for symmetrical low beams. Relevant information can be obtained at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. C Parking lamps (also tail lamps, license plate lamps, side marker lamps, instrument panel lamps) Canada only: When engine is running, the low beam is also switched on B Low beam headlamps (or high beam headlamps when the combination switch is pushed forward) and parking lamps ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one stop) M Off Daytime running lamp mode (컄 page 170) U Automatic headlamp mode Daytime running lamp mode (컄 page 170) ‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two stops) ¥ Indicator lamp for front fog lamps ¨ Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp 141 Controls in detail Lighting i With the SmartKey removed from the starter switch or the engine turned off with KEYLESS-GO* and the driver’s door open, a warning sounds if the parking lamps or low beam headlamps are switched on. The message Switch off lamps appears in the multifunction display. Manual headlamp mode The low beam headlamps and parking lamps can be switched on and off with the exterior lamp switch. Automatic headlamp mode The following lamps switch on and off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light: 앫 Low beam headlamps 앫 Tail and parking lamps 앫 License plate lamps 앫 Side marker lamps 142 Warning! G If the exterior lamp switch is set to U, 앫 앫 the headlamps may switch off unexpectedly when the system senses bright ambient light, for example light from oncoming traffic. the headlamps will not be automatically switched on under foggy conditions. To minimize risk to you and to others, activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to B when driving or when traffic and/or ambient lighting conditions require you to do so. In low ambient lighting conditions, only switch from position U to B with the vehicle at a standstill. Switching from U to B will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for the operation of the vehicle's lights at all times. 왘 Turn exterior lamp switch to position U. With the SmartKey in the starter switch position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button pressed once, only the parking lamps will switch on and off automatically. When the engine is running, the low beam headlamps, the tail and parking lamps, the licence plate lamps and the side marker lamps will switch on and off automatically. Controls in detail Lighting Daytime running lamp mode Canada only USA only 왘 Turn exterior lamp switch to position M or U. The daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode. When the engine is running, the low beam headlamps are automatically switched on. When the engine is running, and you shift from a driving position to position N or P, the low beam headlamps will switch off with a three-minute delay. By default, the daytime running lamp mode is deactivated. Activate the daytime running lamp mode using the control system, see “Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA only)” (컄 page 170). In low ambient light conditions, the following lams will switch on additionally: 앫 Tail and parking lamps 앫 License plate lamps 앫 Side marker lamps For nighttime driving you should turn the exterior lamp switch to position B to permit activation of the high beam headlamps. i When the engine is running, and you 앫 turn the exterior lamp switch to position C, the parking lamps switch on additionally. 앫 turn the exterior lamp switch to position B, the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode. When the engine is running, and you turn the exterior lamp switch to position C or B, the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode. The corresponding exterior lamps switch on (컄 page 51). The corresponding exterior lamps switch on (컄 page 51). With the daytime running lamp mode activated and the exterior lamp switch in position M, the high beam headlamps cannot be switched on. The high beam flasher is available at all times. 143 Controls in detail Lighting Locator lighting and night security illumination The locator lighting and the night security illumination are described in the “Control system” section, see (컄 page 171) and (컄 page 172). Fog lamps Warning! G In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions, only switch from position U to B with the vehicle at a standstill. Switching from U to B will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident. 144 i Front fog lamps Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog lamps should only be used in conjunction with low beam headlamps. Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding allowable lamp operation. 왘 Switch on the low beam headlamps (컄 page 51). 왘 Pull out the exterior lamp switch to first stop. The front fog lamps are switched on. The green indicator lamp ‡ in the exterior lamp switch comes on (컄 page 24). i Fog lamp cannot be switched on with the exterior lamp switch in position U. For switching on the fog lamps, turn exterior lamp switch to position B first. 왘 Push in the exterior lamp switch. The front fog lamps are switched off. The green indicator lamp ‡ in the exterior lamp switch goes out. Controls in detail Lighting Rear fog lamps (driver’s side only) 왘 Switch on the front fog lamps (컄 page 144). 왘 Pull out the exterior lamp switch to second stop. Combination switch The combination switch is located on the left side of the steering column. High beam 왘 Turn exterior lamp switch to position B or U (컄 page 141). 왘 Push the combination switch in direction of arrow 1 to switch on the high beam. The rear fog lamp are switched on. The high beam headlamp indicator lamp A in the instrument cluster comes on (컄 page 24). The yellow indicator lamp † in the exterior lamp switch comes on (컄 page 24). 왘 왘 Push in the exterior lamp switch to first stop. The rear fog lamp is switched off. The yellow indicator lamp † in the lamp exterior switch goes out. 1 High beam 2 High beam flasher Pull the combination switch in direction of arrow 2 to switch off the high beam. The high beam headlamp indicator lamp A in the instrument cluster goes out. The front fog lamps remain lit. High beam flasher 왘 Pull the combination switch briefly in direction 2. 145 Controls in detail Lighting Hazard warning flasher The hazard warning flasher can be switched on at all times, even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch or with the with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle. The hazard warning flasher switches on automatically when an air bag deploys. The hazard warning flasher switch is located on the upper part of the center console. 1 Hazard warning flasher switch 146 Switching on the hazard warning flasher Switching off the hazard warning flasher 왘 왘 Press the hazard warning flasher switch 1. Press the hazard warning flasher switch 1 again. All turn signal lamps are flashing. i i If the hazard warning flasher has been activated automatically, press hazard warning flasher switch 1 once to switch it off. With the hazard warning flasher activated and the combination switch set for either left or right turn, only the respective turn signals will operate when the ignition is switched on. Controls in detail Lighting Interior lighting The controls are located in the overhead control panel. i Leaving an interior light switch in the ON position for extended periods of time with the engine turned off could result in a discharged battery. The interior lighting switches off automatically following an adjustable time delay. For more information, see “Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off” (컄 page 173). i If the door remains open, the interior lighting switches off automatically after approximately five minutes. Automatic control Activating 왘 Press automatic control switch 3. The interior lighting switches on in darkness when you: 1 Left front reading lamp on/off 2 Rear interior lighting on/off 3 Automatic control on/off 4 Front interior lighting on/off 5 Right front reading lamp on/off 6 Ambient lighting 7 Interior lighting 8 Front reading lamps 앫 unlock the vehicle 앫 remove the SmartKey from the starter switch 앫 open a door 앫 open the tailgate Deactivating 왘 Press automatic control switch 3 again. The interior lighting remains switched off in darkness, even when you: 앫 unlock the vehicle 앫 remove the SmartKey from the starter switch 앫 open a door 앫 open the tailgate 147 Controls in detail Lighting Manual control i Front reading lamps Front interior lighting The setting selected for the interior lighting is used for the cargo compartment as well. The front reading lamps are located in the lower edge of the interior rear view mirror. 왘 Press front interior lighting switch 4. The front interior lighting switches on. 왘 Press front interior lighting switch 4 again. The front interior lighting switches off. Rear interior lighting 왘 Press button 2. The lights in the rear passenger compartment go on. 왘 Press button 2 again. The lights in the rear passenger compartment go out. 148 If the tailgate remains open, the cargo compartment lamp switches off automatically after approximately ten minutes. 왘 Press front reading lamp switch 1 or 5 to switch on the desired front reading lamp. 왘 Press front reading lamp switch 1 or 5 again to switch off the respective front reading lamp. Controls in detail Lighting Door entry lamps Interior lighting in the rear For better orientation in the dark, the corresponding door entry lamps will switch on in the darkness when you open a door and the automatic control is activated. The overhead control panel is located above the rear seat bench. Rear reading lamps 왘 Press desired rear reading lamp switch 3 to switch on the corresponding rear reading lamp. 왘 Press respective rear reading lamp switch 3 again to switch off the corresponding rear reading lamp. The door entry lamps will switch on when the corresponding door is closed. i Ambient lighting If you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and switch off the headlamps, the door entry lamps will remain lit for approximately five minutes. 왘 1 Ambient lighting switch, to brighten 2 Rear reading lamp 3 Rear reading lamp on/off 4 Rear interior lamp 5 Ambient lighting 6 Ambient lighting switch, to brighten Press ambient lighting switch 1 or 6 repeatedly until ambient lighting 5 has reached the desired intensity. You can switch the ambient lighting on and off using the control system (컄 page 173). 149 Controls in detail Instrument cluster A full view illustration of the instrument cluster can be found in the “At a glance” section of this manual (컄 page 24). The instrument cluster is activated when you 앫 open a door 앫 turn on the ignition 앫 press the reset button (컄 page 24) 앫 switch on the exterior lamps You can change the instrument cluster settings in the instrument cluster submenu of the control system (컄 page 165). 150 Instrument cluster illumination Use the reset button (컄 page 24) to adjust the illumination brightness for the instrument cluster. To brighten illumination 왘 The instrument cluster illumination will brighten. i The instrument cluster illumination is dimmed or brightened automatically to suit ambient light conditions. The instrument cluster illumination will also be adjusted automatically when you switch on the vehicle’s exterior lamps. Turn the reset button in the instrument cluster clockwise (컄 page 24). To dim illumination 왘 Turn the reset button in the instrument cluster counterclockwise (컄 page 24). The instrument cluster illumination will dim. Controls in detail Instrument cluster Coolant temperature indicator Warning! 앫 앫 G Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned. Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. i Trip odometer Excessive coolant temperature trigger a warning in the multifunction display (컄 page 356). Make sure you are viewing the trip odometer display (컄 page 153). During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C). The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. 왘 If it is not displayed, press the è or ÿ repeatedly until the trip odometer appears. 왘 Press and hold the reset button on the instrument cluster (컄 page 24) until the trip odometer is reset. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. 151 Controls in detail Instrument cluster Tachometer The red marking on the tachometer denotes excessive engine speed. ! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is interrupted if the engine is operated within the red marking. 152 Outside temperature indicator Warning! G The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The outside temperature is displayed in the instrument cluster (컄 page 24). For information on how to select the unit of the displayed temperature, i.e. degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F), see “Selecting temperature display mode” (컄 page 165). The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper area. Due to its location, the sensor can be affected by road or engine heat during idling or slow driving. This means that the accuracy of the displayed temperature can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer placed next to the sensor, not by comparison to external displays (e.g. bank signs etc.). When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures (e.g. when leaving your garage), you will notice a delay before the lower temperature is displayed. A delay also occurs when ambient temperatures rise. This prevents inaccurate temperature indications caused by heat radiated from the engine during idling or slow driving. Controls in detail Control system 왔 Control system The control system is activated as soon as the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 1 or as soon as the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* is in position 1. The control system enables you to: 앫 call up information about your vehicle 앫 change vehicle settings. For example, you can use the control system to find out when your vehicle is next due for service, to set the language for messages in the instrument cluster display, and much more. i The displays for the audio systems (radio, CD player) will appear in English, regardless of the language selected. Warning! G Multifunction display A driver’s attention to the road and traffic conditions must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, selecting features through the multifunction steering wheel should only be done by the driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. 1 Outside temperature 2 Trip odometer 3 Automatic transmission program mode 4 Main odometer 5 Current gear selector lever position The control system relays information to the multifunction display. Above illustration shows the standard display. For more information on menus displayed in the multifunction display, see “Menus” (컄 page 156). 153 Controls in detail Control system Multifunction steering wheel The displays in the multifunction display and the settings in the control system (컄 page 153) are controlled by the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. 1 Multifunction display in the speedometer Operating the control system 2 Selecting the submenu or setting the volume: Press button æ up/to increase ç down/to decrease 3 Telephone*: Press button s to take a call t to end a call 4 Menu systems: Press button è for next menu ÿ for previous menu 5 Moving within a menu: Press button j for next display k for previous display 154 Pressing any of the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel will alter what is shown in the multifunction display. The information available in the multifunction display is arranged in menus, each containing a number of functions or submenus. The individual functions are then found within the relevant menu (radio or CD operations under Audio, for example). These functions serve to call up relevant information or to customize the settings for your vehicle. Controls in detail Control system It is helpful to think of the menus, and the functions within each menu, as being arranged in a circular pattern. 앫 앫 If you press button è or ÿ repeatedly, you will pass through each menu one after the other. If you press button k or j repeatedly, you will pass through each function display, one after the other, in the current menu. In the Settings menu, instead of functions you will find a number of submenus for calling up and changing settings. For instructions on using these submenus, see the “Settings menu” section (컄 page 162). The menus are described on the following pages. The number of menus available in the system depends on which optional equipment is installed in you vehicle. 155 Controls in detail Control system Menus 156 This is what you will see when you scroll through the menus. The table on the next page provides an overview of the individual menus. Controls in detail Control system Menus, submenus and functions Menu 1 Menu 2 Commands/submenus Standard dis- AUDIO play Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5 Menu 6 NAV* Distronic* Vehicle status Settings message memory Menu 7 Menu 8 Trip computer Telephone (컄 page 178) (컄 page 179) (컄 page 158) (컄 page 158) (컄 page 160) (컄 page 160) (컄 page 161) (컄 page 162) Digital speedometer Select radio station Reset to facto- Fuel consumption Load phone ry settings statistics after book start Call up mainte- Operate CD nance system player display Activate route guidance Call up settings Call up vehicle malfunction, warning and system status messages stored in memory Instrument cluster submenu Fuel consumption Search for statistics since name in the last reset phone book Check tire pressure* Time/Date submenu Call up range Check engine oil level Lighting submenu Vehicle submenu Convenience submenu Dynamic seat* submenu 157 Controls in detail Control system i Display digital speedometer Select radio station The headings used in the menus table are designed to facilitate navigation within the system and are not necessarily identical to those shown in the control system displays. 왘 Press button j twice. 왘 The current vehicle speed is shown in the multifunction display. Turn on the radio. Refer to separate operating instructions. 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see the currently tuned station in the display. The first function displayed in each menu will automatically show you which part of the system you are in. Standard display menu You can select the functions in the standard display menu with button k or j. AUDIO menu The functions in the Audio menu operate the audio equipment which you currently have turned on. If no audio equipment is currently turned on, the message AUDIO off is shown in the display. The following functions are available: 1 Waveband setting 2 Station frequency The following functions are available: Function Page 왘 Function Page Select radio station 158 Call up digital speedometer 158 Select satellite radio station* 159 Call up maintenance display 339 Operate CD player 159 Check tire pressure* 318 Check engine oil level 301 158 Press button k or j repeatedly until the desired station is found. Controls in detail Control system i 왘 You can only store new stations using the corresponding feature on the radio, see separate operating instructions. i Additional optional satellite radio equipment and a subscription to satellite radio service provider are required for satellite radio operation. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details and availability for your vehicle. You can also operate the radio in the usual manner. Select satellite radio station* The satellite radio is treated as a radio application. 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly until the desired channel is found. For more information, refer to separate COMAND operating instructions. Select SAT radio with the corresponding softkey in the radio menu. Operate the CD player 1 SAT mode and preset number 2 Setting for station selection using memory 3 Channel name or number 왘 Turn on the radio and select the CD player. Refer to separate operating instructions. 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the settings for the CD currently being played are shown in the display. 1 Current CD (for CD changer*) 2 Current track 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly until the desired track is selected. i To select a CD from the magazine, press a number on the COMAND system key pad located in the center console. 159 Controls in detail Control system NAV* menu Distronic* menu The NAV menu contains the functions needed to operate your navigation system. Use the Distronic menu to display the current settings for your Distronic system. What information is shown in the display depends on whether the Distronic system is active or inactive. 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see the message NAV in the display. 앫 If the navigation system is switched off, the message NAV off is shown in the display. 앫 If the navigation system is switched on, the message NAV Active is shown in the display. Please refer to the COMAND manual for instructions on how to activate the route guidance system. 160 Please refer to the “Driving systems” section of this manual (컄 page 232) for instructions on how to activate Distronic. 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see one of the following two pictures in the display. Distronic deactivated When Distronic is deactivated, you will see the standard display in the display. 1 Vehicle ahead, if detected 2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead 3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle ahead 4 Your vehicle 5 Symbol for activated distance warning function Controls in detail Control system Distronic activated When Distronic is activated, Distronic and the set speed are seen in the display. 1 Distronic activated Vehicle status message memory menu 왘 Use the vehicle status message memory menu to scan malfunction and warning messages that may be stored in the system. Such messages appear in the multifunction display and are based on conditions or system status the vehicle’s system has recorded. No vehicle status messages Warning! G Malfunction and warning messages are only indicated for certain systems and are intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain systems and do not replace the owner’s and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain the vehicle’s operating safety by having all required maintenance and safety checks performed on the vehicle and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to address the malfunction and warning messages (컄 page 362). Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the vehicle status message memory appears in the multifunction display. If no malfunctions have occurred, the message in the display is: NO MESSAGES Vehicle status messages have been recorded If conditions have occurred causing status messages to be recorded, the number of messages appears in the multifunction display: 161 Controls in detail Control system 왘 Press button k or j. The stored messages will now be displayed in the order in which they have occurred. For malfunction and warning messages, see “Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display” (컄 page 362). Should the vehicle’s system record any conditions while driving, the number of messages will reappear in the multifunction display when the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 0 or removed from the starter switch. i The vehicle status message memory will be cleared when you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2. You will then only see high-priority messages in the multifunction display (컄 page 362). 162 Settings menu In the Settings menu there are two functions: 앫 앫 왘 The function To reset: Press reset button for 3 seconds, with which you can reset all the settings to the original factory settings. A collection of submenus with which you can make individual settings for your vehicle. Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the Settings menu is seen in the display. Resetting all settings You can reset all the functions of all submenus to the factory settings. 왘 Press the reset button in the instrument cluster (컄 page 24) for approximately three seconds. In the display you will see the request to press the reset button again to confirm. 왘 Press the reset button again. The functions of all the submenus will reset to factory settings. i The settings you have changed will not be reset unless you confirm the action by pressing the reset button a second time. Controls in detail Control system Submenus in the Settings menu 왘 Press button k or j. In the display you see the collection of the submenus. The submenus are arranged by hierarchy. Scroll down with the ç button, scroll up with the æ button. Move within the submenus with the k or j button to the individual functions. The settings themselves are made with button æ or ç. 왘 Press button ç. The selection marker moves to the next submenu. Resetting the functions of a submenu For each submenu you can reset all the functions to the factory settings. 왘 Move to a function in the submenu. 왘 Press the reset button (컄 page 24) in the instrument cluster for approximately three seconds. In the display you will see the request to press the reset button again to confirm. 왘 Press the reset button again. All functions of the submenu will reset to factory settings. 163 Controls in detail Control system The table below shows what settings can be changed within the various menus. Detailed instructions on making individual settings can be found on the following pages. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER TIME/DATE LIGHTING Select temperature display mode Synchronizing the time Set daytime running Set automatic lock- Activate lamp mode ing easy-entry/exit (USA only) feature Set level for dynamic seat, driver Select speedometer display mode Set time (hours) Set locator lighting Limiting opening height of tailgate* Set SmartKeydependency Set level for dynamic seat, passenger Select language Set time (minutes) Ambient lighting Set parking position for exterior rear view mirror Select display (speed dis- Set date (month) play or outside temperature) for status line Exterior lamps delayed shut-off Select display (speed dis- Set date (day) play or outside temperature) for basic display Interior lighting delayed shut-off Tire pressure unit display* 164 Set date (year) VEHICLE CONVENIENCE DYNAMIC SEAT* Controls in detail Control system Instrument cluster submenu Selecting temperature display mode Selecting speedometer display mode Access the Instr. cluster submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Instr. cluster submenu to change the instrument cluster display settings. The following functions are available: 왘 Move the selection marker with the æ or ç button to the Instr. cluster submenu. 왘 Move the selection marker with the æ or ç button to the Instr. cluster submenu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the display: Temperature indicator. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the display: Display unit Speed-/odometer. Function Page Select temperature display mode 165 Select speedometer display mode 165 Select language 166 Select display (speed display or 166 outside temperature) for status display Select display (speed display or 167 outside temperature) for basic display Tire pressure display* The selection marker is on the current setting. 왘 Press æ or ç to set the temperature unit to °C (degrees Celsius) or °F (degrees Fahrenheit). The selection marker is on the current setting. 왘 Press æ or ç to set speedometer unit to km or miles. 167 165 Controls in detail Control system Selecting language 왘 왘 Move the selection marker with the æ or ç button to the Instr. cluster submenu. Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the display: Language. The selection marker is on the current setting. 왘 Press æ or ç to select the language to be used for the multifunction display messages. Selecting display (speed display or outside temperature) for status display 왘 Move the selection marker with the æ or ç button to the Instr. cluster submenu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the display: Status line display. Available languages: 앫 German 앫 English 앫 French 앫 Italian 앫 Spanish The selection marker is on the current setting. 왘 Press æ or ç to select the status line to degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or miles. i You will see the status indicator when you have called up a different display from the standard display. 166 Controls in detail Control system Selecting display (speed display or outside temperature) for basic display 왘 왘 Move the selection marker with the æ or ç button to the Instr. cluster submenu. Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the display: Basic display. Tire pressure display* Time/Date submenu Use this function to set the unit for the tire pressure display. Access the Time/Date submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Time/Date submenu to change the time and date display settings. The following functions are available: 왘 Move the selection marker with the æ or ç button to the Instr, cluster submenu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the display: Display unit Tire pressure. Function Page Synchronizing the time 168 Set time (hours) 168 The selection marker is on the current setting. Set time (minutes) 168 Set date (month) 169 Set date (day) 169 Set date (year) 169 The selection marker is on the current setting. 왘 Press æ or ç to select the display permanently shown in the multifunction display. i 왘 Press æ or ç to select the desired tire pressure unit. Information on setting the time, refer to separate COMAND instructions. 167 Controls in detail Control system Synchronizing the time Set time (hours) Set time (minutes) This function can only be seen on vehicles with COMAND and navigation module*. This function can only be seen when time synchronization is switched off. This function can only be seen when time synchronization is switched off. 왘 Move the selection marker with the æ or ç button to the Time/Date submenu. 왘 Move the selection marker with the æ or ç button to the Time/Date submenu. 왘 Move the selection marker with the æ or ç button to the Time/Date submenu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the display: Time sync. with head unit. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the display: Clock, hours. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the display: Clock, minutes. The selection marker is on the current setting. 왘 Press æ or ç to select the desired setting. 168 The selection marker is on the hour setting. The selection marker is on the minute setting. 왘 Press æ or ç to set the hours. 왘 Press æ or ç to set the minutes. 왘 Confirm by pressing reset button. 왘 Confirm by pressing reset button. Controls in detail Control system Set date (month) Set date (day) Set date (year) 왘 Move the selection marker with the æ or ç button to the Time/Date submenu. 왘 Move the selection marker with the æ or ç button to the Time/Date submenu. 왘 Move the selection marker with the æ or ç button to the Time/Date submenu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the display: Set date month. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the display: Set date day. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the display: Set date year. The selection marker is on the month setting. 왘 Press æ or ç to set the month. The selection marker is on the day setting. 왘 Press æ or ç to set the day. The selection marker is on the year setting. 왘 Press æ or ç to set the year. 169 Controls in detail Control system Lighting submenu Access the Lighting submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Lighting submenu to change the lamp and lighting settings on your vehicle. The following functions are available: Function Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA only) 왘 Move the selection marker with the æ or ç button to the Lighting submenu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the display: Lamp circuit headlamp. Page Set daytime running lamp mode 170 (USA only) The selection marker is on the current setting. With daytime running lamp mode activated and the exterior lamp switch at position M or U the low beam headlamps are switched on when the engine is running. In low ambient light conditions the following lamps will switch on additionally: 앫 Parking lamps 앫 Tail lamps 앫 License plate lamps Side marker lamps Set locator lighting 171 Ambient light level 173 앫 Exterior lamps delayed shut-off 172 For more information on the daytime running lamp mode, see “Lighting” (컄 page 141). Interior lighting delayed shut-off 173 왘 170 Press æ or ç to select manual or daytime running lamp (constant) mode. This function is not available in countries where daytime running lamps are mandatory. Controls in detail Control system i Setting locator lighting For safety reasons, resetting the Lighting submenu to factory settings while driving (컄 page 163) will not deactivate the daytime running lamp mode. With the locator lighting feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in position U, the following lamps will switch on when the vehicle is unlocked using the Œ button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* during darkness: The following message appears in the multifunction display: Lighting - Cannot be completely reset to factory settings while driving. 앫 Parking lamps 앫 Tail lamps 앫 License plate lamps 앫 Side marker lamps 앫 Front fog lamps The locator lighting switches off when the driver’s door is opened. If you do not open a door after unlocking with the SmartKey the lamps will switch off automatically after approximately 40 seconds. 왘 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see Function Surround lighting in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting. 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch the locator lighting function on. 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U when exiting the vehicle. The locator lighting feature is activated. Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Lighting submenu. 171 Controls in detail Control system Use this function to set whether and how long you would like the exterior lamps to illuminate during darkness after exiting the vehicle and all doors closed. With the delayed shut-off feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in position U before the engine is turned off, the following lamps will switch on after you have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch or, when using KEYLESS-GO*, after turning off the engine and open the driver’s door: 앫 Parking lamps 앫 Tail lamps 앫 License plate lamps 앫 Side marker lamps 앫 Front fog lamps If you do not open a door after removing the SmartKey from the starter switch, the lamps will switch off automatically after approximately 60 seconds. 172 앫 i Setting night security illumination (Headlamps delayed shut-off) You can reactivate this function within ten minutes by opening a door. period. 왘 왘 Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Lighting submenu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see Headlamps delayed shut-off in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting. 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U before turning off the engine. The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is activated. You can temporarily deactivate the delayed shut-off feature: 왘 Before exiting the vehicle, turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0. 왘 Then turn it to position 2 and back to position 0. The delayed shut-off feature is deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as you reinsert the SmartKey in the starter switch. Press button æ or ç to select the desired lamp-on period. 앫 15 sec., 30 sec., 45 sec. or 60 sec., select the desired lamp-on 0 sec., the delayed shut-off feature Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: is deactivated. 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the gear selector lever (컄 page 36). Controls in detail Control system 왘 Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off Use this function to set whether and how long you would like the interior lighting to remain lit during darkness after you have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch. 왘 왘 Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Lighting submenu. Press button j or k repeatedly until you see Ambient light Level in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting. 왘 Press button æ or ç to select the desired lamp-on period. You can select: Press button j or k repeatedly until you see Interior lamp delayed shut-off in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting. 앫 0 sec., the delayed shut-off feature is deactivated. 앫 5 sec., 10 sec., 15 sec. or 20 sec., the interior lighting de- layed shut-off feature is activated with the desired lamp-on period. Setting ambient lighting Using this function to adjust the brightness of the ambient lighting. 왘 왘 Press button æ or ç to select the desired brightness of the ambient lighting. The setting 1 represents the darkest level and setting 5 the brightest level. The ambient light is switched off at setting 0. Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Lighting submenu. 173 Controls in detail Control system 왘 Vehicle submenu Access the Vehicle submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu to make general vehicle settings. The following functions are available: Function Page Set automatic locking 174 Limiting opening height of tailgate* 174 왘 Move the selection marker with the æ or ç button to the Vehicle submenu. Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the display: Automatic door lock. The selection marker is on the current setting. Limiting opening height of tailgate* Use this function to activate or deactivate the limiting opening height of tailgate. 왘 Move the selection marker with the æ or ç button to the Vehicle submenu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the display: Opening limiter Tailgate. The selection marker is on the current setting. Setting automatic locking Use this function to activate or deactivate the automatic central locking. With the automatic central locking system activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). 왘 Press æ or ç to switch Automatic door lock on or off. 왘 174 Press æ or ç to switch Opening limiter Tailgate on or off. Controls in detail Control system Convenience submenu Access the Convenience submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Convenience submenu to change the settings for a number of convenience features. The following functions are available: Function Page Warning! G You must make sure that no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel and driver’s seat when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated. Activate easy-entry/exit feature 175 To cancel seat/steering wheel movement, do one of the following: Set SmartKey-dependency 176 앫 Set parking position for exterior 176 rear view mirror Press seat adjustment switch (컄 page 30). 앫 Move steering column stalk (컄 page 41). Activating easy-entry/exit feature* 앫 Press one of the memory position buttons or the memory button M (컄 page 30). Use this function to activate and deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature (컄 page 124). The steering wheel and driver’s seat stop moving. 왘 Move the selection marker with the æ or ç button to the Convenience submenu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the display: Function Easy-entry feature. The selection marker is on the current setting. 왘 Press button æ or ç to change the easy-entry/exit setting. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could open the driver's door and unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. 175 Controls in detail Control system The following settings are available for the easy-entry/exit feature: Setting SmartKey-dependency Use this function to set whether the memory settings for the seats, the steering wheel, the mirrors and other settings of the control system should be stored separately for each SmartKey (컄 page 102). off The easy-entry/exit feature is deactivated. Steering col. Only the steering column is moved. 왘 Both the steering column and the seat are moved. Move the selection marker with the æ or ç button to the Convenience submenu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the display: Key-dependent. Steering col. + seat The selection marker is on the current setting. Setting parking position for exterior rear view mirror Use the Mirror adjustment parking aid function to select whether the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror should be turned downward during parking maneuvers when reverse gear R is engaged. For additional information, see “Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position” (컄 page 192). 왘 Move the selection marker to the Convenience submenu using the æ or ç button. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the display: Mirror adjustment parking aid. The selection marker is on the current setting. 왘 176 Press æ or ç to set SmartKey-dependency to on or off. Controls in detail Control system 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch function on or off. Adjusting the dynamic seat The following settings are available: The function dynamic seat adjustment lets you determine the way the seat adjusts while driving. Level 1 (Comfort) Less lateral support and slow air pressure build-up in the air chambers of the backrest side bolsters Level 2 (Sporty) Strong lateral support and fast air pressure build-up in the air chambers of the backrest side bolsters 왘 Move the selection marker with the æ or ç button to the Dynamic Seat submenu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the display: Dyn. Multi-cont. Seat, driver for the driver seat or Dynamic seat* submenu Access the Dynamic Seat submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Dynamic Seat Dyn. Multi-cont. Seat, fr. pass. submenu to change the settings for the dynamic seats. The following functions are available: Function Page Adjust driver seat 177 Adjust passenger seat 177 for the passenger seat. The selection marker is on the current setting. 왘 Press æ or ç to switch function Level 1 or Level 2. 177 Controls in detail Control system Trip computer menu Use the trip computer menu to call up statistical data on your vehicle. The following information is available: Function Page Fuel consumption statistics after 178 start Fuel consumption statistics since last reset Fuel consumption statistics after start Fuel consumption since last reset 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until you see the first function of the Trip computer menu. 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until you see the first function of the Trip computer menu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the left display: After start. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the display: After reset. 178 Call up range (distance to empty) 179 1 Distance driven since start 2 Time elapsed since start 3 Average speed since start 4 Average fuel consumption since start 178 1 Distance driven since last reset 2 Time elapsed since last reset 3 Average speed since last reset 4 Average fuel consumption since last reset Controls in detail Control system i Call up range (distance to empty) All statistics stored since the last engine start will be reset approximately four hours after the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 0 or removed from the starter switch. 왘 Resetting will not occur if you turn the SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this time period. Resetting fuel consumption statistics 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until you see the first function of the Trip computer menu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see the reading that you want to reset in the display. 왘 Press and hold the reset button in the instrument cluster (컄 page 24) until the value is reset to 0. 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until you see the first function of the Trip computer menu. Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the display: Range: In the display you will see the calculated range based on the current fuel tank level. TEL menu* Warning! G A driver’s attention to the road must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone when weather, road and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. 컄컄 179 Controls in detail Control system 컄컄 Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury. 앫 If the telephone is on: Answering a call The telephone will then search for a network. During this time the display is empty. When your telephone is ready to receive calls, you can answer a call at any time. In the display you will then see the message: As soon as the telephone has found a network, READY appears in the display. You can use the functions in the TEL menu to operate your telephone, provided it is connected to a hands-free system and switched on. 왘 Switch on the telephone and COMAND. 왘 Press button ÿ or è on the steering wheel repeatedly until you see the Tel menu in the display. Which messages will appear in the display field depends on whether your telephone is switched on or off: 앫 If the telephone is off, the message in the multifunction display is: PHONE off. 180 왘 This standby message indicates that your telephone is ready for use and you can operate it using the control system. Press button s. You have answered the call. In the display you see the length of the call. i If you do not wish to accept a call, press button t. Controls in detail Control system Ending a call 왘 왘 Press button t. You have ended the call. In the display you will again see the standby message. Press button j or k repeatedly until the desired name appears in the display. The stored names are displayed in ascending or descending alphabetical order. 앫 Dialing a number from the phone book i If your telephone is ready to receive calls, you may select and dial a number from the phone book at any time. If you press and hold j or k for longer than one second, the system scrolls rapidly through the list of names until you release the button again. 왘 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until you see the Tel menu in the display. Cancel the quick search mode by pressing t. Press button j or k. The control system reads the phone book which is stored in the telephone. This may take up to 30 seconds. In the display you will see the message Please wait. When the message Please wait disappears, the phone book has been loaded. 왘 Press button s. If no connection is made, the control system stores the dialed number in the redial memory. Redialing The control system stores the most recently dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the need to search through your entire phone book. 컄컄 The system dials the selected phone number. 앫 If the connection is successful, the name of the party you called and the duration of the call will appear in the display. 181 Controls in detail Control system 컄컄왘 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until you see the Tel menu in the display. Press button s. In the display you see the first number in the redial memory. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until the desired name appears in the display. 왘 Press button s. The control system dials the selected phone number. 182 Controls in detail Automatic transmission 왔 Automatic transmission For more information on driving with an automatic transmission, see “Automatic transmission” (컄 page 47). Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear shifting process to your individual driving style by continually adjusting the shift points up or down. These shift point adjustments are performed based on current operating and driving conditions. i During the brief warm-up, transmission upshifting is delayed. This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more quickly to operating temperature. If the operating conditions change, the automatic transmission reacts by adjusting its gear shift program. The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, depending on: 앫 the gear selector lever position D (컄 page 187) with gear ranges (컄 page 186) 앫 the selected shift program (C/S) (컄 page 188) 앫 the position of the accelerator pedal (컄 page 189) 앫 the vehicle speed Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission 183 Controls in detail Automatic transmission An additional indication of the current gear selector lever position can be found on the cover of the shifting-gate. ! Allow engine to warm up under low load use. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached. The indicators come on when you activate a switch (e.g. unlocking the vehicle or opening a door) and go out after approximately 15 minutes. Warning! 1 Current gear range/gear selector lever position 2 Current program mode The current gear range/gear selector lever position and program mode (C/S) appear in the multifunction display. 184 Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P only when the vehicle is stopped. G It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. When the gear selector lever is in position D, you can influence transmission shifting by: 앫 limiting the gear range 앫 changing gears manually Controls in detail Automatic transmission One-touch gearshifting Even with an automatic transmission you can change the gears manually when the gear selector lever is in position D. Downshifting 왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to the left in the D- direction. The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next lower gear. This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the transmission (컄 page 186). Warning! G i Canceling gear range limit To avoid overrevving the engine when the gear selector lever is moved to the D- direction, the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s max. speed would be exceeded. 왘 Upshifting 왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to the right in the D+ direction. The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the transmission. Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D+ direction until D reappears in the multifunction display. The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to gear range D. Shifting into optimal gear range 왘 Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D- direction. The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration. This will involve shifting down one or more gears. On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control. 185 Controls in detail Automatic transmission Gear ranges With the gear selector lever in position D, you can limit the transmission’s gear range by pressing the gear selector lever to the left (D-), and reverse the gear range limit by pressing the gear selector lever to the right (D+). The selected gear range appears in the multifunction display (컄 page 184). If you press on the accelerator when the engine has reached its rpm limit, the transmission will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected. Effect ï The transmission shifts through sixth gear only (applies to vehicles with 7-speed automatic transmission only). î The transmission shifts through fifth gear only (applies to vehicles with 7-speed automatic transmission only). é The transmission shifts through fourth gear only. è The transmission shifts through third gear only. With this selection you can use the braking effect of the engine. 186 Effect ç The transmission shifts through second gear only. Allows the use of engine’s braking power when driving: 앫 on steep downgrades 앫 in mountainous regions 앫 under extreme operating conditions æ The transmission operates in first gear only. For maximum use of engine’s braking effect on very steep or lengthy downgrades. Controls in detail Automatic transmission Gear selector lever position Effect ì Park position Gear selector lever position when the vehicle is parked. Place gear selector lever in position P only when vehicle is stopped. The park position is not intended to serve as a brake when the vehicle is parked. Rather, the driver should always set the parking brake in addition to placing the gear selector lever in position P to secure the vehicle. Effect The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P. With the SmartKey removed, the gear selector lever is locked in position P. If the vehicle’s electrical system is malfunctioning, the gear selector lever could remain locked in position P (컄 page 405). í Reverse gear Place gear selector lever in position R only when vehicle is stopped. Effect ë Neutral No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle can be moved freely (pushed or towed). To avoid damage to the transmission, never engage N while driving. If the ESP is deactivated or malfunctioning: Move gear selector lever to N only if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. ê Drive The transmission shifts automatically. All forward gears are available. 187 Controls in detail Automatic transmission ! Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other reason with gear selector lever in N can result in transmission damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Warning! G Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in position P is dangerous. Also, position P alone is not intended to or capable of preventing your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or objects. Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move the gear selector lever from position P, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. Automatic shift program The program mode selector switch is located on the lower part of the center console. 1 Program mode selector switch Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P (컄 page 56). C Comfort For comfort driving S Sport For standard driving When parked on an incline, turn the front wheels towards the road curb. The current gear selector lever position and the selected program mode (C/S) are indicated in the multifunction display (컄 page 184). Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hey or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire. 188 Controls in detail Automatic transmission ! Never change the program mode when the gear selector lever is out of position P. This could result in a change of driving characteristics for which you may not be prepared. 왘 Press program mode selector switch 1 repeatedly until the letter of the desired shift program appears in the multifunction display. Select C for comfort driving: 앫 i The last selected program mode (C or S) is switched on when the engine is restarted. The vehicle starts out in second gear (both forward and reverse) for gentler starts. This does not apply if full throttle is applied or gear range 1 is selected. Driving tips Accelerator position Your driving style influences the transmission’s shifting behavior: Less throttle Earlier upshifting More throttle Later upshifting Kickdown 앫 Traction and driving stability are improved on icy roads. Use kickdown when you want maximum acceleration. 앫 Upshifts occur earlier even when you give more gas. The engine then operates at lower rpms and the wheels are less likely to spin. 왘 Press the accelerator past the point of resistance. The transmission shifts into a lower gear. 왘 Ease on the accelerator when you have reached the desired speed. The transmission shifts up again. 189 Controls in detail Automatic transmission Stopping Maneuvering When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights: When you maneuver in tight areas, e.g. when pulling into a parking space: 왘 왘 Leave the transmission in gear. Hold the vehicle with the brake. When you stop longer with the engine idling or on an uphill gradient: 왘 왘 Move the gear selector lever to position P. 왘 Control the vehicle speed by gradually releasing the brakes. 왘 Accelerate gently. 왘 Never abruptly step on the accelerator. Working on the vehicle Set the parking brake. Warning! G When working on the vehicle, set the parking brake and move gear selector lever to position P. Otherwise the vehicle could roll away. 190 Emergency operation (Limp Home Mode) If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in limp home (emergency operation) mode. In this mode only second gear and reverse gear can be activated. 왘 Stop the vehicle. 왘 Move gear selector lever to P. 왘 Turn off the engine. 왘 Wait at least ten seconds before restarting. 왘 Restart the engine. 왘 Move gear selector lever to position D (for second gear) or R. 왘 Have the transmission checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Controls in detail Good visibility 왔 Good visibility For information on windshield wipers, see “Windshield wipers” (컄 page 52). Headlamp cleaning system* The button is located on the left side of the dashboard. For more information on filling up the washer reservoir, see “Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*” (컄 page 306). Rear view mirror For more information on setting the rear view mirrors, see “Mirrors” (컄 page 41). The interior rear view mirror does not react, for example, if the rear window sunshade is in raised position. The reflection brightness of the exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s side and the interior rear view mirror will respond automatically to glare when 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34). 왘 Press button 1. The headlamps are cleaned with a high-pressure water jet. G The auto-dimming function does not react if incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the interior rear view mirror. Auto-dimming mirror 1 Headlamp washer button Warning! 앫 the ignition is switched on, and 앫 incoming light from headlamps falls on the sensor in the interior rear view mirror The rear view mirror will not react if 앫 reverse gear is engaged 앫 the interior lighting is turned on Glare can endanger you and others. Warning! G In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may escape from the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks. Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary. 191 Controls in detail Good visibility ! Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can be completely removed only while in the liquid state by applying plenty of water. Warning! G Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position Follow these steps to activate the mirror parking position so that the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror will be turned downward to the stored position. The buttons are located on the driver’s door. Exercise care when using the passenger side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes. Make sure the Mirror adjustment parking aid function in the Convenience submenu of the control system is switched to on (컄 page 176). 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34). 왘 Press button 2 for the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. 왘 Place the gear selector lever in reverse gear R. The passenger-side exterior rear view mirror will be turned downward to the stored position. The exterior rear view mirror returns to its previously stored driving position: 1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror button 2 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror button 왘 192 왘 Make sure you have stored a parking position for the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror (컄 page 140). 앫 ten seconds after you put the gear selector lever out of position R 앫 immediately once your vehicle exceeds a speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) 앫 immediately when you press button 1 for driver’s side mirror. Controls in detail Good visibility Sun visors The sun visors protect you from sun glare while driving. Warning! G Do not use the vanity mirror while driving. Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare can endanger you and others. 1 Sun visor 2 Mounting 왘 Swing sun visor 1 down when you experience glare. 1 Sun visor 2 Mirror cover 3 Mirror lamp 4 Vanity mirror 왘 Make sure the sun visor is properly engaged in the mounting. 왘 Lift the mirror cover to access the mirror. Lamp 3 switches on. 193 Controls in detail Good visibility i Roller sunblind* in the rear doors If sunlight enters through a side window, disengage sun visor from mounting 1 and pivot to the side. Mirror lamp 3 (컄 page 193) will switch off. 1 Mounting 2 Additional visor* 3 Sun visor If sunlight enters through a side window: 왘 Disengage sun visor from mounting 1. 왘 Pivot sun visor to the side. The sun visors are extendable. 왘 Adjust the sun visors by pushing or pulling in the direction of the arrows. 194 왘 Pull the roller sunblind out using the hooks. 왘 Attach the hooks at the top. ! Always guide the sunblind by hand. Do not let it snap back, as the retractor could be damaged. Controls in detail Good visibility Rear window defroster The rear window defroster uses a large amount of power. To keep the battery drain to a minimum, switch off the defroster as soon as the rear window is clear. The defroster is automatically deactivated after approximately 6 to 17 minutes of operation depending on the outside temperature. Activating 왘 Press button F (컄 page 198) or (컄 page 210) or 1 (컄 page 199) or (컄 page 211) on the respective climate control panel. Deactivating 왘 ! Press button F or 1 again. The indicator lamp on the button goes out. Warning! G Any accumulation of snow and ice should be removed from the rear window before driving. Visibility could otherwise be impaired, endangering you and others. If the rear window defroster switches off too soon and the indicator lamp starts flashing, this means that too many electrical consumers are operating simultaneously and there is insufficient voltage in the battery. The system responds automatically by deactivating the rear window defroster. As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage, the rear window defroster automatically turns itself back on. The indicator lamp on the button comes on. 195 Controls in detail Dual-zone automatic climate control 196 Controls in detail Dual-zone automatic climate control 1 Climate control panel i 1 Left rear center air vent, adjustable 2 Thumbwheel for air volume control for left center air vent For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders for the center vents 3 and 5 to the middle position. 2 Right rear center air vent, adjustable 3 Left center air vent, adjustable 4 Center air vent, fixed 3 Thumbwheel for air volume control for right rear center air vent 4 Thumbwheel for air volume control for left rear center air vent 5 Right center air vent, adjustable 6 Thumbwheel for air volume control for right center air vent 7 Thumbwheel for air volume control for side air vent 8 Side defroster vent, fixed 9 Side air vent, adjustable Rear air vents 197 Controls in detail Dual-zone automatic climate control Depending on production date, your vehicle is equipped with either climate control panel design A or B. Climate control panel design A 1 Left-side temperature control 6 Right-side temperature control b Air volume display 2 Windshield defroster 7 Residual heat/ventilation c Decrease air volume 3 Increase air volume 8 AC cooling on/off d Air recirculation 4 Air distribution 9 Air distribution display 5 Rear window defroster a Climate control on/off e Air distribution and air volume (automatic, manual) 198 Controls in detail Dual-zone automatic climate control Climate control panel design B 1 Left-side temperature control 7 AC cooling on/off c Air recirculation 2 Windshield defroster 8 Air distribution display 3 Increase air volume 9 Climate control on/off d Air distribution and air volume (automatic, manual) 4 Air distribution a Air volume display 5 Rear window defroster b Decrease air volume 6 Right-side temperature control 199 Controls in detail Dual-zone automatic climate control The climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. You can operate the climate control system in either the automatic or manual mode. The system cools or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature and the current outside temperature. Warning! G When operating the climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents in the footwell can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the footwell air vents. If necessary change the air flow using the air distribution controls (컄 page 198) to direct the air away from the footwell air vents. 200 Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system. The air conditioning will not engage (no cooling) if the ACOFF mode is activated or AC mode is deactivated (컄 page 206). Warning! G Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others. i Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior. If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior before driving off. Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris. Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear window. Controls in detail Dual-zone automatic climate control Deactivating the dual-zone automatic climate control system Deactivating 왘 Press button M (컄 page 198) or button ´ (컄 page 199). i When the air conditioning is switched off, the outside air supply and circulation are also switched off. Only choose this setting for a short time. Otherwise the windows could fog up. Setting the temperature Adjusting air distribution Use temperature controls 1 and 6 (컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199) to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment. You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C). Use air distribution control 4 (컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199) to adjust the air distribution. Increasing 왘 Press button M (컄 page 198) or button ´ (컄 page 199) again. a Directs air through the center, side and rear passenger compartment air vents Z X Directs air to the windows Y Directs air to the footwells Directs air into the entire vehicle interior Decreasing or 왘 Function The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature. Reactivating 왘 Turn the temperature control 1 or 6 (컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199) slightly to the right. Symbol Press any button on the climate control panel (컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199). 왘 Turn the temperature control 1 or 6 (컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199) slightly to the left. The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature. 201 Controls in detail Dual-zone automatic climate control Adjusting manually Adjusting center air vents: 왘 The thumbwheels for left 2 and right 6 (컄 page 197) center air vents are automatically positioned for optimum interior airflow. In this position, center air vent 4 (컄 page 197) and adjustable left and right center vents 3 and 5 (컄 page 197) are fully opened. Press air distribution rocker switch 4 (컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199) until the display shows the desired setting. The indicator lamp on the U button goes out and the current air distribution appears in the air distribution display 9 (컄 page 198) or 8 (컄 page 199). Adjusting automatically 왘 Press button U (컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199). The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air distribution is adjusted automatically. Adjusting air volume Adjusting manually Five blower speeds are available. 왘 The indicator lamp on the U button (컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199) goes out. The selected blower speed is shown in the display. Windshield fogged on the outside 왘 Switch the windshield wipers on (컄 page 52). 왘 Press the U button. The indicator lamp on the button comes on. Press to decrease or Q to increase air volume (컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199) to the desired level. Adjusting automatically 왘 Press button U (컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199). The indicator lamp on the U button comes on. The air volume is adjusted automatically. 202 Controls in detail Dual-zone automatic climate control Adjusting center air vents: The thumbwheels for left 2 and right 6 (컄 page 197) center air vents are automatically positioned for optimum interior airflow. In this position, center air vent 4 (컄 page 197) and adjustable left and right center vents 3 and 5 (컄 page 197) are fully opened. Windshield fogged on the outside 왘 Switch the windshield wipers on (컄 page 52). 왘 Press the U button. The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air conditioning switches automatically to the following functions: Defrosting i These settings should only be selected for a short time. Activating 왘 Press button P (컄 page 198) or 0 (컄 page 199). The indicator lamp on the button comes on. 앫 maximum blowing and heating power 앫 air flows onto the windshield and the front side windows 앫 the air recirculation mode is switched off Deactivating 왘 Press button P (컄 page 198) or 0 (컄 page 199). The indicator lamp on the button goes out. Defrosting is turned off. 203 Controls in detail Dual-zone automatic climate control Activating Air recirculation mode Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the outside. This setting cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the passenger compartment. Warning! G When the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation mode for short periods to prevent window fogging. Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others. 204 왘 Press button O (컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199). The indicator lamp on the button comes on. i If you keep button O pressed, the side windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* or tilt/sliding panel* will close. Warning! G Never operate the windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure. In case the procedure causes potential danger: The closing of the side windows can be immediately halted by pressing or pulling the respective window switch. The closing of the tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by moving the switch for the tilt/sliding sunroof in any direction. The closing of the side windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof can be reversed by again pressing and holding the O button. Controls in detail Dual-zone automatic climate control i Deactivating The air recirculation mode is activated automatically at high outside temperatures. 왘 If you have turned off the air conditioning (컄 page 206) or the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the air recirculation mode will not switch on automatically. Press button O (컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199). The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically: 앫 after five minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41°F (5°C) 앫 after five minutes if the air conditioning is turned off 앫 after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41°F (5°C) The indicator lamp on the button goes out. i If you keep button O pressed, the side windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* will return to their previous position. At outside temperatures above 79°F (26°C), the system will not automatically switch back to outside air. A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes. 205 Controls in detail Dual-zone automatic climate control Air conditioning Deactivating Activating The air conditioning is operational while the engine is running and cools the interior air to the temperature set by the operator. It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the climate control system. The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified. Moist air can fog up the windows. You can dehumidify the air with the air conditioning. Climate control panel design A i Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction. Warning! 왘 왘 Press button ± (컄 page 198). The cooling function is switched off. Climate control panel design B 왘 Climate control panel design B 왘 Press button œ (컄 page 199). The indicator lamp on the button goes out. The cooling function is switched off. Press button ± (컄 page 198) again. The indicator lamp on the button goes out. The indicator lamp on the button comes on. G If you turn off the cooling function, the vehicle will not be cooled when weather conditions are warm. The windows can fog up more quickly. Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others. 206 Climate control panel design A Press button œ (컄 page 199) again. The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer. Controls in detail Dual-zone automatic climate control ! If the air conditioning cannot be turned on again, this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned itself off. Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. i Residual heat and ventilation* (available on climate control panel design A only) With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine. Activating 왘 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 or 1, or remove it from the starter switch. Press button T (컄 page 198). The indicator lamp on button comes on. How long the system will provide heating depends on the coolant temperature and the temperature set by the operator. The blower will run at speed setting 1 regardless of the air distribution control setting. Deactivating 왘 Press button T (컄 page 198). The indicator lamp on button goes out. The residual heat is automatically turned off: 앫 when the ignition is switched on 앫 after about 30 minutes 앫 if the battery voltage drops 207 Controls in detail 4-zone automatic climate control* 208 Controls in detail 4-zone automatic climate control* 1 Climate control panel 2 Thumbwheel for air volume control for left center air vent 3 Left center air vent, adjustable 4 Air vent, fixed 5 Right center air vent, adjustable 6 Thumbwheel for air volume control for right center air vent 7 Thumbwheel for air volume control for side air vent 8 Side defroster vent, fixed 9 Side air vent, adjustable 1 Left rear center air vent, adjustable 1 Thumbwheel for air volume control for side air vent 2 Side air vent, adjustable 2 Right rear center air vent, adjustable 3 Thumbwheel for air volume control for right rear center air vent 4 Temperature rocker switch, right 5 Display 6 Temperature rocker switch, left 7 Thumbwheel for air volume control for left rear center air vent 209 Controls in detail 4-zone automatic climate control* Depending on production date, your vehicle is equipped with either climate control design panel A or B. Climate control panel design A 1 Air distribution, left 7 Air distribution, right c Climate control on/off 2 Defrosting d Decrease air volume 3 Temperature rocker switch, left 8 Air distribution and air volume, right (automatic, manual) 4 Display 9 AC cooling on/off f Air recirculation 5 Temperature rocker switch, right a Rear air-conditioning remote control 6 Rear window defroster b Increase air volume g Air distribution and air volume, left (automatic, manual) 210 e Residual heat/ventilation Controls in detail 4-zone automatic climate control* Climate control panel design B 1 Air distribution, left 7 Air distribution, right c Climate control on/off 2 Defrosting d Decrease air volume 3 Temperature rocker switch, left 8 Air distribution and air volume, right (automatic, manual) 4 Display 9 AC cooling on/off 5 Temperature rocker switch, right a Rear air-conditioning remote control f Air distribution and air volume, left (automatic, manual) 6 Rear window defroster b Increase air volume e Air recirculation 211 Controls in detail 4-zone automatic climate control* Warning! G When operating the climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents in the footwell can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may cause burn or frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the footwell air vents. If necessary change the air flow using the air distribution controls (컄 page 210) to direct the air away from the footwell air vents. 212 The climate control is a 4-zone intelligent climate control system. Your vehicle interior is divided into 4 zones. With the help of a sun sensor, the climate control determines the relation of the sun to the vehicle and automatically adjusts the inside temperature for every individual zone. You can set the temperature for each of the 4 zones separately. These settings can be assigned to a SmartKey and stored in memory (컄 page 176). The climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. It cools the vehicle’s interior according to the angle and intensity of the sun’s rays, the outside temperature and the selected temperature. You can operate the climate control system in either the automatic or manual mode. Controls in detail 4-zone automatic climate control* Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system. The air conditioning will not engage (no cooling) if the ACOFF mode (컄 page 210) is activated or AC mode (컄 page 211) is deactivated. i Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior. If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior before driving off. G Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris. Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others. Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear window. Warning! Deactivating the 4-zone automatic climate control system Deactivating It is possible to deactivate the climate control system. 왘 Press button M (컄 page 210) or button ´ (컄 page 211) until the display is cleared. The climate control system is deactivated. i When the air conditioning is switched off, the outside air supply and circulation are also switched off. Only choose this setting for a short time. Otherwise the windows could fog up. Reactivating 왘 Press button M (컄 page 210) or button ´ (컄 page 211) again. 213 Controls in detail 4-zone automatic climate control* Setting the temperature Use temperature control rocker switches 3 and 5 (컄 page 210) or (컄 page 211) to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment. You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C). i When operating the climate control system in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution. 214 Increasing 왘 Push top of temperature control rocker switch 3 and/or 5 (컄 page 210) or (컄 page 211). The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature. Decreasing 왘 Push bottom of temperature control rocker switch 3 and/or 5 (컄 page 210) or (컄 page 211). The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature. Adjusting air distribution Use the air distribution controls 1 and 7 (컄 page 210) or (컄 page 211) to separately adjust the air distribution on each side of the passenger compartment. The following symbols are found on the controls: Symbol Function a Directs air through the center, side and rear passenger compartment air vents Z X Directs air to the windows Y Directs air to the footwells Directs air into the entire vehicle interior Controls in detail 4-zone automatic climate control* Adjusting manually 왘 Turn air distribution controls on each side of the passenger compartment to the desired symbol. The indicator lamp in the U button goes out. Adjusting automatically 왘 Press left or right U button (컄 page 210) or (컄 page 211). Adjusting air volume Use button U for automatic mode or air volume controls or Q (컄 page 210) to adjust air volume manually. 왘 Press the left or right U button (컄 page 210) or (컄 page 211). These settings should only be selected for a short time. Activating Nine blower speeds are available. 왘 왘 Press to decrease or Q (컄 page 210) or (컄 page 211) to increase air volume to the desired level. The AUTO display disappears and the automatic mode is switched off. The selected blower speed is shown in the display. Windshield fogged on the outside Switch the windshield wipers on. i Adjusting manually The indicator lamp in the U button illuminates. The air distribution is adjusted automatically. 왘 Defrosting Adjusting automatically 왘 Press left or right U button (컄 page 210) or (컄 page 211). Press button P (컄 page 210) or 0 (컄 page 211). The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air conditioning switches automatically to the following functions: 앫 maximum blowing and heating power 앫 air flows onto the windshield and the front side windows 앫 the air recirculation mode is switched off The AUTO display appears and the air volume is adjusted automatically. 215 Controls in detail 4-zone automatic climate control* Deactivating 왘 Press button P (컄 page 210) or 0 (컄 page 211). The indicator lamp on the button goes out. Defrosting is turned off. Activating Air recirculation mode Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the outside. This setting cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the passenger compartment. Maximum cooling MAX COOL If the left and right air distribution controls as well as the airflow volume control are set to U and there is a high need for cooling, the display “MAX COOL” appears in the front and rear display. This provides the fastest possible cooling of the vehicle interior (when windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* are closed). 216 Warning! G When the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation mode for short periods to prevent window fogging. Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others. 왘 Press button O (컄 page 210) or (컄 page 211). The indicator lamp on the button comes on. i If you keep button O pressed, the side windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof* will close. Controls in detail 4-zone automatic climate control* Warning! G Never operate the side windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure. In case the procedure causes potential danger: The closing of the side windows can be immediately halted by pressing or pulling the respective window switch. The closing of the tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by moving the switch for the tilt/sliding sunroof in any direction. The closing of the side windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof can be reversed by again pressing and holding the O button. i i The air recirculation mode is activated automatically: If you keep button O pressed, the side windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof* will return to their previous position. 앫 at high outside temperatures 앫 if the concentration of carbon monoxide and nitrogen oxide in the outside air increases, for example in a tunnel) If you have turned off the air conditioning (컄 page 210) or (컄 page 211) or the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the air recirculation mode will not switch on automatically. Deactivating 왘 Press button O(컄 page 210) or (컄 page 211). The indicator lamp on the button goes out. The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically: 앫 after five minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41°F (5°C) 앫 after five minutes if the air conditioning is turned off 앫 after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41°F (5°C) At outside temperatures above 79°F (26°C) the system will not automatically switch back to outside air. A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes. 217 Controls in detail 4-zone automatic climate control* Air conditioning Deactivating Activating The air conditioning is operational while the engine is running and cools the interior air to the temperature set by the operator. It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the climate control system. The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified. Moist air can fog up the windows. You can dehumidify the air with the air conditioning. Climate control panel design A i Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction. Warning! Climate control panel design A 왘 ACOFF Climate control panel design B 왘 Climate control panel design B Press button œ (컄 page 211). The indicator lamp on the button goes out. The cooling function is switched off. 218 ACOFF in the display goes out. in the display comes on. The cooling function is switched off. 왘 Press button ± (컄 page 210) again. The indicator lamp on the button goes out. The indicator lamp on the button comes on. G If you turn off the cooling function, the vehicle will not be cooled when weather conditions are warm. The windows can fog up more quickly. Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others. 왘 Press button ± (컄 page 210). Press button œ (컄 page 211) again. The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer. Controls in detail 4-zone automatic climate control* ! If the air conditioning cannot be turned on again, this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned itself off. Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Residual heat and ventilation (available on 4-zone automatic climate control panel design A only) With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine. Activating 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 or 1, or remove it from the starter switch. 왘 Press button T(컄 page 210). Rear air conditioning REST in the display comes on. Deactivating 왘 Press button T(컄 page 210). REST in the display goes out. The residual heat is automatically turned off 앫 when the ignition is switched on 앫 after about 30 minutes 앫 if the battery voltage drops i How long the system will provide heating depends on the coolant temperature and the temperature set by the operator. The blower will run at speed setting 1 regardless of the air distribution control setting. 1 Left rear center air vent, adjustable 2 Right rear center air vent, adjustable 3 Thumbwheel for air volume control for right rear center air vent 4 Temperature rocker switch, right 5 Display 6 Temperature rocker switch, left 7 Thumbwheel for air volume control for left rear center air vent 219 Controls in detail 4-zone automatic climate control* Adjusting the rear settings with the front control panel Display 1 Temperature, left 2 Temperature, right Display 왘 Basic settings We recommend setting the temperature on both the left- and right-hand sides to 72°F (22°C). This ensures a pleasant temperature in the rear of the vehicle. The temperatures for the left- and right-hand sides can be set using temperature rocker switches 4 and 6. 220 Press the ™ button (컄 page 210) or 5 (컄 page 211). The display switches over. The temperature for the rear left- and right-hand sides of the vehicle can be set with temperature rocker switches 4 and 6. The temperature display disappears approximately five seconds after the last SmartKey confirmation and switches back to the normal display. i The normal display will appear when the ™ button or the button 5 is pressed again. Controls in detail Power windows 왔 Power windows Opening and closing the windows Warning! The side windows are opened and closed electrically. The switches for all of the side windows are on the driver’s door. The switches for the respective windows are on the front passenger door and the rear doors. 1 Rear window override switch (컄 page 84) 2 Right front window 3 Right rear window 4 Left rear window 5 Left front window G When closing the windows, make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. The closing of the door windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if switch was pulled past the resistance point and released, by either pressing or pulling the respective switch. The door windows are equipped with the express-close and automatic reversal function. If the window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you pulled the switch past the resistance point and released it to close the window, the automatic reversal function will stop the window and open it slightly. by pressing and holding the lock button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) on the door handle, or by pressing and holding the air recirculation button O on the climate control, the automatic reversal function will not operate. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. If the window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing the window by pulling and holding the switch, by pressing and holding button ‹ on the SmartKey, 221 Controls in detail Power windows i i You can also open or close the windows using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening feature” (컄 page 223) and “Convenience closing feature” (컄 page 224). With the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or removed from the starter switch, the power windows can be operated: You can close and reopen the windows using the air recirculation button O in the control panel of the climate control (컄 page 198) or (컄 page 210). i Operating the windows from the rear is not possible if you activate the override switch (컄 page 84). 왘 앫 until you open the driver’s or front passenger’s door 앫 for at least five minutes. Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34). Opening the windows 왘 Closing the windows Pull switch 2 to 5 to the resistance point. The corresponding window will move upwards until you release the switch. 222 G If you pull and hold the switch up when closing the window, and upward movement of the window is blocked by some obstruction including but not limited to arms, hands, fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not operate. Fully opening the windows (Express-open) 왘 Press switch 2 to 5 to the resistance point. The corresponding window will move downwards until you release the switch. 왘 Warning Press switch 2 to 5 past the resistance point and release. The corresponding window opens completely. Fully closing the windows (Express-close) 왘 Pull switch 2 to 5 past the resistance point and release. The corresponding window closes completely. Controls in detail Power windows If the upward movement of the window is blocked during the closing procedure, the window will stop and open slightly. Warning! G Driver’s door only: If within five seconds switch is again pulled past the resistance point and released, the automatic reversal will not operate. ! If the upward movement of the window is blocked during the closing procedure, the window will stop and open slightly. Remove the obstruction, pull the respective power window switch again past the resistance point and release. If the window still does not close when there is no obstruction, pull and hold the respective power window switch. The side window will then close without the obstruction sensor function. Stopping windows during Express-operation 왘 Press or pull the respective power window switch again. Synchronizing power windows The power windows must be synchronized 앫 after the battery has been disconnected 앫 if the power windows cannot be fully opened (Express-open) or closed (Express-close) Synchronizing 왘 Close all doors. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34). 왘 Pull switch 2 to 5 until the side windows are completely closed. 왘 Hold on to switches 2 to 5 for approximately one second. Summer opening feature If the weather is warm, you can ventilate the vehicle before driving off by simultaneously: 앫 opening the side windows 앫 opening the tilt/sliding sunroof* 앫 turning on the seat ventilation* for the driver’s seat i The seat ventilation* for the driver’s seat is automatically set to the highest level if activated via summer opening feature. The power windows are synchronized. 223 Controls in detail Power windows Convenience closing feature When you lock the vehicle, you can close the windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof* simultaneously. 왘 왘 왘 왘 Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the driver’s outside door handle. The SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be in close proximity to the door handle. Press and hold button Œ until the windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof* have reached the desired position. Release button Œ to interrupt procedure. 224 왘 왘 Release button ‹ or the lock button at the outside door handle to interrupt procedure. Warning! G Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the driver’s outside door handle (컄 page 224). The SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be in close proximity to the door handle. When closing the windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof*, be sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. Press and hold button ‹ until the windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof* are completely closed. 앫 If potential danger exists, proceed as follows: Release button ‹ to interrupt procedure. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: 왘 왘 Press and hold button ‹ or the lock button at the outside door handle (컄 page 60) until the windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof* are completely closed. Release button ‹. To reverse in direction of movement, press button Œ for opening or button ‹ for closing. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: 앫 Pull on the door handle and hold firmly. The side windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof* will open for as long as the door handle is held but the door not opened. Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof* 왔 Power tilt/sliding sunroof* Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof The tilt/sliding sunroof is opened and closed electrically. The switch for the tilt/sliding sunroof is on the overhead control panel. With the sunroof closed or tilted open, a screen can be slid into the roof opening to guard against sun rays. When sliding the sunroof open, the screen will also retract. Warning! G When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if the switch was moved past the resistance point and released, by moving the switch in any direction. The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass. In the event of an accident, the glass may shatter. This may result in an opening in the roof. 1 Push back to slide roof open 2 Push forward to slide roof closed 3 Push up to raise roof at rear 4 Pull down to lower roof at rear In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them properly may be thrown out of the opening. Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing their seat belts properly as entire body parts or portions of them may protrude from the passenger compartment. 컄컄 225 Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof* 컄컄 i When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. You can also open or close the windows using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening feature” (컄 page 223) and “Convenience closing feature” (컄 page 224). Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there is snow or ice on the roof, as this could result in malfunctions. The tilt/sliding sunroof is opened or closed manually should an electrical malfunction occur (컄 page 407). 226 왘 You can also close and reopen the tilt/sliding sunroof using 앫 ! To avoid damaging the seals, do not transport any objects with sharp edges which can stick out of the tilt/sliding sunroof. Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof 왘 the air recirculation switch O in the control panel of the climate control (컄 page 198) or (컄 page 210) Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34). To open, close, raise or lower the tilt/sliding sunroof, move the sunroof switch to resistance point in the required direction 1 to 4. Release the sunroof switch when the tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the desired position. Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the power tilt/sliding sunroof 왘 To open or close the tilt/sliding sunroof, move the sunroof switch past the resistance point in the direction of arrow 1 to 2 and release. The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes completely. Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof* Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof during Express-operation 왘 Move the sunroof switch in any direction. i If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is blocked during the Express-close procedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof will stop and reopen slightly. Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding sunroof The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized 앫 after the battery has been disconnected or discharged 앫 after the tilt/sliding sunroof has been closed manually (컄 page 407) 앫 after a malfunction 앫 if the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open smoothly 왘 Remove the fuse from the main fuse box (컄 page 434). 왘 Reinsert the fuse in the main fuse box. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34). 왘 Move and hold the sunroof switch in the direction of arrow 3 until the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at the rear. Keep holding the sunroof switch in the direction of arrow 3 for approximately one second. 왘 Check the Express-open feature (컄 page 226). If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens completely, the roof is synchronized. Otherwise repeat the above steps. 227 Controls in detail Driving systems The driving systems of your vehicle are described on the following pages: 앫 앫 Cruise control and Distronic*, with which the vehicle can maintain a preset speed Airmatic DC* adjusts the vehicle suspension characteristics automatically and controls the vehicle level For information on BAS, ABS, SBC and ESP driving systems, see “Driving safety systems” (컄 page 87). Cruise control Warning! The cruise control automatically maintains the speed you set for your vehicle. Use of cruise control is recommended for driving at a constant speed for extended periods of time. You can set or resume cruise control at any speed above 25 mph (40 km/h). E 320 4MATIC, E 500 4MATIC: You can set or resume cruise control at any speed above 20 mph (30 km/h). Cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and must always remain responsible for the vehicle speed and for safe brake operation. Only use cruise control if the road, traffic and weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a steady speed. 앫 The use of cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady speed. 앫 The use of cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control. 앫 Deactivate cruise control when driving in fog. The cruise control function is operated by means of the cruise control lever. The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left-hand side of the steering column (컄 page 22). G The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed. 228 Controls in detail Driving systems Setting current speed i 왘 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed. 왘 Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise control lever. On uphill or downhill grades, cruise control may not be able to maintain the set speed. Once the grade eases, the set speed will be resumed. The current speed is set. 왘 1 Set current or higher speed 2 Set current or lower speed 3 Cancel cruise control 4 Resume at previously set speed Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The selected speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds, and the corresponding speedometer segments from the selected speed to the vehicle maximum speed are illuminated. E 320, E 500: On downhill grades, the cruise control will hold the set speed with active braking action. In addition, on longer downhill grades the automatic transmission will automatically downshift. E 320 4MATIC, E 500 4MATIC: If the engine’s braking power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently on downhill grades, the automatic transmission will automatically downshift. 229 Controls in detail Driving systems Canceling cruise control i E 320 4MATIC, E 500 4MATIC: There are several ways to cancel cruise control: Cruise control automatically switched off, if 앫 you step on the brake pedal. 왘 E 320, E 500: 앫 Step on the brake pedal. you move the gear selector lever to position N while driving. Cruise control will be canceled. The last speed set will be stored for later use. 앫 you step on the brake pedal. 앫 앫 you depress the parking brake pedal. the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (30 km/h). 앫 ESP is in operation. or 왘 Briefly push the cruise control lever to position 3. Cruise control will be canceled. The last speed set will be stored for later use. 앫 The segments in the multifunction display are flashing. the vehicle speed is under 25 mph (40 km/h). ! 앫 ESP is in operation or switched off with the ESP switch (컄 page 92). 앫 you move the gear selector lever in position N while driving. i The last stored speed is canceled when you turn off the engine. In this case the segments in the multifunction display go out and no warning sounds. The segments in the multifunction display go out, and an acoustic warning sounds. 230 Moving gear selector lever to position N while driving also cancels cruise control. However, the gear selector lever should not be moved to position N while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads). Controls in detail Driving systems Setting a higher speed i 왘 E 320, E 500: When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate, the brake system will automatically brake the vehicle if the engine’s braking power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently. 왘 Lift cruise control lever to position 1 and hold it up until the desired speed is reached. Release cruise control lever. The new speed is set. E 320 4MATIC, E 500 4MATIC: When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate, the transmission will automatically downshift if the engine’s braking power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently. i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate cruise control. After brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), cruise control will resume the last speed set. Setting a lower speed 왘 왘 Depress cruise control lever to position 2 and hold it down until the desired speed is reached. Setting to last stored speed (“Resume” function) Warning! The speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to preset speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others. 왘 Fine adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments Faster 왘 Release cruise control lever. Briefly tip cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 1. The new speed is set. Slower 왘 Briefly tip cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 2. G Briefly push cruise control lever to position 4. The cruise control resume the last set speed. 왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The selected speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds, and the corresponding speedometer segments from the selected speed to the vehicle maximum speed are illuminated. 231 Controls in detail Driving systems Distronic* When activated, the Distronic adaptive cruise control system increases driving convenience afforded by the cruise control during travel on expressways and other major roads. 앫 앫 If the Distronic distance sensor detects a slower moving vehicle directly ahead, your vehicle speed will be reduced so that you follow that vehicle at a preset distance. If there is no vehicle directly ahead of you, Distronic will function in the same way as cruise control (컄 page 236). Warning! G Distronic adaptive cruise control is no substitute for active driving involvement. It does not react to stationary objects, nor recognize or predict the curvature and lane layout or the movement of vehicles ahead. Distronic can only apply a maximum of 20% of the vehicle’s braking power. 232 It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to be attentive to traffic and road conditions and to provide the steering, braking and other driving inputs necessary to retain control of the vehicle. Warning! G Distronic is a convenience system. Its speed adjustment reduction capability is intended to make cruise control more effective and usable when traffic speeds vary. However, it is not intended to, nor does it, replace the need for extreme care. The responsibility for the vehicle speed and the distance to the vehicle ahead, including most importantly brake operation to assure safe stopping distance, always rests with the driver. Distronic cannot take street and traffic conditions into account. Warning! G Distronic requires familiarity with its operational characteristics. We strongly recommend that you review the following information carefully before operating the system. i USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Controls in detail Driving systems i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Warning! G Distronic cannot take street and traffic conditions into account. Only use Distronic if the road, weather and traffic conditions make it advisable to travel at a steady speed. Warning! G Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control. Distronic does not act upon adverse sight distance conditions. Do not use Distronic during conditions of fog and heavy rain, snow or sleet. Warning! G Close attention to road and traffic conditions is imperative at all times, regardless of whether or not Distronic is activated. Use of Distronic can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady speed. Distronic will not react to stationary objects in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Distronic will also not respond to oncoming vehicles. Switch off Distronic: 앫 when changing from the left to the right lane if vehicles are moving more slowly in the left lane 앫 when entering a turn lane or highway off ramp 앫 in complex driving situations, such as in highway construction zones In these situations, Distronic will continue to maintain the set speed unless deactivated. Distronic is designed and intended only to maintain a set speed and keep a set distance from moving objects in front of it. Warning! G The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed. 233 Controls in detail Driving systems 왘 Distronic displays in the speedometer dial Immediately brake the vehicle to avoid a collision. Under no circumstances should the driver await the intermittent warning sound before braking. See the following warning note. 1 Segments 1 Set speed If Distronic is activated, one or two segments come on around the set speed. i The vehicle speed displayed on the speedometer can briefly vary from the speed setting on the Distronic system. 234 If Distronic detects a vehicle directly ahead, the segments from the speed of the vehicle ahead to the set speed come on. If Distronic calculates that there is a danger of collision: 앫 The DTR warning lamp l in the instrument cluster comes on red. 앫 An intermittent warning sounds. The intermittent warning sound ceases and the red DTR warning lamp l goes out when the necessary distance to the vehicle ahead is again established. Controls in detail Driving systems Warning! G Warning! G An intermittent warning sounds and the DTR warning lamp l in the instrument cluster is illuminated if the Distronic system calculates that the distance to the vehicle ahead and your vehicle’s current speed indicate that Distronic will not be capable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to maintain the preset following distance, which creates a danger of a collision. Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maximum deceleration of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2). This corresponds to about 20% of the maximum deceleration ability of your vehicle. Immediately brake the vehicle to increase the distance to the vehicle in front of you. The warning sound is intended as a final caution that you have not interceded with your own braking inputs to avoid a potentially dangerous situation. Do not wait for the operation of the warning signal to intercede with your own braking, as that will result in potentially dangerous emergency braking which will not always result in an impact being avoided. Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, including the area under the brake pedal. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal movement which could interfere with the braking ability of the Distronic system. Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to restore the preset distance or to maintain the speed. The brake pedal is automatically applied as this happens which results in the brake pedal moving. Distronic menu in the control system In the Distronic menu you can read the current settings for Distronic. What appears in the display depends on whether Distronic and the distance warning function are turned on or off. 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see one of the following displays. Do not place your foot under the brake pedal – your foot could become caught. Tailgating increases the risk of an accident. 235 Controls in detail Driving systems Distronic deactivated Distronic activated Cruise control lever If Distronic is deactivated you can see the standard display of Distronic in the multifunction display. If you turn Distronic on, you will see the set speed in the multifunction display for about five seconds. If Distronic is activated, you can see the following display in the multifunction display. The Distronic system is operated by means of the cruise control lever. 1 Vehicle ahead, if detected 2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead 3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle ahead 4 Your vehicle 5 Symbol for activated distance warning function 236 The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever found on the left-hand side of the steering column. 1 Distronic activated 1 Set current or higher speed 2 Set current or lower speed 3 Deactivate Distronic 4 Resume at previously set speed Controls in detail Driving systems Activating Distronic Setting the current speed Setting a higher speed You can activate Distronic if: 왘 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed. 왘 왘 Briefly lift or depress the cruise control lever. 앫 앫 you are driving between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h) the ESP is activated (컄 page 89) If Distronic has not been activated after pressing the cruise control lever you will see the message --- in the multifunction display. In the following cases you cannot activate Distronic: 앫 Up to two minutes after starting the engine 앫 When you brake 앫 If you have set the parking brake 앫 If the gear selector lever is in position P, R or N 앫 If the ESP is switched off Distronic is activated and the current speed is set. 왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. i If you do not take your foot off the accelerator completely, the following message will appear in the multifunction display: Distronic override. The distance to a slower moving vehicles in front of you will not be set. Your vehicle speed will then be determined only by the accelerator pedal position. Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 236) to increase vehicle speed in increments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h). The new speed is set. The stored speed is displayed in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds (컄 page 236), and one or two segments around the stored speed come on in the speedometer (컄 page 234). i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate Distronic. After brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), cruise control will resume the last speed set. 237 Controls in detail Driving systems Setting a lower speed 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 236) to decrease vehicle speed in increments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h). The new speed is set. The stored speed is displayed in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds (컄 page 236), and one or two segments around the stored speed come on in the speedometer (컄 page 234). Fine adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments Faster 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 236). Setting stored speed (“Resume” function) Warning! The speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to preset speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others. 왘 i When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate, the transmission will automatically downshift if the rate of deceleration is too low. 238 G Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 236). Distronic is activated and set to the last stored speed. 왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Controls in detail Driving systems Deactivating Distronic Distronic deactivates automatically when: There are several ways to deactivate the Distronic system: 앫 you set the parking brake 앫 you drive slower than 25 mph (40 km/h) 앫 the ESP is active (컄 page 89) or you deactivate the ESP 앫 you move the transmission selector lever into position N 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 236). or 왘 Step on the brake pedal. Distronic will be deactivated. The last speed set will be stored in memory. i The following message will appear in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds: Distronic off. The last stored speed is deleted when you turn off the engine. A signal will sound. The Distronic off message appears in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. Warning! G Distronic switches off and releases the brakes when the vehicle decelerates below the minimum speed of approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) by operation of the system. At that time the driver must apply the brakes in order to reduce vehicle speed further or bring it to a stop. Setting the following distance in Distronic You can set the specified following distance for Distronic by varying the time setting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using this time setting and the current speed of your vehicle, Distronic calculates and sets the required following distance to the vehicle ahead. The set distance will be shown in the multifunction display field. The thumbwheel for making the time setting is located on the lower section of the center console. Warning! G It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to select the appropriate setting given road conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving style and applicable laws and driving recommendations for safe following distance. 239 Controls in detail Driving systems Decreasing distance Decreasing the distance setting tells Distronic to maintain a shorter following distance to the vehicle ahead. 왘 Turn thumbwheel 3 towards ®. Distance warning function 1 Distance warning function on/off switch 2 Control lamp 3 Thumbwheel for setting distance When Distronic is deactivated, this function will continue to warn you when recognizing a stationary obstacle or a slower vehicle moving in the vehicle’s path and the danger of a collision exists: 앫 The distance warning lamp l in the instrument cluster comes on. 앫 An intermittent warning sounds. Increasing distance Increasing the distance setting tells Distronic to maintain a greater following distance to the vehicle ahead. 왘 Turn thumbwheel 3 towards ¯. If these warnings are issued, you must brake manually to maintain a safe distance and avoid a collision with the vehicle ahead. When pressing the brake pedal, the warning sound stops. The warning sound also stops when the distance to the vehicle 240 ahead is sufficient again without applying the brake pedal. In this case the distance warning lamp also extinguishes. Warning! G If the DTR warning lamp l in the instrument cluster comes on while driving and/or an intermittent warning sounds, immediate attention on the part of the driver is required. As required by the traffic situation, apply the brakes and navigate around a possible obstacle. However, do not drive by relying on the distance warning function, as this will result in an emergency braking application. Especially depending on road surface conditions and driver reaction, this will not always enable you to avoid a collision. i Complex driving situations are not always fully recognized by Distronic. This could result in wrong or missing distance warnings. Controls in detail Driving systems Activating Driving with Distronic 왘 This section describes a number of driving situations where special precaution is required on the part of the driver. Be prepared to brake in such situations. This will deactivate the Distronic system. Press button 1. Indicator lamp 2 on the button comes on. A loudspeaker symbol appears in the multifunction display (컄 page 236). Deactivating 왘 G Press button 1. Warning! Indicator lamp 2 on the button goes out. No loudspeaker symbol appears in the multifunction display. Distronic works to maintain the speed selected by the driver unless a moving obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in the same travel direction is detected (e.g. following another vehicle ahead of you at a distance set by Distronic). This means that: 앫 Your vehicle can pass another vehicle after you change lanes 앫 While in a sharp turn or if the vehicle in front is in a sharp turn, Distronic could lose sight of a vehicle traveling in front of it, then your vehicle could accelerate to the previously selected speed. Distronic regulates only the distance between your vehicle and those directly ahead of it, but does not register stationary objects in the road, e.g.: 앫 A stopped vehicle in a traffic jam 앫 A disabled vehicle 앫 An oncoming vehicle The driver must always be on the alert, observe all traffic and intercede as required by steering or braking the vehicle. Warning! G Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy road conditions. 241 Controls in detail Driving systems The most likely cause for a malfunctioning system is a dirty sensor (located behind the hood grille), especially at times of snow and ice or heavy rain. In such a case, Distronic will switch off, and the message Currently unavailable See Operator’s Manual appears in the multifunction display. For cleaning and care of the Distronic sensor, see “Cleaning the Distronic* system sensor cover” (컄 page 347). 242 i Turns and bends If the message Currently unavailable See Operator’s Manual disappears during driving and the last speed stored flashes for approximately five seconds, the dirt (e.g. slush) has dissolved; Distronic works again. In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect a moving vehicle in front, or it may detect one too soon. This may cause your vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly. Controls in detail Driving systems Offset driving Lane changing Narrow vehicles A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset from your direct line of travel may not be detected by Distronic. There will be insufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes. There will be insufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Because of its narrow profile, the vehicle traveling near the edge of the roadway has not yet been detected by Distronic. There will be insufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. 243 Controls in detail Driving systems Airmatic DC (Dual Control)* Airmatic automatically selects the optimum suspension tuning and ride height for your vehicle. The Airmatic consists of two components: 앫 Adaptive Damping System (ADS) 앫 Vehicle level control The ADS automatically selects the optimum damping for the respective driving conditions. At the same time the suspension is set to either sporty or comfort. Suspension tuning The suspension tuning is set according to: 앫 Your driving style 앫 Road surface conditions 앫 Your choice of suspension style, “sporty I”, “sporty II” or “comfortable”, which you select using the damping button. The following suspension styles are available: 1 Damping button 2 Indicator lamps 앫 Comfortable 왘 Start the engine. Both indicator lamps 2 are off. 왘 Press the damping button 1 until the desired suspension style is set. 앫 Sporty I One indicator lamp 2 is on. 앫 Sporty II Both indicator lamps 2 are on. i The selected suspension style is stored in memory, even after the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch. i In the sporty suspension style the vehicle is lowered up to 0.6 in (15 mm). 244 Controls in detail Driving systems Vehicle level control Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride height to 앫 reduce fuel consumption 앫 increase vehicle safety The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or lowered according to the selected level setting and to the vehicle speed: Select the “Raised” level only when required by current driving conditions. Otherwise 앫 앫 fuel consumption may increase 앫 handling may be impaired The following vehicle chassis ride heights can be selected: 앫 Normal 앫 Raised 앫 At a speed approximately above 68 mph (110 km/h) and the sporty suspension style selected (컄 page 244), ride height is reduced automatically by up to approximately 0.6 in (15 mm). With decreasing speed, the ride height is again raised to the “Normal” level. i Warning! G To help avoid personal injury, keep hands and feet away from wheel housing area, and stay away from under the vehicle when lowering the vehicle chassis. These height adjustments are so small that you may not notice any change. 245 Controls in detail Driving systems The following vehicle level settings can be selected when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running: Vehicle level when Use for stationary Ride height increase over normal Automatic lowering Indicator lamp (컄 page 246) Normal Normal operation None Max. approx. 0.6 in (15 mm) Lamp off Raised Driving with snow Approx. 0.8 in (20 mm) chains or very rough road surface conditions Max. approx. 1.4 in (35 mm) Lamp on The button is located in the lower section of the center console. 왘 Briefly press button 1 to change from “Normal” level to “Raised” level. When vehicle is at “Raised” level, pressing the switch will return the vehicle to “Normal” level. i At a speed of approximately above 75 mph (120 km/h) or if the speed amounts to between 50 mph (80 km/h) and 75 mph (120 km/h) 1 Vehicle level control button 2 Indicator lamp 246 for approximately five minutes, the setting “Raised” is canceled. The message Leveling cancelled appears in the multifunction display. If you do not drive in this speed range, the “Raised” level remains stored even if the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch. Controls in detail Loading 왔 Loading If tall persons have occupied the driver’s and front passenger seats, it may be necessary to move these seats forward slightly in order to fold the rear seat backrests forward. ! To expand the cargo compartment, you can fold down the left and right rear seat backrests. You must always release the seat cushion and fold it up before folding the seat backrests forward. The upholstery on the backrest may otherwise be damaged. The two sections can be folded down separately to enlarge the cargo compartment. Warning! i Folding the backrest forward Split rear bench seat G When expanding the cargo compartment, always fold the seat cushions fully forward. Unless you are transporting cargo, the backrests must remain properly locked in the upright position. In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle. Always use the cargo tie down rings (컄 page 251). 1 Release catch 2 Seat cushion 왘 1 Release catch 2 Seat backrest 왘 Pull release catch 1 up. The seat backrest is released and the head restraints fold back. Pull release catch 1 and use it to pull seat cushion 2 up. 왘 Fold the seat backrest 2 forward. 247 Controls in detail Loading i 왘 If the rear center seat is to be occupied while driving, it may be necessary to fold the seat belt buckle up again. Swing seat cushion 1 to the rear and press down from the rear of the cushion until it audibly engages. Warning! G Always lock backrest in its upright position when rear seat bench is occupied, or the extended cargo compartment is not in use. Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on the backrest. Returning seat backrest to original position In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle. 왘 1 Seat cushion 2 Seat backrest 왘 Swing seat backrest 2 to the rear until it engages. 248 Swing the head restraint forward by hand until it engages. To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when transporting cargo. Controls in detail Loading Adjusting seat backrest position 1 Release catch 2 Seat backrest i The seat backrests can be placed in an alternative upright position. This creates a larger cargo compartment area or provides for improved seating comfort on the folding bench seat, if required. 왘 Pull right seat release catch 1 up and fold seat backrest forward. 왘 With the seat backrest released, pull release catch 1 up again. Removing the rear seat cushions will provide you with a larger, flat cargo compartment. 왘 Pull left seat release catch 1 up and fold seat backrest forward. 왘 왘 With the seat backrest released, pull release catch 1 up again. 왘 Fold left seat backrest to the rear until it engages. 왘 Fold right seat backrest to the rear until it engages. Expanding the cargo compartment Fold the seat cushions forward (컄 page 247). The seat backrests are now in the alternative position. 1 Release lever 왘 Pull seat cushion release lever 1 and remove the seat cushion by pulling it upward. 왘 Remove the head restraints (컄 page 129). 249 Controls in detail Loading ! Loading instructions Leave the seat cushion hinge in this position. The upholstery could be damaged if you fold the hinge back. The handling characteristics of a fully loaded vehicle depend greatly on the load distribution. It is therefore recommended to load the vehicle according to the illustrations shown, with the heaviest items being placed towards the front of the vehicle. Always place items being carried against front or rear seat backrests, and fasten them as securely as possible. 왘 Fold the seat backrest forward (컄 page 247). 250 The total load weight including vehicle occupants and luggage/cargo should not exceed the load limit or vehicle capacity weight indicated on the corresponding placard which can be found on the driver’s door B-pillar. The heaviest portion of the cargo should always be kept as low as possible since it influences the handling characteristics of the vehicle. Controls in detail Loading Warning! G Cargo tie-down rings Rear seat There is a cargo tie-down ring located on each side of the footwell under the rear seat. Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible. In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when transporting cargo. Put luggage or cargo in the cargo compartment if possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs. Never drive vehicle with tailgate open. Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death. Four rings 1 are located in the cargo compartment. 왘 Carefully secure cargo by applying even load on all rings with rope of sufficient strength to hold down the cargo. Always follow loading instructions (컄 page 250). 251 Controls in detail Loading Inserting the mounting elements into the cargo rails Cargo management system* (Canada only) Your vehicle may be equipped with a cargo management system and accompanying accessories which enables you to utilize your cargo compartment in a variety of ways. You can store the cargo management system in the pouch that comes with the vehicle. i The pouch and telescoping rod can be placed in the storage box in the cargo compartment. 1 Cargo rails 1 Cargo rail 2 Mounting element You can move the mounting element to various engaging points on the cargo rail and fix it in place. These engaging points are located 2 inches apart from one another on the cargo rail and are indicated by markings. 252 Controls in detail Loading i You can turn the mounting element in the cargo rail to four positions: Inserting the cargo tie-down ring in the mounting element G The cargo tie-down rings should be subject to equal loads. Make sure to comply with the information provided in the loading instructions (컄 page 250). ‹ To lock the mounting element. N To insert or remove the cargo tie-down ring, the belt reel or the telescoping rod. L To insert or remove the mounting element. S To move the mounting element to the next engaging point. Warning! 1 Cargo tie-down ring 2 Mounting element 왘 Turn mounting element 2 in the cargo rail to N. 왘 Insert cargo tie-down ring 1 into mounting element 2. 왘 왘 Turn mounting element 2 to L. Turn mounting element 2 until it engages in the ‹ position. 왘 Insert mounting element 2 in cargo rail 1. You should be able to feel the mounting element engage in the cargo rail. 왘 Turn mounting element 2 until it engages in the ‹ position. You should be able to feel the mounting element engage in the cargo rail. 253 Controls in detail Loading Belt reel 1 Belt reel 2 Mounting element 3 Locking button 왘 Insert two mounting elements 2 into a cargo rail. 왘 Turn mounting element 2 in the cargo rail to N. 왘 Insert belt reel 1 into mounting element 2. 왘 Turn mounting element 2 in the cargo rail until it engages in the ‹ position. You should be able to feel the mounting element engage in the cargo rail. 왘 i The belt reel can be used to tighten light-weight loads against the side wall of the cargo compartment, thus securing them from slipping. 254 Press locking button 3 on the belt reel and pull cargo net out in direction of arrow. 왘 Place load between the cargo net and the side wall of the cargo compartment. 왘 Press locking button 3 on belt reel. With the other hand, slowly pull net over load until it is taut. Telescoping rod 1 Telescoping rod 2 Mounting element i The telescoping rod can be used to tighten the load against the rear seats so as to secure it from slipping. Controls in detail Loading 왘 Insert one mounting element 2 into each cargo rail. 왘 Turn mounting element 2 in cargo rail to N. 왘 Insert telescoping rod 1 into mounting element 2. 왘 Turn mounting element 2 in cargo rail until it engages in the ‹ position. You should be able to feel the mounting element engage in the cargo rail. Storage box in cargo compartment (Canada only) Warning! G When you are using the storage box in the cargo compartment, the backrests of the seats in front of it must be completely engaged to the rear, and the twin roller blind must be installed. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Do not exceed the storage box’s maximum load of 44 lbs (20 kg), as it could otherwise become detached during an accident or sharp braking maneuvers, and could injure you or other passengers. 1 Storage box 255 Controls in detail Loading Installing the storage box i 왘 Fold rear seat backrests forward (컄 page 247). 왘 Insert storage box from behind into cargo compartment with the opening pointing in the direction of travel. The storage box in the cargo compartment is covered by the rear bench seat and can hold a maximum of 44 lbs (20 kg) cargo. 왘 Press locking hooks of storage box into the space between the rear seat backrest and the cargo compartment. 왘 Fold rear seat backrest to the rear (컄 page 248). 왘 i 왘 The storage box is additionally held in place from above by the twin roller blind. Slide locking hooks of storage box forward out of the retainers. 왘 Pull storage box to the rear and remove it from cargo compartment. 왘 Fold rear seat backrest to the rear (컄 page 248). Loading the storage box 왘 Fold rear seat backrests forward (컄 page 247). 왘 Fill storage box with cargo through the opening on the front side. 256 왘 Fold rear seat backrest to the rear (컄 page 248). Removing the storage box Fold rear seat backrests forward (컄 page 247). Twin roller blind The twin roller blind contains a cargo net and a luggage cargo compartment. It is located on the seat backrest of the rear bench seat. Cargo net Warning! G The cargo net cannot hold back heavy loads. The transported load should therefore always be tied down. Objects which are insufficiently secured could otherwise injure you if they are thrown around in the event of an accident, during hard braking or steering maneuvers. Controls in detail Loading Cargo compartment cover The cargo compartment cover unlocks automatically while the tailgate is opening/closing and is automatically raised/ lowered. ! 1 Cargo net 2 Mountings for cargo net 왘 Pull cargo net 1 up and hook it onto mountings 2. i You can use the cargo net even when the rear seat backrest is folded forward. The cargo net should then be hooked onto the front mountings. When loading the vehicle, make sure not to load the cargo compartment over the lower edge of the side windows. The twin roller blind could otherwise be damaged when the tailgate is being closed. It is therefore unnecessary to roll up the cargo compartment cover before loading and unloading. 1 Cargo compartment cover Rolling up the cargo compartment cover 왘 Unhook cargo compartment cover from its anchorages on the left and right sides. 왘 Slowly guide cargo compartment cover back until it stops. 257 Controls in detail Loading Removing the twin roller blind 왘 Roll up cargo net and cargo compartment cover. 왘 Fold both rear seat cushions forward (컄 page 247). 왘 Push twin roller blind to the left out of its anchorage on the rear seat backrest and remove it. 258 Controls in detail Useful features 왔 Useful features Storage compartments Warning! Parcel net in front passenger footwell Glove box A small convenience parcel net is located in the front passenger footwell. It is for small and light items, such as road maps, mail, etc. 1 Glove box lid release 2 Compartment for mobile phone/glasses G To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when stowing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or cargo in the cargo compartment if possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs. Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy objects. Keep compartment lids closed. This will help to prevent stored objects from being thrown around and injuring vehicle occupants during an accident. Opening the glove box Warning! G The parcel net is intended for storing light-weight items only. Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or fragile objects may not be transported in the parcel net. 왘 Push lid release 1. The glove box lid opens downward. Closing the glove box 왘 Push lid up to close. The parcel net cannot protect transported goods in the event of an accident. 259 Controls in detail Useful features i 왘 Prior to closing the glove box, close the compartment for glasses first. Press button 1 to open. The control panel swings out upward and the storage compartment extends out. Storage compartment in the center console (no CD changer* installed) Storage space under center armrest (Vehicles with cup holder in the center console) i Never place any medications in the storage compartment. If there is a power failure, the storage compartment cannot be opened. 왘 Press button 1 to close. 1 Storage compartment 2 Storage tray 1 Opening/closing button Opening storage tray 왘 Pull handle 2. Opening storage compartment 왘 260 Pull handle 1. Controls in detail Useful features Storage compartment in the rear center console 왘 Briefly press the top of the compartment. It extends automatically. Ruffled storage bags Storage compartment in the rear armrest Ruffled storage bags are located on the back of the front seats. Warning! 왘 Press the handle upward and fold the armrest up. G The ruffled storage bag is intended for storing light-weight items only. Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or fragile objects may not be transported in the ruffled storage bag. The ruffled storage bag cannot protect transported goods in the event of an accident. 261 Controls in detail Useful features Cup holders Depending on production date, your vehicle is equipped with cup holders in either the center console (컄 page 262) or in the center armrest (컄 page 263). Warning! G In order to help prevent spilling liquids on vehicle occupants, only use containers that fit into the cup holder. Use lids on open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the contents, especially hot liquids, could spill during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. When not in use, keep the cup holder closed. An open cup holder may cause injury to you or others when contacted during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup holder may come loose during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects thrown around in the vehicle interior may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Cup holder in the center console 왘 The cup holder extends automatically. i 왘 Briefly press the marking in the back of the cover. The cover opens. 262 Briefly press marking on the cup holder. The cup holder can be removed for cleaning. Clean the cup holder only with clear, lukewarm water. Make sure to insert the cup holder in the guides when reinstalling it. Controls in detail Useful features Storage compartment with cup holder in the center armrest The storage compartment in the center armrest contains a removable dual cup holder. Opening storage compartment Cup holder in the center armrest 1 Left cup holder 2 Right cup holder 3 Dual cup holder 4 Telephone* compartment Removing cup holder 왘 Closing storage compartment Take out the cup holder. Using two fingers in the horizontal slot at the upper rear side of the cup holder, lift cup holder upwards to remove. 왘 1 Cover 왘 Slide cover 1 in direction of arrow 2. Slide cover 1 back. i The cup holder can be removed to increase storage space and for cleaning. Clean the cup holder only with clear, lukewarm water. Make sure to insert the cup holder in the guides when reinstalling it (컄 page 264). 263 Controls in detail Useful features Removing cup holder Reinstalling cup holder Rear cup holder 1 Cup holder 2 Locking pins 3 Locking pins 왘 왘 Move both locking pins 2 in direction of arrow. 왘 Take cup holder out upward. 264 왘 Insert cup holder. 왘 Move both locking pins 3 in direction of arrow. Briefly press the front of the armrest. The cup holder extends automatically. Controls in detail Useful features Ashtrays Center console ashtray Removing ashtray insert Warning! Reinstalling ashtray insert G Remove front ashtray only with vehicle standing still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle from movement. Move gear selector lever to position N. With gear selector lever in position N, turn off the engine. 왘 Briefly press the marking on the bottom of cover 1. Install insert by pushing it back into frame until it engages again. Rear seat ashtray Secure vehicle from movement by setting the parking brake. Move the gear selector lever to position N. Now you have more room to take out the insert. Opening ashtray 왘 왘 왘 The cover opens automatically. 왘 Push sliding button 2 to the right and hold. Grip and remove insert from ashtray frame. Opening rear seat ashtray 왘 Briefly press the top of the ashtray. The cover opens automatically. 265 Controls in detail Useful features Cigarette lighter Warning! The cigarette lighter is located in the center console compartment in front of the center armrest (컄 page 28). G Never touch the heating element or sides of the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the knob only. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 1 Cigarette lighter 왘 왘 12-V socket* The socket is located in the rear of the center console storage compartment. The socket can be used for accessories up to a maximum of 180 W. Switch on the ignition. i i Push in cigarette lighter 1. The lighter socket can be used to accommodate electrical accessories up to a maximum 85 W. An additional socket is located on the left side in the cargo compartment. The lighter will pop out automatically when hot. 266 Controls in detail Useful features Heated steering wheel* The steering wheel heating warms up the leather area of the steering wheel. Switching on i 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34). 왘 Turn switch at the tip of stalk in the direction of arrow 3. The steering wheel heating switches off automatically while indicator lamp 1 remains on when The stalk with the heated steering wheel switch is on the lower left-hand side of the steering wheel. The steering wheel is heated. Indicator lamp 1 comes on. 앫 the temperature of the vehicle interior is above 86°F (30°C) 앫 the temperature of the steering wheel is above 82°F (28°C) Switching off 왘 1 Indicator lamp 2 Switching off 3 Switching on Turn switch at the tip of stalk in the direction of arrow 2. Indicator lamp 1 flashes or switches off The heated steering wheel is turned off. Indicator lamp 1 goes out. 앫 in case of power surge or undervoltage 앫 in case of a steering wheel heating malfunction For information on steering wheel, see “Multifunction steering wheel” (컄 page 154). 267 Controls in detail Useful features Floormats Warning! G Whenever you are using floormats, make sure there is enough clearance and that the floormats are securely fastened. Floormats should always be securely fastened using eyelets 2 and retainer pins 1. 1 Retainer pin 2 Eyelet i To install or remove the floormat more easily, move the driver’s seat or front passenger seat as far to the rear as possible (컄 page 39). 268 Before driving off, check that the floormats are securely in place and adjust them if necessary. A loose floormat could slip and hinder proper functioning of the pedals. Removing 왘 Pull floormat off of retainer pins 1. 왘 Remove the floormat. Installing 왘 Lay down the floormat. 왘 Press the floormat eyelets 2 onto retainer pins 1. Telephone* Warning! G Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury. Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit, should only be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle. The external antenna must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on the installation of an approved external antenna. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna. Controls in detail Useful features Warning! G Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s attention to the road must always be his /her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone1 while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone when road, weather and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. You can take and place telephone calls using the s and t buttons on the steering wheel. To carry out other telephone functions, use the control system (컄 page 179). See separate operating manual for instructions on how to use the telephone. Tele Aid* ! The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call using the ¡ button. Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a system that is not activated. If you have any questions regarding activation, please call the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System) if road, weather and traffic conditions permit. 1 Observe all legal requirements. 269 Controls in detail Useful features The Tele Aid system (Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand) The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response: 앫 automatic and manual emergency 앫 Roadside Assistance and 앫 information The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available. The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can be adjusted when using the volume control on the multifunction steering wheel. To raise, press button æ and to lower, press button çor use the volume knob on your COMAND headunit. 270 왘 To activate, press the SOS button, the Roadside Assistance button • or the Information button ¡, depending on the type of response required. i The SOS button is located above the interior rear view mirror. The Roadside Assistance button • and the Information button ¡ are located below the center armrest cover. Shortly after the completion of your acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID and password via first call mail. By visiting www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid” (USA only), you will have access to account information, remote door unlock and more. i The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular network for communication and the GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of these signals are unavailable, the Tele Aid system may not function and if this occurs, assistance must be summoned by other means. System self-check Initially, after switching on ignition, malfunctions are detected and indicated (the indicator lamps in the SOS button, the Roadside Assistance button • and the Information button ¡ stay on longer than ten seconds or do not come on). The message TELE AID malfunction – Drive to workshop appears for approximately ten seconds in the multifunction display. Controls in detail Useful features Warning! G If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in the Roadside Assistance button and/or in the Information button remain illuminated constantly in red and/or the message TELE AID malfunction – Drive to workshop is displayed in the multifunction display after the system self-check, a malfunction in the system has been detected. If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expected. Have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Emergency calls An emergency call is initiated automatically following an accident in which the emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) or air bags deploy. An emergency call can also be initiated manually by opening the cover next to the interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then briefly pressing the button located under the cover. See (컄 page 272) for instructions on initiating an emergency call manually. A voice connection between the Response Center and the occupants of the vehicle will be established automatically soon after the emergency call has been initiated. The Response Center will attempt to determine more precisely the nature of the accident provided they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle. Once the emergency call is in progress, the indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin to flash. The message Connecting call appears in the multifunction display. When the connection is established, the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display. All information relevant to the emergency, such as the location of the vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite location system), vehicle model, identification number and color are generated. 271 Controls in detail Useful features The Tele Aid system is available if: 앫 앫 it has been activated and is operational. Activation requires a subscription for monitoring services, connection and cellular air time the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals are available and pass the information on to the Response Center i Location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite network and pass the information on to the Response Center. Warning! G If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message Call failed appears in the multifunction display for approximately ten seconds. Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means. Initiating an emergency call manually 1 Cover 2 SOS button 왘 Briefly press on cover 1. The cover will open. 왘 Press SOS button 2 briefly. The indicator lamp in SOS button 2 will flash until the emergency call is concluded. 272 왘 Wait for a voice connection to the Response Center. 왘 Close cover after the emergency call is concluded. Controls in detail Useful features Warning! G If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location), please do not wait for voice contact after you have pressed the emergency button. Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Response Center will automatically contact local emergency officials with the vehicle’s approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot make voice contact with the vehicle occupants. Roadside Assistance button • Located below the center armrest cover is the Roadside Assistance button •. 왘 Press and hold the button (for longer than two seconds). A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will be initiated. The button will flash while the call is in progress. The message Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted. When the connection is established, the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals). A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be established. 왘 Describe the nature of the need for assistance. The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such as labor and/or towing, charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for more information. These programs are only available in the USA: 앫 Sign and Drive services: Services such as a jump start, a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with the vehicle spare tire are obtainable. 273 Controls in detail Useful features i The indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance button • remains illuminated in red for approximately ten seconds during the system self-check after switching on ignition (together with the SOS button and the Information button ¡). See system self-check (컄 page 270) when the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately ten seconds. If the indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance button • is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message Call failed appears in the multifunction display. 274 Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the t button on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the COMAND headunit. Information button ¡ The Information button ¡ is located below the center armrest cover. 왘 Press and hold button (for longer than two seconds). A call to the Customer Assistance Center will be initiated. The button will flash while the call is in progress. The message Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted. When the connection is established, the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals). A voice connection between the Customer Assistance Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle will be established. When a voice connection is established. Information regarding the operation of your vehicle, the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products and services is available to you. For more details concerning the Tele Aid system, please visit www.mbusa.com and use your ID and password (sent to you separately) to learn more (USA only). i The indicator lamp on the Information button ¡ remains illuminated in red for approximately ten seconds during the system self-check after switching on ignition (together with the SOS button and the Roadside Assistance button •). Controls in detail Useful features See system self-check (컄 page 270) when the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately ten seconds. If the indicator lamp on the Information button ¡ is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message Call failed appears in the multifunction display. Information calls can be terminated using the t button on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the COMAND headunit. ! Upgrade scenario If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system has detected a fault or the service is not currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center and have the system checked or contact the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as possible. An emergency call is possible even if other services are active. i The indicator lamp in the respective button flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only be terminated by a Response Center or Customer Assistance Center representative except Roadside Assistance and Information calls, which can also be terminated by pressing button t on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the COMAND headunit. 275 Controls in detail Useful features ! i Remote door unlock If the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system does not reset, contact the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada. When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the COMAND system audio is muted and the selected mode (radio or CD) pauses. The optional cellular phone (if installed) switches off. If you must use this phone, the vehicle must be parked. Disconnect the coiled cord and place the call. The COMAND navigation* system (if engaged) will continue to run. The display in the instrument cluster is available for use, and spoken commands are only available by pressing the RPT button on the COMAND unit. A pop-up window will appear in the COMAND display to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in progress. In case you have locked your vehicle unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle), and the reserve SmartKey is not handy: 왘 Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you completed the subscriber agreement. 왘 Then return to your vehicle and pull the tailgate recessed handle for a minimum of 20 seconds until the SOS button is flashing. The message Call connected appears in the multifunction display. As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly after the completion of your acquaintance call. The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with the remote door unlocking feature. 276 Controls in detail Useful features i Stolen Vehicle Recovery services The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is available. In the event your vehicle was stolen: The SOS button will flash and the message Call connected will appear in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of the door unlock command. Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center specialist will attempt to establish voice contact with the vehicle occupants. If the tailgate recessed handle was pulled for more than 20 seconds before door unlock authorization was received by the Response Center, you must wait 15 minutes before pulling the tailgate recessed handle again. 왘 Report the incident to the police. The police will issue a numbered incident report. 왘 Pass this number on to the Mercedes-Benz Response Center along with your password issued to you when you subscribed to the service. Garage door opener The built-in remote control is capable of operating up to three separately controlled devices, for example garage door openers, gate openers, or other devices compatible with HomeLink® or some other systems. You can program the signal transmitter buttons. The Response Center will then attempt to covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is located, the Response Center will contact the local law enforcement and you. The vehicle’s location will only be provided to law enforcement. i When the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, call is initiated automatically to the Response Center. See anti-theft alarm system (컄 page 98) and tow-away alarm (컄 page 99). 123 Signal transmitter button 4 Indicator lamp 5 Hand-held transmitter button 6 Hand-held remote control transmitter (not part of the vehicle equipment) 277 Controls in detail Useful features Warning! G Before programming the integrated remote control to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. When programming a garage door opener, the door moves up or down. When programming a gate operator, the gate opens or closes. Do not use the integrated remote control with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object - signaling the door to stop and reverse - does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards. 278 i i Certain types of garage door openers are incompatible with the integrated opener. If you should experience difficulties with programming the transmitter, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA only) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Controls in detail Useful features i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Programming or reprogramming the integrated remote control Step 3: 왘 Step 1: 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34). Step 2: 왘 If you have previously programmed an integrated signal transmitter button and wish to retain its programming, proceed to step 3. Otherwise, press and hold the two outer signal transmitter buttons 1 and 3 and release them only when the indicator lamp 4 begins to flash after approximately 20 seconds (do not hold the button for longer than 30 seconds). This procedure erases any previous settings for all three channels and initializes the memory. If you later wish to program a second and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two signal transmitter buttons, do not repeat this step and begin directly with step 3. Hold the end of the hand-held remote control transmitter 6 of the device you wish to train approximately 2 to 5 in (5 to12 cm) away from the surface of the integrated remote control located on the interior rear view mirror, keeping the indicator lamp 4 in view. Step 4: 왘 Using both hands, simultaneously press the hand-held transmitter button 5 and the desired integrated signal transmitter button (1, 2 or 3). Do not release the buttons until completing step 5. The indicator lamp 4 on the integrated remote control will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. 컄컄 279 Controls in detail Useful features 컄컄 i i Rolling code programming The indicator lamp 4 flashes the first time the signal transmitter button is programmed. If this button has already been programmed, the indicator lamp will only start flashing after 20 seconds. If the indicator lamp 4 blinks rapidly for about two seconds and then turns to a constant light, continue with programming steps 8 through 12 as your garage door opener may be equipped with the “rolling code” feature. To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code devices) with the rolling code feature, follow these instructions after completing the “Programming” portion (steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second person may make the following training procedures quicker and easier.) Step 5: Step 7: 왘 왘 When the indicator lamp 4 flashes rapidly, release both buttons. Step 6: 왘 Press and hold the just-trained integrated signal transmitter button and observe the indicator lamp 4. If the indicator lamp 4 stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when the integrated signal transmitter button is pressed and released. 280 To program the remaining two buttons, repeat the steps above starting with step 3. Step 8: 왘 Locate “training” button on the garage door opener motor head unit. Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand. Depending on manufacturer, the “training” button may also be referred to as “learn”or “smart” button. If there is difficulty locating the transmitting button, refer to the garage door opener operator’s manual. Controls in detail Useful features Step 9: Step 12: 왘 왘 Press “training” button on the garage door opener motor head unit. The “training light” is activated. You have 30 seconds to initiate the following step. Step 10: 왘 Firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the programmed integrated signal transmitter button (1, 2 or 3). Step 11: 왘 Press, hold for two seconds and release same button a second time to complete the training process. Some garage door openers (or other rolling code equipped devices) may require you to perform this procedure a third time to complete the training. Confirm the garage door operation by pressing the programmed integrated signal transmitter button (1, 2 or 3). Step 13: 왘 To program the remaining two buttons, repeat the steps above starting with step 3. If you live in Canada or if you are having difficulties programming a gate operator (regardless of where you live) by using the programming procedures, replace step 4 with the following: Step 4: 왘 Continue to press and hold the integrated signal transmitter button (1, 2 or 3) while you press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held remote control transmitter 6 every two seconds until the frequency signal has been learned. Upon successful training, the indicator lamp 4 will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds. 왘 Proceed with programming step 5 and step 6 to complete. Gate operator/Canadian programming Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for the integrated signal transmitter to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to “time-out” in the same manner. 281 Controls in detail Useful features Operation of integrated remote control i 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34). 왘 Select and press the appropriate integrated signal transmitter button (1, 2 or 3) to activate the remote controlled device. If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of all three channels. The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as long as the button is pressed – up to 20 seconds. Erasing the integrated remote control memory 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34). 왘 Simultaneously hold down the signal transmitter buttons 1 and 3, for approximately 20 seconds, until the indicator lamp 4 blinks rapidly. Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds. The codes of all three channels are erased. 282 Reprogramming a single integrated signal transmitter button To program a device using a signal transmitter button previously trained, follow these steps: 왘 Press and hold the desired signal transmitter button (1, 2 or 3). Do not release the button. 왘 The indicator lamp will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the integrated signal transmitter button, proceed with programming starting with step 3. Operation The first 1000 miles (1500 km) Driving instructions At the gas station Engine compartment Tires and wheels Winter driving Maintenance Vehicle care 283 Operation The first 1000 miles (1500 km) In the “Operation” section you will find detailed information on operating, maintaining and caring for your vehicle. 284 The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its performance later on. 앫 Drive your vehicle during the first 1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but moderate vehicle and engine speeds. 앫 During this period, avoid heavy loads (full throttle driving) and excessive engine speeds (no more than 2/3 of maximum rpm in each gear). 앫 Avoid accelerating by kick-down. 앫 Do not attempt to slow the vehicle down by shifting to a lower gear using the selector lever. 앫 Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when driving at moderate speeds (for hill driving). 앫 Select C as the preferred shift program (컄 page 188) for the first 1000 miles (1500 km). After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds to the permissible maximum. ! Additional instructions for AMG vehicles: 앫 During the first 1000 miles (1500 km), do not exceed a speed of 85 mph (140 km/h). 앫 During this period, avoid engine speeds above 4500 rpm in each gear. All of the above, as may apply to your vehicle type, also apply when driving the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after the engine or the rear differential has been replaced. i Always obey applicable speed limits. Operation Driving instructions 왔 Driving instructions Drive sensibly – save fuel Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving habits and operating conditions. To save fuel you should: 앫 Keep tires at the recommended inflation pressures. 앫 Remove unnecessary loads. 앫 Remove roof rack when not in use. 앫 Allow engine to warm up under low load use. 앫 Avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration. 앫 Have all maintenance work performed at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet and as required by the Maintenance System. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Drinking and driving Warning! Pedals G Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgement. Warning! G Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal movement. The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs. Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on short trips and in hilly area. 285 Operation Driving instructions Power assistance Warning! G The brake system requires electrical energy for operation. A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. In such a case, the red brake warning lamp (컄 page 354) and warning messages in the instrument cluster (컄 page 362) come on while driving. To brake, the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes may only be applied to the front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! 286 If there is a malfunction in the SBC brake system, we recommend that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. A tow bar must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the recommended towing methods and the vehicle requires towing with all four wheels on the ground. Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is only permissible for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, refer to “Towing the vehicle” (컄 page 430). For more information, see “SBC brake system” (컄 page 92). With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Brakes Warning! G After driving in heavy rain for some time without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components, the first braking action may be somewhat reduced and increased pedal pressure may be necessary to obtain expected braking effect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in front. Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause excessive and premature wear of the brake pads. It can also result in the brakes overheating, thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident. Operation Driving instructions To help prevent brake disk corrosion after driving on wet road surfaces (particularly salted roads), it is advisable to brake the vehicle with considerable force prior to parking. The heat generated serves to dry the brakes. If your brake system is normally only subjected to moderate loads, you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the brakes by applying above-normal braking pressure at higher speeds. This will also enhance the grip of the brake pads. If the parking brake is released and the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster stays on, there is a malfunction in the SBC brake system (컄 page 92) or the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low. G Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir. If other than recommended brake pads are installed, or other than recommended brake fluid is used, the braking properties of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe braking is substantially impaired. This could result in an accident. Have the brake system inspected by qualified technicians immediately. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Be certain to read and observe the warning notices on brake pad replacement (컄 page 375). Be very careful not to endanger other road users when you apply the brakes. All checks and service work on the brake system should be carried out by qualified technicians only. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Refer to the description of the Brake Assist System (BAS) (컄 page 89). Only install brake pads and brake fluid recommended by Mercedes-Benz. ! Warning! ! When driving down long and steep grades, relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use the engine’s braking power. This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear. After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on for some time, rather than immediately parking, so that the air stream will cool down the brakes faster. 287 Operation Driving instructions Driving off Parking Apply the brakes to test them briefly after driving off. Perform this procedure only when the road is clear of other traffic. ! Set the parking brake whenever parking or leaving the vehicle. In addition, move gear selector lever to position P. When parking on hills, always set the parking brake and turn front wheel against road curb. Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached. When starting off on a slippery surface, do not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP switched off. Doing so may cause serious damage to the drive train which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. ! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear. 288 Warning! G Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire. To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always: 앫 Keep right foot on brake pedal. 앫 Firmly depress parking brake pedal. 앫 Move the selector lever to position P. 앫 Slowly release brake pedal. 앫 When parked on an incline, turn front wheel towards the road curb. 앫 Turn the SmartKey to starter switch position 0 and remove, or press KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*). 앫 Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock vehicle when leaving. Tires Warning! G If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road. Operation Driving instructions Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or tire dealer for repairs. Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced. The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread. Warning! G Although the applicable federal motor vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level. As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced. Depending upon the weather and/or road surface (conditions), the tire traction varies widely. Specified tire inflation pressures must be maintained. This applies particularly if the tires are subjected to high loads (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temperatures). Warning! G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. Hydroplaning Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain. 289 Operation Driving instructions Tire traction The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on a dry road. You should pay particular attention to the condition of the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to the freezing point. Warning! G If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will be substantially reduced. Under such weather conditions, drive, steer and brake with extreme caution. 290 Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated radial-ply tires with a minimum tread depth of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the winter season to make sure normal balanced handling characteristics. On packed snow, they can reduce your stopping distance compared to summer tires. Stopping distance, however, is still considerably greater than when the road is not covered with snow or ice. Exercise appropriate caution. ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Tire speed rating Regardless of the tire speed rating, local speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions. Warning! G Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires. Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury and possible death, for you and for others. Operation Driving instructions E 320, E 320 4MATIC, E 5001, E 500 4MATIC, E 320 (Appearance Package*) E 320 4MATIC (Appearance Package*) E 500 (Appearance Package*) E 500 4MATIC (Appearance Package*) Your vehicle is factory equipped with “H”-rated tires, which have a speed rating of 130 mph (210 km/h). E 320 (Sport Package*) E 5001 (Sport Package*) Your vehicle is factory equipped with “Z”-rated tires, which have a speed rating of above 149 mph (240 km/h). An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). i E 320 4MATIC (Sport Package*), E 500 4MATIC (Sport Package*) Your vehicle is factory equipped with “Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating of 186 mph (300 km/h). An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). For information on speed ratings for winter tires, see “Winter driving” (컄 page 337). For additional general information on tire speed markings on tire sidewall, see “Tire speed rating” (컄 page 335). Winter driving instructions The most important rule for slippery or icy roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration, braking and steering maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control system under such conditions. When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, move gear selector lever to position N. Try to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action. i For more information on driving with snow chains, see “Snow chains” (컄 page 338). Warning! G On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of control loss. 1 Not available in the U.S. 291 Operation Driving instructions Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal force may become necessary to produce the normal braking effect. Depressing the brake pedal periodically when traveling at length on salt-strewn roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking efficiency back to normal. If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible after driving is resumed. Warning! Warning! If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle with the engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death. To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind. G Warning! Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking maneuvers. G G The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. For more information, see “Winter driving” (컄 page 337). 292 Standing water ! Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown depth. Before driving through water, determine its depth. Never accelerate before driving into water. The bow wave could force water into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus damaging them. If you must drive through standing water, drive slowly to prevent water from entering the passenger compartment or the engine compartment. Water in these areas could cause damage to electrical components or wiring of the engine or transmission, or could result in water being ingested by the engine through the air intake causing severe internal engine damage. Any such damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Operation Driving instructions Control and operation of radio transmitter Passenger compartment Warning! G Warning! G COMAND, radio and telephone* Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible. Warning! In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle. G Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely. Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System), radio or telephone1 if road, weather and traffic conditions permit. The cargo compartment is the preferred place to carry objects. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. Driving abroad Abroad, there is an extensive Mercedes-Benz service network at your disposal. If you plan to drive into areas which are not listed in the index of your Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you should request pertinent information from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Telephones and two-way radios 1 Observe all legal requirements Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury. Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna. 293 Operation Driving instructions Catalytic converter Warning! Your vehicle is equipped with monolithic-type catalytic converters, an important element in conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instructions as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet. ! To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, use only premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle. Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should be repaired promptly. Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic converter, causing it to overheat and potentially start a fire. 294 G As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire. Emission control Certain systems of the engine serve to keep the toxic components of the exhaust gases within permissible limits required by law. These systems, of course, will function properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications. Any adjustments on the engine should, therefore, be carried out only by qualified Mercedes-Benz Center authorized technicians. Engine adjustments should not be altered in any way. Moreover, the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements. For details refer to the Maintenance Booklet. Operation Driving instructions Warning! G Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death. Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open at all times. Coolant temperature Warning! During severe operating conditions and stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to approximately 248°F (120°C). The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature over 248°F (120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. G 앫 Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids, which may have leaked into the engine compartment, to catch fire. You could be seriously burned. 앫 Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. 295 Operation At the gas station 왘 Refueling Warning! G Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish all smoking materials. Never allow sparks, flame or smoking materials near gasoline! The fuel filler flap springs open. 왘 The fuel filler flap is located on the right-hand side of the vehicle towards the rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the remote control automatically locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap. 왘 296 Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at the point indicated by the arrow. 왘 Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold on to it until possible pressure is released. 왘 Take off the cap and set it in the recess on the fuel filler flap. To prevent fuel vapors from escaping into open air, fully insert filler nozzle unit. Turn the engine off 앫 by turning the SmartKey to position 0. 앫 by pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button. Open the driver’s door (with the driver’s door open, starter switch is now in position 0, same as SmartKey removed from starter switch). Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. 왘 Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit cuts out – do not top up or overfill. Warning! G Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pressure in the system which could cause a gas discharge. This could cause the gas to spray back out when removing the fuel pump nozzle, which could cause personal injury. Operation At the gas station 왘 Replace the fuel cap by turning it to the right. You will hear when the fuel cap is tightened. 왘 Close the fuel filler flap. i Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can cause the yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp to flash and the ? malfunction indicator lamp (USA only) or the ± malfunction indicator lamp (Canada only) to illuminate. For more information, see “Practical hints” (컄 page 357). i Check regularly and before a long trip Only use premium unleaded gasoline with a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON). Information on gasoline quality can normally be found on the fuel pump. More information on gasoline can be found in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet. 1 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system* 2 Brake fluid 3 Coolant level i Opening the hood, see (컄 page 299). 297 Operation At the gas station Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system* For information on refilling the reservoir, see “Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*” (컄 page 306). Coolant Vehicle lighting For normal replenishing, use water (potable water quality). For more information on coolant, see “Coolant level” (컄 page 303) and see “Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.” (컄 page 450). Check function and cleanliness. For more information on replacing light bulbs, see “Replacing bulbs” (컄 page 410). Brake fluid ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks immediately. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the problem. For more information, see “Practical hints” (컄 page 354). For information on brake fluid, see “Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.” (컄 page 453). 298 Engine oil level For more information on engine oil level, see (컄 page 300). For more information, see “Exterior lamp switch” (컄 page 141). Tire inflation pressure For more information on tire inflation pressure, see “Checking tire inflation pressure” (컄 page 318). Operation Engine compartment 왔 Engine compartment 왘 Hood Warning! G Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could be forced open by passing air flow. Pull lever 1 downwards. 왘 The hood is unlocked and handle 2 will extend out of the radiator grille. Pull handle 2 to its stop out of radiator grille. 왘 Pull up on the hood (do not pull up on the handle) and then release it. ! To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood, never open the hood if the wiper arms are folded forward away from the windshield. Opening The hood will be automatically held open at shoulder height by gas-filled struts. Warning! G To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running. Make sure the hood is properly closed before driving. When closing the hood, use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers. 1 Hood release 2 Handle for opening the hood The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the engine has been turned off. Stay clear of fan blades. 299 Operation Engine compartment Warning! G If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is overheated, do not open the hood. Move away from vehicle and do not open the hood until the engine has cooled. If necessary, call the fire department. Warning! G The engine is equipped with a transistorized ignition system. Because of the high voltage it is dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic socket) of the ignition system 앫 with the engine running 앫 while starting the engine 앫 if ignition is “on” and the engine is turned manually 300 Closing Warning! Engine oil G Be careful that you do not close the hood on anyone. 왘 왘 The amount of oil your engine needs will depend on a number of factors, including driving style. Higher oil consumption can occur when 앫 the vehicle is new Let the hood drop from a height of approximately 1 ft (30 cm). 앫 the vehicle is driven frequently at higher engine speeds The hood will lock audibly. Engine oil consumption checks should only be made after the vehicle break-in period. Check to make sure the hood is fully closed. If you can raise the hood at a point above the headlamps, then it is not properly closed. Open it again and let it drop with somewhat greater force. i Do not use any special lubricant additives, as these may damage the drive assemblies. Using special additives not approved by Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. More information on this subject is available at any Mercedes-Benz Center. Operation Engine compartment Checking engine oil level with the control system When checking the oil level 앫 the vehicle must be parked on level ground 앫 with the engine at operating temperature, the vehicle must have been stationary for at least five minutes with the engine turned off 앫 with the engine not at operating temperature yet, the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 30 minutes with the engine turned off Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34). Press button k or j, on the steering wheel until the following message is seen in the multifunction display: If necessary, add engine oil. For adding engine oil, see (컄 page 302). One of the following messages will subsequently appear in the indicator: 앫 Engine oil level ok 앫 Add 1.0 Qt. to reach max. oil level (Canada: 1.0 Liter) 앫 The standard display (컄 page 153) should appear in the multifunction display. 왘 If you want to interrupt the checking procedure, press the k or j button on the multifunction steering wheel. 왘 To check the engine oil level via the multifunction display, do the following: 왘 i Engine oil level - Measuring now! Measurement correct only if veh. level Add 1.5 Qts. to reach max. oil level (Canada: 1.5 Liters) 앫 Add 2.0 Qts. to reach max. oil level More information on engine oil can be found in the “Technical data” section (컄 page 450) and (컄 page 453). Other display messages If the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* is not in position 2, the following message will appear: Switch on ignition to check engine oil level 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34). (Canada: 2.0 Liters) 301 Operation Engine compartment If you see the message: Observe waiting period 왘 If engine is at operating temperature, wait five minutes before repeating check procedure. 왘 If engine is not at operating temperature, wait 30 minutes before repeating check procedure. If you see the message: Engine oil level Not when engine on 왘 Turn off the engine. 왘 If engine is at operating temperature, wait five minutes before checking oil. 왘 If engine is not at operating temperature, wait 30 minutes before checking oil. 302 If there is excess engine oil with the engine at normal operating temperature, the following message will appear: Engine oil level Reduce oil level 왘 Have excess oil siphoned or drained off. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off. It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. More information on messages in the display concerning engine oil can be found in the “Practical hints” section (컄 page 362). Adding engine oil ! Only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles). For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet in your vehicle literature portfolio, or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles) will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Operation Engine compartment ! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off. It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. 왘 1 Filler cap 왘 Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck. 왘 Add engine oil as required. Be careful not to overfill with oil. Be careful not to spill any oil when adding. Avoid environmental damage caused by oil entering the ground or water. Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck. More information on engine oil can be found in the “Technical data” section (컄 page 450) and (컄 page 453). Transmission fluid level The transmission fluid level does not need to be checked. If you notice transmission fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check the transmission. Coolant level The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check the coolant level, the vehicle must be parked on level ground and the engine must be cool. The coolant expansion tank is located on the driver’s side of the engine compartment. 303 Operation Engine compartment Warning! 왘 G The coolant level is correct if the level: In order to avoid any possibly serious burns: 앫 앫 Use extreme caution when opening the hood if there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking from the cooling system, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated. Do not remove pressure cap on coolant reservoir if coolant temperature is above 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to cool down before removing cap. The coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and is under pressure. 앫 Using a rag, slowly open the cap approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure. 앫 Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. 304 Continue turning the cap to the left and remove it. 앫 for cold coolant: reaches the black top part of the reservoir 앫 for warm coolant: is approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher 왘 Add coolant as required. 1 Coolant expansion tank 왘 Replace and tighten cap. 왘 More information on coolant can be found in the “Technical data” section (컄 page 455). Using a rag, turn the cap slowly approximately one half turn to the left to release any excess pressure. Operation Engine compartment Battery Your vehicle is equipped with two batteries: 앫 Auxiliary battery (located in the engine compartment). 앫 Main battery (starter and electrical consumers; located in the cargo compartment). These batteries should always be sufficiently charged in order to achieve their rated service life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery maintenance intervals. If you use your vehicle mostly for short-distance trips, you will need to have the battery charge checked more frequently. When replacing batteries, always use batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz. If you do not intend to operate your vehicle for an extended period of time, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about steps you need to observe. all safety instructions and precautions when handling G Observe automotive batteries. A Risk of explosion. flames or sparks away from battery. Do not smoke. D Keep acid is caustic. Do not allow it to come into contact B Battery with skin, eyes or clothing. E C F Wear eye protection. Keep children away. Follow the instructions in this Operator's Manual. Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with clean water and seek medical help if necessary. 305 Operation Engine compartment Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system* The windshield washer reservoir is located in the engine compartment. During all seasons, add MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” to water. Premix the windshield washer fluid in a suitable container. 왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate and water (or commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures). Always use washer solvent/antifreeze where temperatures may fall below freezing point. Failure to do so could result in damage to the washer system/reservoir. 1 Washer fluid reservoir Fluid for the windshield washer system and the headlamp cleaning system is supplied from the windshield washer reservoir. It has a capacity of: 앫 Vehicles without headlamp cleaning system: approximately 4.8 US qt (4.5 l). 앫 Vehicles with headlamp cleaning system: approximately 7.4 US qt (7 l). 306 ! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps. Warning! G Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/ antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be seriously burned. For more information, see “Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio” (컄 page 458). Operation Tires and wheels 왔 Tires and wheels See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and winter operation. They can also offer advice concerning tire service and purchase. Warning! G Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the original part. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are mounted: 앫 The wheel brakes or suspension components can be damaged 앫 The correct operating clearance of the wheels and the tires are no longer guaranteed Warning! G Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have sustained damage, replace them. When replacing rims, use only genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the particular rim type. Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and possibly an accident. Retreaded tires are not tested or recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be recognized on retreads. Mercedes-Benz can therefore not assure the operating safety of the vehicle when such tires are used. Important guidelines 앫 Only use sets of tires and rims of the same type and make. 앫 Tires must be of the correct size for the rim. 앫 Break in new tires for approximately 60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds. 앫 Regularly check the tires and rims for damage. Dented or bent rims can cause tire inflation pressure loss and damage to the tire beads. 앫 If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire inflation pressure and correct as required. 앫 Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths under 1/8 in (3 mm). 앫 When replacing individual tires, you should mount new tires on the front wheels first (on vehicles with same-sized wheels all around). 307 Operation Tires and wheels Tire care and maintenance Warning! G Regularly check the tires for damage. Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have sustained damage, replace them. Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month. For more information on checking tire inflation pressure see “Recommended tire inflation pressure” (컄 page 316). 308 Tire inspection Life of tire Every time you check your tire inflation pressure, you should also inspect your tires for the following: The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to: 앫 excessive treadwear (컄 page 309) 앫 cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber 앫 bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in the tread or side of the tire Replace the tire if you find any of the above conditions. Make sure you also inspect the spare tire periodically for condition and inflation. Spare tires will age and become worn over time even if never used, and thus should be inspected and replaced when necessary. 앫 Driving style 앫 Tire inflation pressure 앫 Distance driven Warning! G Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Operation Tires and wheels Tread depth Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths under 1⁄ in (3 mm). 8 Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by law. These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced. to wear down to that level. As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced. Depending upon the weather and/or road surface (conditions), the tire traction varies widely. Summer tires 1/8 in (3 mm) 앫 Winter tires 1/6 in (4 mm) Warning! ! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease and gasoline. Cleaning tires ! Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires. The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire. Recommended minimum tire tread depth: 앫 Storing tires Always replace a damaged tire. G Although the applicable federal motor safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires 1 TWI (Tread Wear Indicator) The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread. 309 Operation Tires and wheels Direction of rotation Loading the vehicle Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, such as better hydroplaning performance. To benefit, however, you must make sure the tires rotate in the direction specified. Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry. An arrow on the sidewall indicates the intended direction of rotation (spinning) of the tire. i Spare wheels may be mounted against the direction of rotation (spinning) even with a unidirectional tire for temporary use only until the regular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced. Always observe and follow applicable temporary use restrictions and speed limitations indicated on the spare wheel. 310 앫 The Tire and Loading Information placard (Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information placard (Example B) can be found on the driver’s door B-pillar. This placard tells you important information about the number of people that can be in the vehicle and the total weight that can be carried in the vehicle. It also contains information on the proper size and recommended tire inflation pressures for the original equipment tires on your vehicle. 앫 The Certification label, also found on the driver’s door B-pillar tells you about the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. The Certification label also tells you about the front and rear axle weight capacity, called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GAWR is the total allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for either the front axle or rear axle. Operation Tires and wheels i Tire and Loading Information Warning! 1 Driver’s door B-pillar Following is a discussion on how to work with the information contained on the two placards with regards to loading your vehicle. G Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure. Data shown on placard examples are for illustration purposes only. Load limit data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle. Placard (Example A) Your vehicle is equipped with either the Tire and Loading Information placard (Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information placard (Example B). 1 Load limit information on the Tire and Loading Information placard 311 Operation Tires and wheels The placard showing the load limit information is located on the driver's door B-pillar. If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and Loading Information placard (Example A), locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.” on this placard. The combined weight of all occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced in that statement. Placard (Example B) The placard showing the load limit information is located on the driver’s door B-pillar. If your vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle Tire Information placard (Example B), locate the heading “Vehicle Capacity Weight” on this placard. The combined weight of all occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue (if applicable) should never exceed the weight listed next to vehicle capacity weight. i Data shown on placard examples are for illustration purposes only. Seating data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle. Seating capacity The seating capacity gives you important information on the number of occupants that can be in the vehicle. Observe front and rear seating capacity. Your vehicle is equipped with either placard Example A or placard Example B located on the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 311). Placard (Example A) 1 Seating capacity 1 Load limit information on the Vehicle Tire Information placard 312 Operation Tires and wheels Step 1 (Vehicles equipped with placard Example B) 왘 Step 5 왘 Locate the heading “Vehicle Capacity Weight” on your vehicle’s placard. Step 2 왘 Placard (Example B) 1 Seating capacity Step 3 왘 Steps for determining correct load limit The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”. Step 1 (Vehicles equipped with placard Example A) 왘 Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs. Step 4 왘 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400-750 (5 x150) = 650 lbs). Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4. Step 6 (if applicable) 왘 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle (컄 page 315). The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on the vehicle’s placard (컄 page 311). 313 Operation Tires and wheels Example Combined weight limit of occupants and cargo from placard 1 1500 lbs Number of Seating occupants configura(driver and tion passengers) Occupants weight Combined Available cargo/luggage and trailer weight of all tongue weight (total load limit or occupants vehicle capacity weight from placard minus combined weight of all occupants) 5 Occupant 1: 150 lbs Occupant 2: 180 lbs Occupant 3: 160 lbs Occupant 4: 140 lbs Occupant 5: 120 lbs 750 lbs 1500 lbs - 750 lbs = 750 lbs front: 2 rear: 3 2 1500 lbs 3 front: 1 rear: 2 Occupant 1: 200 lbs Occupant 2: 190 lbs Occupant 3: 150 lbs 540 lbs 1500 lbs - 540 lbs = 960 lbs 3 1500 lbs 1 front:1 Occupant 1: 150 lbs 150 lbs 1500 lbs - 150 lbs = 1350 lbs The higher the weight of all occupants, the less cargo and luggage load capacity is available. For more information, see “Trailer tongue load” (컄 page 315). 314 Operation Tires and wheels Certification label Even after careful determination of the combined weight of all occupants, cargo and the trailer tongue load (if applicable) (컄 page 315) as to not exceed the permissible load limit, you must make sure that your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle. You can obtain the GVWR and GAWR from the Certification label. The Certification Label can be found on the driver’s door B-pillar, see “Technical data” (컄 page 440). Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all cargo, and the trailer tongue load (컄 page 315) must never exceed the GVWR. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). To assure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible weight limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle), have the loaded vehicle (including driver, passengers and all cargo and, if applicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on a suitable commercial scale. Trailer tongue load The tongue load of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the load you can carry in your vehicle. If a trailer is towed, the tongue load must be added to the weight of all occupants riding and any cargo you are carrying in the vehicle. The tongue load typically is ten percent of the trailer weight and everything loaded in it. Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed primarily to carry passengers and their cargo. Mercedes-Benz does not recommend trailer towing with your vehicle. 315 Operation Tires and wheels Recommended tire inflation pressure Warning! G Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc. Your vehicle is equipped with either the Tire and Loading Information placard (Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information placard (Example B) located on the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 311). 316 The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires. The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than one mile (1.6 km). Placard (Example A) Follow recommended cold tire inflation pressures listed on placard. Keeping the tires properly inflated provides the best handling, tread life and riding comfort. In addition to the tire placard on the driver’s door B-pillar, also consult the fuel filler flap for any additional information pertaining to special driving situations. For more information, see “Important notes on tire inflation pressure” (컄 page 317). i Data shown on placard examples are for illustration purposes only. Tire data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle. 1 Tire and Loading Information placard with recommended cold tire inflation pressures Placard (Example A) lists the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for maximum loaded vehicle weight. The tire inflation pressures listed apply to the tires installed as original equipment. Operation Tires and wheels Placard (Example B) Important notes on tire inflation pressure Warning! G If the tire inflation pressure repeatedly drops: 1 Vehicle Tire Information placard with recommended cold tire inflation pressures Placard (Example B) lists the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for maximum loaded vehicle weight. The tire inflation pressures listed apply to the tires installed as original equipment. i Placard (Example B) may list recommended cold tire inflation pressures for different vehicle loads. 앫 Check the tires for punctures from foreign objects. 앫 Check to see whether air is leaking from the valves or from around the rim. Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure are also increased while driving, depending on the driving speed and the tire load. If you will be driving your vehicle at high speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal and conditions allow, consult the placard on the inside of the fuel filler flap on how to adjust the cold tire inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can build up and result in sudden tire failure. Be sure to readjust the tire inflation pressure for normal driving speeds. You should wait until the tires are cold before adjusting the tire inflation pressure. Some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation pressure information for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. If such information is provided, it can be found on the placard located on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Tire inflation pressure changes by approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire inflation pressure where the temperature is different from the outside temperature. 317 Operation Tires and wheels Checking tire inflation pressure 왘 Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve. Checking tire inflation pressure electronically* Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month. 왘 Read tire inflation pressure on tire gauge and check against the recommended tire inflation pressure on the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 316). If necessary, add air to achieve the recommended tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure monitoring system* only functions on wheels that are equipped with the proper electronic sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pressure, as selected by the driver, in all four tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a decrease in pressure in one or more of the tires. i You can call up the tire pressure monitoring display using the control system (컄 page 167). Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than one mile (1.6 km). If you check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are warm (the vehicle has been driven for several miles or sitting less than three hours), the reading will be approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than the cold reading. This is normal. Do not let air out to match the specified cold tire inflation pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be underinflated. Checking tire inflation pressure manually Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire inflation pressure: 왘 Remove the cap from the valve on one tire. 318 If you have overfilled the tire, release tire inflation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of a pen. Then recheck the tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge. 왘 Install the valve cap. 왘 Repeat this procedure for each tire. i After you have reactivated the tire pressure monitoring system*, the current tire inflation pressures will only be shown after a few minutes’ driving time. During this time, you will see the following message in the display: Tire pressure displayed only after driving a few mins. Operation Tires and wheels i Possible differences between the readings of a tire inflation pressure gauge of an air hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and the vehicle’s control system can occur. The readings issued by the control system are more precise. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34). 왘 Press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display (컄 page 158). 왘 Press the j or k button until the current inflation pressures for each tire appear in the multifunction display. Warning! G When the tire pressure monitoring system* warning light is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle placard and Operator’s Manual. i The recommended tire inflation pressures for your vehicle can be found on the placard of the driver’s door B-pillar or the inside of the fuel filler flap, not in the Operator’s Manual. Warning! G The tire pressure monitoring system* does not indicate a warning for wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pressure according to the placard of the driver’s door B-pillar or the inside of the fuel filler flap. The tire pressure monitoring system* is not able to issue a warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g. tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers. i Operating radio transmission equipment (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in or near the vehicle could cause the tire pressure monitoring system* to malfunction. 319 Operation Tires and wheels Warning! G Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight (as indicated on the placard on the driver’s door opening). Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. 320 i Reactivating the tire pressure monitoring system* The tire pressure monitoring system* must be reactivated in the following situations: If you are transporting a deflated tire in the vehicle, do not activate the tire pressure monitoring system* until 앫 If you have changed the tire inflation pressure 앫 the deflated tire is no longer in the vehicle 앫 If you have replaced the wheels or tires 앫 앫 If you have installed new wheels or tires you have inflated the tire to the correct pressure 왘 Using the placard of the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available, on the inside of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is correct. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see the current inflation pressures for each tire appear in the multifunction display or the following message appears in the multifunction display: Tire pressure displayed only after driving a few mins. 왘 Press the reset button on the instrument cluster (컄 page 24). The following message will appear in the multifunction display: Check current tire pres.? Operation Tires and wheels 왘 Press the æ button. If you wish to cancel activation: i The following message will appear in the multifunction display field: 왘 After you have reactivated the tire pressure monitoring system*, the current tire inflation pressure values will only be shown after several minutes of driving. During this time, the following message appears in the display: Tire pres. monitor reactivated The tire pressure monitoring system* will now monitor the tire inflation pressure values of all four tires. The following message will appear in the multifunction display field: Tire pressure displayed only after driving a few mins. This display appears until the individual inflation pressure values are matched with the tires. The individual values are then displayed (컄 page 390). Press the ç button. If one of the following messages appears in the multifunction display: 앫 reactivate tire pressure monitor after rectifying pressure 앫 Tire pressure Please rectify 왘 Check the tire inflation pressures and correct them if necessary. 왘 Reactivate the tire pressure monitoring system*. Tire pressure displayed only after driving a few mins. The time before the tire inflation pressures are shown depends on whether or not 앫 you have mounted new tires 앫 the old tires are still on the vehicle If you have mounted new tires, it will take slightly longer before the tire inflation pressures are shown in the display. 321 Operation Tires and wheels i If the positions of the wheels have not been changed on the vehicle, the tire inflation pressures are shown correctly after a short period. If the positions of the wheels have been switched, however, it is possible that the tire inflation pressures are temporarily shown for the wrong wheel positions. They are corrected after a few minutes of driving, and the tire inflation pressures are shown for the correct wheel positions. Potential problems associated with underinflated and overinflated tires Overinflated tire inflation pressure Underinflated tire inflation pressure 앫 adversely affect handling characteristics 앫 cause uneven tire wear 앫 be more prone to damage from road hazards 앫 adversely affect ride comfort 앫 increase stopping distance Overinflated tires can: Underinflated tires can: 앫 cause excessive and uneven tire wear 앫 adversely affect fuel economy 앫 lead to tire failure from being overheated 앫 adversely affect handling characteristics Warning! Warning! G Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. 322 G Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc. Operation Tires and wheels Tire labeling Besides tire name (sales designation) and manufacturer name, a number of markings can be found on a tire. Following are some explanations for the markings on your vehicle's tires: 1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards (컄 page 330) 2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) (컄 page 327) 3 Maximum tire load (컄 page 329) 4 Maximum tire inflation pressure (컄 page 329) 5 Manufacturer 6 Tire ply material (컄 page 332) 7 Tire size designation, load and speed rating (컄 page 323) 8 Load identification (컄 page 327) 9 Tire name i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. For more information, see “Rims and tires” (컄 page 443). Tire size designation, load and speed rating 1 Tire width 2 Aspect ratio in % 3 Radial tire code 4 Rim diameter 5 Tire load rating 6 Tire speed rating i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. 323 Operation Tires and wheels General: Tire width Rim diameter Depending on the design standards used, the tire size molded into the sidewall may have no letter or a letter preceding the tire size designation. The tire width 1 (컄 page 323) indicates the nominal tire width in mm. The rim diameter 4 (컄 page 323) is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim edge. Rim diameter is indicated in inches (in). No letter preceding the size designation (as illustrated above): Passenger car tire based on European design standards. The aspect ratio 2 (컄 page 323) is the dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width and is expressed in percentage. The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing section height by section width. Letter “P” preceding the size designation: Passenger car tire based on U.S. design standards. Letter “LT” preceding the size designation: Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards. Letter “T” preceding the size designation: Temporary spare tires which are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only. 324 Aspect ratio Tire code The tire code 3 (컄 page 323) indicates the tire construction type. The “R” stands for radial tire type. Letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply construction; letter “B” means belted-bias ply construction. At the tire manufacturer's option, any tire with a speed capability above 149 mph (240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18). For additional information, see “Tire speed rating” (컄 page 325). Tire load rating The tire load rating 5 (컄 page 323) is a numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support. For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds to a maximum load of 1356 lbs (615 kg) the tire is designed to support. See also “Maximum tire load” (컄 page 329) where the maximum load associated with the load index is indicated in kilograms and lbs. Operation Tires and wheels Warning G The tire load rating must always be at least half of the GAWR (컄 page 333) of your vehicle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the result which may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury to you or others. Always replace rims and tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the original part. Warning! G Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard located on the driver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure. For additional information on tire load rating, see “Load identification” (컄 page 327). i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 323) and Tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 323) are also referred to as “service description”. Tire speed rating The tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 323) indicates the approved maximum speed for the tire. Warning! G Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires. Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury and possible death, for you and for others. i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 323) and Tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 323) are also referred to as “service description”. 325 Operation Tires and wheels Summer tires Index Speed rating Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) (Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h) 앫 At the tire manufacturer's option, any tire with a speed capability above 149 mph (240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the maximum speed capability of the tire, the service description for the tire must be referred to. The service description 326 is comprised of the tire load rating 5 (컄 page 323) and the tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 323). If your tire includes “ZR” in the size designation and no service description 5 and 6 (컄 page 323) is given, the tire manufacturer must be consulted for the maximum speed capability. If a service description 5 and 6 (컄 page 323) is given, the speed capability is limited by the speed symbol in the service description. Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y. In this example, “97Y” is the service description. The letter “Y” designates the speed rating and the speed capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h). 앫 Any tire with a speed capability above 186 mph (300 km/h) must include a “ZR” in the size designation AND the service description must be placed in parenthesis. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y). The “(Y)” speed rating in parenthesis designates the maximum speed capability of the tire as being above 186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire manufacturer for the actual maximum permissible speed of the tire. All-season and winter tires Index Speed rating Q M+S up to 100 mph (160 km/h) T M+S up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H M+S up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V M+S up to 149 mph (240 km/h) i The marking “M+S” next to the service description designates tires with mud and snow capabilities. Operation Tires and wheels Load identification In addition to tire load rating, special load information may be molded into the tire sidewall following the letter designating the tire speed rating 1 (컄 page 325). No specification given: absence of any text (like in above example) indicates a standard load (SL) tire. XL or Extra Load: designates an extra load (or reinforced) tire. Light Load: designates a light load tire. 1 Load identification i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. C, D, E: designates load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) U.S. tire regulations require each new tire manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced. The TIN is a unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufactures to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchasers the means to easily identify such tires. The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Date of manufacture”. 327 Operation Tires and wheels 1 DOT 2 Manufacturer’s identification mark 3 Tire size 4 Tire type code (at the option of the tire manufacturer) 5 Date of manufacture DOT (Department of Transportation) Tire type code A tire branding symbol 1 (컄 page 328) which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. The code 4 (컄 page 328) may, at the option of the manufacturer, be used as a descriptive code for identifying significant characteristics of the tire. Manufacturer’s identification mark Date of manufacture The manufacturer’s identification mark 2 (컄 page 328) denotes the tire manufacturer. The date of manufacture 5 (컄 page 328) identifies the week and year of manufacture. New tires have a mark with two symbols. The first two figures identify the week, starting with “01” to represent the first full week of the calendar year. The second two figures represent the year. Retreaded tires have a mark with four symbols. For more information on retreaded tires, see (컄 page 307). i Tire size For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. The code 3 (컄 page 328) indicates the tire size. 328 For example, “3202” represents the 32nd week of 2002. Operation Tires and wheels Maximum tire load Warning! G Maximum tire inflation pressure Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure. 1 Maximum tire load rating i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. The maximum tire load is the maximum weight the tires are designed to support. For more information on tire load rating (컄 page 324). For information on calculating total and cargo load capacities (컄 page 313). 1 Maximum permissible tire inflation pressure i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. This is the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure for the tire. 329 Operation Tires and wheels Always follow the recommended tire inflation pressure (컄 page 316) for proper tire inflation. Warning! G Never exceed the max. tire inflation pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (U.S. vehicles) Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors: treadwear, traction and temperature resistance. 1 Treadwear 2 Traction 3 Temperature resistance i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. 330 Treadwear Traction Temperature 200 AA A All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc. Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Operation Tires and wheels Treadwear Traction Temperature The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning! G The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. 331 Operation Tires and wheels Warning! G Tire ply material Accessory weight The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure. 1 Plies in sidewall 2 Plies under tread i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. This marking tells you about the type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread. 332 Tire and loading terminology The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not). Air pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or bar. Aspect ratio Dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width expressed in percentage. Operation Tires and wheels Bar DOT (Department of Transportation) GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) Another metric unit for air pressure. There are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar. A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. This is the maximum permissible vehicle weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all options, passengers, fuel, and cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue load). It is indicated on certification label located on the driver’s door B-pillar. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim. Cold tire inflation pressure Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than one mile (1.6 km). Curb weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air conditioning and additional optional equipment, but without passengers and cargo. The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on each axle must never exceed the GAWR for the front and rear axle indicated on the certification label located on the driver’s door B-pillar. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed accessories, passengers and cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue load. The GWV must never exceed the GWVR indicated on the certification label located on the driver’s door B-pillar. Kilopascal (kPa) The metric unit for air pressure. There are 6.9 kPa to one psi; another metric unit for air pressure is bar. There are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to one bar. Maximum load rating The maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. Maximum loaded vehicle weight The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity weight and production options weight. 333 Operation Tires and wheels Maximum tire inflation pressure PSI (Pounds per square inch) TIN (Tire Identification Number) This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire under normal driving conditions. A standard unit of measure for air pressure -> bar, kilopascal (kPa). Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchases the means to easily identify such tires. The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer's identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Date of manufacture”. Recommended tire inflation pressure Normal occupant weight The number of occupants the vehicle is designed to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs). Recommended tire inflation pressure listed on placard located on driver’s door B-pillar for normal driving conditions. Provides best handling, tread life and riding comfort. Occupant distribution The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions. Production options weight The combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim. 334 Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated. Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead. Tire load rating Numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support. Tire ply composition and material used This indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. Operation Tires and wheels Tire speed rating Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Part of tire designation; indicates the speed range for which a tire is approved. A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. Traction Force exerted by the vehicle on the road via the tires. The amount of grip provided. Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road. Treadwear indicators Narrow bands, sometimes called “wear bars” that show across the tread of a tire when only 1/16 in (1.6 mm) of tread remains. Vehicle capacity weight Rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kilograms (150 lbs) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity. Vehicle maximum load on the tire Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing it by two. Rotating tires Warning! G Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires are of the same dimension. If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear), tire rotation is not possible. Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles with tires of the same dimension all around. If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the same dimension all around, tires can be rotated, observing a a front-to-rear rotation pattern that will maintain the intended rotation (spinning) direction of the tire (컄 page 310). In some cases, such as when your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is not possible. 335 Operation Tires and wheels If applicable to your vehicle's tire configuration, tires can be rotated according to the tire manufacturer's recommended intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty pamphlet located in your vehicle literature portfolio. If none is available, tires should be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km), or sooner if necessary, according to the degree of tire wear. The same rotation (spinning) direction must be maintained (컄 page 310). Rotate tires before the characteristic tire wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder wear on front tires and tread center wear on rear tires). Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side of the wheels/tires, during each rotation. Check for and ensure proper tire inflation pressure. 336 Warning! G Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel. Wheels could become loose if not tightened with a torque of 96 lb-ft (130 Nm). Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for your vehicle's rims. For information on wheel change, see the “Practical hints” section (컄 page 402) and (컄 page 419). Operation Winter driving 왔 Winter driving Before the onset of winter, have your vehicle winterized at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. This service includes: 앫 Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze concentration. 앫 Addition of cleaning concentrate to the water of the windshield and headlamp cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate “S” to a premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze which is formulated for below freezing temperatures (컄 page 456). 앫 앫 Battery test. Battery capacity drops with decreasing ambient temperature. A well charged battery helps to make sure that the engine can be started, even at low ambient temperatures. Tire change. Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated radial-ply tires with a minimum tread depth of approximately 1 /6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the winter season. Winter tires Always use winter tires at temperatures below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry road conditions prevail. Use of winter tires is the only way to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the ABS, ESP and 4MATIC in winter operation. For safe handling, make sure that all mounted winter tires are of the same make and have the same tread design. Warning! G Winter tires with a tread depth of less than 1/ in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no 6 longer suitable for winter operation. Always observe the speed rating of the winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the maximum speed for which your tires are rated is below the speed rating of your vehicle, you must place a notice to this effect where it will be seen by the driver. Such notices are available at your tire dealer or any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Warning! G If you use your spare tire when winter tires are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that the difference in tire characteristics may very well impair turning stability and that overall driving stability may be reduced. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Have the spare tire replaced with a winter tire at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 337 Operation Winter driving i Block heater* (Canada only) When driving with snow chains, you may wish to deactivate the ESP (컄 page 91) before setting the vehicle in motion. This will improve the vehicle’s traction. The engine is equipped with a block heater. The electrical cable may be installed at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Snow chains ! When driving with snow chains, always select the raised level of the level control system Airmatic* (컄 page 245). Other settings may result in damage to your vehicle. Snow chains should only be driven on snow-covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on roads without snow. 338 Please observe the following guidelines when using snow chains: 앫 Only use snow chains that are approved by Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to advise you on this subject. 앫 Use of snow chains may be prohibited depending on location. Always check local and state laws before installing snow chains. ! 앫 Use of snow chains is not permissible with all wheel/tire combinations. Even on vehicles with all-wheel-drive use snow chains on rear tires only. 앫 Snow chains should only be used on the rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer's mounting instructions. Use of snow chains is not permissible with tire sizes: 앫 265/35 ZR18 XL 앫 T 155/70 R17 110 M Operation Maintenance 왔 Maintenance We strongly recommend that you have your vehicle serviced by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet at the times called for by the maintenance service indicator display. Failure to have the vehicle maintained in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet and maintenance service indicator at the designated times/mileage will result in vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. The maintenance service indicator will notify you when your next maintenance service is due. Starting approximately one month before maintenance service is due, one of the following messages will appear in the multifunction display while you are driving or when you switch on the ignition (example service A): Service Service Service Service A A A A in XXXX miles (km) in XX days in X day due now! The maintenance services will be indicated by showing a service type A through type H in the multifunction display. Types A through H are classified based on estimated time needed to perform the maintenance service, ranging: from Service A (approx. one hour) to Service H (approx. eight hours) When the service type appears, you can use the vehicle’s control system to view a list of the service items (1-14) that need to be performed at the called for service type (컄 page 343). i The additional + after the type of service indicates the degree of wear of the brake pads. The brake pads may reach their wear limit in the time period up to the next service interval. Have the brake pads checked and, if necessary, replaced by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center during your next service appointment. 339 Operation Maintenance i Vehicles equipped with FSS PLUS (Flexible Service System PLUS) only (Canada vehicles): The interval between maintenance services depends on your driving habits. A gentle driving style, moderate engine speeds and the avoidance of short-distance trips will lengthen the interval between services. Clearing the maintenance service indicator You can clear the maintenance service indicator. Maintenance service term exceeded If you have exceeded the suggested maintenance service term, you will see the following message in the multifunction display: Service A exceeded by XXXXX miles (km) Service A exceeded by XXX days Service A exceeded by X day In addition, a signal sounds when the message appears. 왘 Press the reset button 1 on the left side of the instrument cluster. The maintenance service indicator is cleared and the standard display appears in the multifunction display. 340 Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will reset the maintenance service indicator following a completed maintenance service. Operation Maintenance Calling up the maintenance service indicator Resetting the maintenance service indicator i 왘 In the event that the maintenance service on your vehicle is not carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, you can have the maintenance service indicator reset. The automotive maintenance facility carrying out the maintenance service will find the information for resetting the maintenance service indicator in the maintenance-relevant information for your vehicle. Such information is available from either your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or directly from Mercedes-Benz. Only reset if the proper maintenance service has been performed. Resetting the system without performing the proper service as called for by the maintenance service indicator will result in engine damage and/or other vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34). The standard display of the control system appears (컄 page 153). 왘 Press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel until the maintenance service indicator with the service symbol 9 or ´ and the service deadline appears in the multifunction display. i If the maintenance service indicator was inadvertently reset, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center correct it. If the battery is disconnected, the days of disconnection will not be included in the count shown by the maintenance service indicator. To arrive at the true maintenance service deadline, you will need to subtract these days from the days shown in the maintenance service indicator. Do not confuse the maintenance service indicator with the engine oil level indicator :. 341 Operation Maintenance Setting the date for special works You can enter appointments for exhaust gas analysis and general inspection using the maintenance system. 왘 왘 Select the Addit. Work menu with the + or - button. 왘 Press the ÿ button. 왘 Press the ÿ button. The service indicator now displays the Next due date menu. The service indicator now displays the Addit. Work menu. Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34). The standard display of the control system appears (컄 page 153). 왘 왘 Press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel until the maintenance indicator appears in the multifunction display. Press the reset button (컄 page 24) for about five seconds. The Service menu appears in the multifunction display. 왘 Select the Exh.-gas analysis or General inspection menu with the + or - button. 왘 Select the Month and Year with the + or - button. 왘 Press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel to set the month and year. 왘 Select Confirm with the + or button. 왘 Press the ÿ button. The new date is set. 342 Operation Maintenance 왘 Press the è button on the multifunction steering wheel until the standard display appears in the multifunction display. The maintenance service system now recalculates the values. You cannot call up the service display or the service menu during this time. Calling up the maintenance service data information The maintenance service indicator shows the maintenance service type (letters A-H) in the multifunction display approximately one month before the service appointment is due in miles (distance criterion) or in days (time criterion). This maintenance service type is based on the service items to be carried out. The service items are described in the Maintenance Booklet. The service indicator now displays the Items menu. Calling up the service item menu 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34). The standard display of the control system appears (컄 page 153). 왘 Press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel until the maintenance service indicator appears in the multifunction display. 왘 Press the reset button (컄 page 24) for about five seconds. i The service items to be carried out are shown in this menu. The Service menu appears in the multifunction display (컄 page 153). 왘 Select the Items menu with the + or - button. 왘 Press the ÿ button. Please refer to the Maintenance Booklet for a description of each service item. 왘 Press button è on the multifunction steering wheel until the standard display appears in the multifunction display. The service items to be carried out under the corresponding service type can be displayed in the multifunction display. 343 Operation Vehicle care Cleaning and care of vehicle Warning! G Many cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are poisonous, others are flammable. Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning the inside. Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed for cleaning your vehicle. While in operation, even while parked, your vehicle is subjected to varying external influences which, if gone unchecked, can attack the paintwork as well as the vehicle underbody and cause lasting damage. 344 Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions, but also by: Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse influences. 앫 Air pollution 앫 Road salt More frequent washings are necessary to deal with unfavorable conditions: 앫 Tar 앫 Gravel and stone chipping To avoid paint damage, you should immediately remove: 앫 Grease and oil 앫 Fuel 앫 Coolant 앫 Brake fluid 앫 Bird droppings 앫 Insects 앫 Tree resins etc. 앫 Near the ocean 앫 In industrial areas (smoke, exhaust emissions) 앫 During winter operation You should check your vehicle from time to time for stone chipping or other damage. Any damage should be repaired as soon as possible to prevent corrosion. In doing so, do not neglect the underbody of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the underbody followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas need to be re-undercoated. Operation Vehicle care Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax-base rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for the lifetime of the vehicle. Post-production treatment is neither necessary nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility of incompatibility between materials used in the production process and others applied later. We have selected car-care products and compiled recommendations which are specially matched to our vehicles and which always reflect the latest technology. You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved car-care products at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or damage due to negligent or incorrect care cannot always be removed or repaired with the car-care products recommended here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of your vehicle and give important “how-to” information as well as references to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care products. Power washer When using a power wash for cleaning the vehicle, always observe the manufacturer’s operating instructions. i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (approximately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked. ! Never use a round nozzle to power-wash tires. The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire. Always replace a damaged tire. Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber parts. 345 Operation Vehicle care Tar stains Engine cleaning Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and become more difficult to remove. A tar remover is recommended. Prior to cleaning the engine compartment, make sure to protect electrical components and connectors from contact with water and cleaning agents. Paintwork, painted body components Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the engine compartment after every engine cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be protected from any wax. Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should be applied when water drops on the paint surface do not “bead up”, normally every three to five months, depending on climate and washing detergent used. Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner should be applied if the paint surface shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of gloss). Do not apply any of these products or wax if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot. Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for quick and provisional repairs of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle doors, etc.). 346 Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the finish. Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in exterior rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle through an automatic car wash to prevent damage to the mirrors. In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of road salt as soon as possible. When washing the vehicle underbody, do not forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels. Vehicle washing i Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct sunlight. Use only a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (approximately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked. Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of water. Direct only a very weak spray towards the ventilation intake. Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge and chamois frequently. Operation Vehicle care Ornamental moldings For regular cleaning and care of very dirty chrome-plated parts, use a chrome cleaner. i Cleaning the Distronic* system sensor cover Restart the engine after cleaning sensor cover 1. Wiper blades Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers, turn signal lenses ! Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water. The windshield wipers must be in a vertical position before folding them away from the windshield. They could otherwise damage the hood. To prevent scratches, never apply strong force and use only a soft, non-scratchy cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or sponge. 1 Distronic system sensor cover Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water to clean sensor cover 1. 왘 Turn on the wipers and place it in a vertical position. For information on placing the wipers in a vertical position, see “Replacing wiper blades” (컄 page 416). To prevent scratches, never apply strong force and use only a soft, non-scratchy cloth when cleaning the sensor cover. Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge. 347 컄컄 Operation Vehicle care 컄컄 Warning! G For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0) before cleaning the wiper blades. Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury. 왘 Clean the wiper blade inserts with a clean cloth and detergent solution. ! The windshield wipers must be in a vertical position before folding them away from the windshield. They could otherwise damage the hood. 왘 Turn on the wipers and place it in a vertical position. For information on placing the wipers in a vertical position, see “Replacing wiper blades” (컄 page 416). Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back. If released, the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield. 348 ! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto the windshield before turning the SmartKey in the starter switch. Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back. If released, the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield. Light alloy wheels ! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto the windshield before turning the SmartKey in the starter switch. Use a window cleaning solution on all glass surfaces. An automotive glass cleaner is recommended. Window cleaning Warning! G For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0) before cleaning the windshield. Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury. Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care should be used for regular cleaning of the light alloy wheels. If possible, clean wheels once a week with Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, using a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of water. Follow the instructions on the container. Operation Vehicle care i Cup holder Seat belts Use only acid-free cleaning materials. Acid could lead to corrosion. Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use scouring agents. The webbing must not be treated with chemical cleaning agents. Use only clear, lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the webbing at temperatures above 176°F (80°C) or in direct sunlight. Instrument cluster Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm solution. Do not use scouring agents. Hard plastic trim items Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care onto a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with light pressure. Steering wheel and gear selector lever Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care. Warning! G Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection. Headliner and shelf below rear window Clean with a soft bristle brush, or use a dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive dirt. 349 Operation Vehicle care Leather upholstery MB Tex upholstery Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing clothing that has the tendency to give off coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause the upholstery to become permanently discolored. By lining the seats with a proper intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will be prevented. Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care onto a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with light pressure. Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care. Exercise particular care when cleaning perforated leather as its underside should not become wet. Wood trims 350 Plastic and rubber parts Do not use oil or wax on these parts. Dampen cloth using water and use damp cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle. Do not use solvents like tar remover or wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as these may be abrasive. Practical hints What to do if … Where will I find ...? Unlocking/locking in an emergency Opening/closing in an emergency Replacing bulbs Replacing wiper blades Flat tire Batteries Jump starting Towing the vehicle Fuses 351 Practical hints What to do if … Lamps in instrument cluster General information: If any of the following lamps in the instrument cluster fails to come on during the bulb self-check when switching on the ignition, have the respective bulb checked and replaced if necessary. Problem Possible cause Suggested solution The ABS has detected a malfunction and has switched off. The BAS and the ESP are also switched off (see messages in display). 왘 Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability. The SBC brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS available. 왘 Read and observe messages in the display (컄 page 362). - The yellow ABS malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving. If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, oth- 왘 Have the system checked at an authoer systems such as Distronic*, or the autorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon matic transmission may also be as possible. malfunctioning. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident. The charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts. The ABS has switched off. 왘 Switch off electrical consumers that are currently not needed, e.g. seat heating. 왘 If necessary, have the generator and battery checked. The battery may not be sufficiently charged. When the voltage is above this value again, the ABS is operational again. 352 Practical hints What to do if … Problem v v Possible cause Suggested solution The yellow ABS/ESP warning lamp comes on while driving. The ESP is deactivated. 왘 The yellow ABS/ESP warning lamp flashes while driving. The ABS, ESP or traction control has come into operation because of detected traction loss in at least one tire. Distronic* is deactivated. Switch the ESP back on (컄 page 92). Risk of accident! If the ESP cannot be switched back on, Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail- have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as ing road, weather, and traffic conditions. possible. Distronic* is switched off. 왘 When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible. 왘 While driving, ease up on the accelerator. 왘 Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather conditions. 왘 Do not deactivate the ESP. Exceptions: (컄 page 91) Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident. 353 Practical hints What to do if … Problem 3 ; (Canada only) Possible cause Suggested solution You are driving with the parking brake set. 왘 Release the parking brake. 왘 Observe the additional message in the display. 왘 Risk of accident! Do not drive any further. Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Center. Under no circumstances should you top up the brake fluid. This will not solve the problem. (USA only) The red brake warning lamp comes on while driving and you hear a warning sound. 3 ; (Canada only) There is a malfunction in the SBC brake system. 앫 There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir. (USA only) The red brake warning lamp comes on while driving. Warning! G Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately if the brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. 354 앫 Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned. ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks. Practical hints What to do if … Problem ? ± Possible cause Suggested solution (USA only) There is a malfunction in: 왘 (Canada only) 앫 The fuel management system The yellow engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving. 앫 The ignition system (Gasoline engine) 앫 The emission control system 앫 Systems which affect emissions Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions values and may switch the engine to its limp-home (emergency operation) mode. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. An on-board diagnostic connector is used by the service station to link the vehicle to the shop diagnostics system. It allows the accurate identification of system malfunctions through the readout of diagnostic trouble codes. It is located in the front left area of the footwell next to the parking brake. A loss of pressure has been detected in the 왘 Check the fuel cap. fuel system. The fuel cap may not be closed If it is not closed properly: properly or the fuel system may be leaky. 왘 Close the fuel cap. If it is closed properly: Your fuel tank is empty. 왘 Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 왘 After refuelling start, turn off and restart the engine three or four times in succession. The limp-home mode is canceled. You do not need to have your vehicle checked. 355 Practical hints What to do if … Problem D The red coolant warning lamp comes on when the engine is running. Possible cause Suggested solution There is insufficient coolant in the reservoir. 왘 Immediately add coolant to prevent engine from overheating (컄 page 303). If this warning lamp comes on frequently, there is a leak in the cooling system. 왘 Have the cooling system checked. 왘 If the coolant temperature is below 257°F (125°C), you can continue driving to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 왘 Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving uphill) and stop-and-go driving. If the coolant level is correct, the electric radiator fan may be broken. D The red coolant warning lamp The coolant temperature has exceeded comes on while driving and you 257°F (125°C). hear a warning sound. 왘 Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and coolant to cool down. l The red DTR warning lamp comes on while driving. 왘 Apply the brakes immediately to increase the following distance. Warning! G Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to 356 You are too close to the vehicle in front of you to maintain selected speed. catch fire. You could be seriously burned. Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. Practical hints What to do if … Problem Possible cause Suggested solution The red DTR warning lamp comes on while driving and you hear a warning chime sound. 앫 You are gaining too rapidly on the vehicle ahead of you. 왘 Apply the brakes immediately. 앫 The distance warning system has recognized a stationary obstacle on your probable line of travel. 왘 Carefully observe the traffic situation. You may need to brake or maneuver to avoid hitting an obstacle. W The yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp comes on while driving. The fuel level has gone below the reserve mark. 왘 Refuel at the next gas station (컄 page 296). < The red seat belt telltale comes The seat belt telltale reminds you and your on after starting the engine with front passenger to fasten your seat belts beall doors closed. fore driving off. 왘 Fasten your seat belts. The red seat belt telltale flashes and you additionally hear an intermittent warning signal with increasing intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h). 왘 Fasten your seat belts. 왘 Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them in a safe place. l You and/or your front passenger have forgotten to fasten your seat belts. There are items placed on the front passenger seat and therefore the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied. 357 Practical hints What to do if … Problem H Possible cause The yellow warning lamp for the The tire pressure monitoring system* detire pressure monitoring systects a loss of pressure in at least one tire. tem* comes on. Suggested solution 왘 Bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you. 왘 Take note of the messages in the multifunction display. The warning lamp goes out once the tire inflation pressure monitor has been reactivated after the tire inflation pressures have been corrected. Warning! G When the tire pressure monitoring system* warning light is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard. 358 Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle placard and owner’s manual. i The recommended tire inflation pressures for your vehicle can be found on the placard of the driver’s door B-pillar or the inside of the fuel filler flap, not in the owner’s manual. Practical hints What to do if … Problem 1 The red SRS indicator lamp comes on while driving. Warning! Possible cause Suggested solution There is a malfunction in the restraint systems. The air bags or emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or fail to activate in an accident. 왘 Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. G In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be operational. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked; otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in an accident and/or injury to you or to others. 359 Practical hints What to do if … Lamp in center console Problem Possible cause Suggested solution 75 The system is malfunctioning. 왘 Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 왘 Also note any messages in the multifunction display and follow corrective steps (컄 page 369). The indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated with the weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual on the front passenger seat. Warning! G If the 75 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated with the weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual on the front passenger seat, do not have any passenger use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. 360 Practical hints What to do if … Problem Possible cause Suggested solution 75 The system is malfunctioning. 왘 Make sure that there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat and check installation of the child seat. 왘 Make sure that no objects applying supplemental weight onto the seat are present. 왘 Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged behind or around the seat, head restraints pushing against roof etc.). The system may recognize such forces as supplemental weight. 왘 If the light remains out, have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. 왘 Also note any messages in the multifunction display and follow corrective steps (컄 page 369). The indicator lamp does not illuminate and/or does not remain illuminated with the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less on the front passenger seat. Warning! G If the 75 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight off a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less on the front passenger seat, do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. 361 Practical hints What to do if … Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display Warning and malfunction messages appear in the multifunction display located in the instrument cluster. Certain warning and malfunction messages are accompanied by an audible signal. Address these messages accordingly and follow the additional instructions given in this Operator’s Manual. Selecting the vehicle status message memory menu in the control system (컄 page 161) displays both cleared and uncleared messages. High-priority messages appear in the multifunction display in red color. Certain messages of high priority cannot be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button (컄 page 24) or button j, k, ÿ, or è on the steering wheel. Other messages of high priority and messages of less immediate priority can be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button (컄 page 24) or button j, k, ÿ, or è on the steering wheel. They are then stored in the vehicle status message memory (컄 page 161). Remember that clearing a message will only make the message disappear. Clearing a message will not correct the condition that caused the message to appear. Warning! All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note of and, where a malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Failure to repair condition noted may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury. Warning! G No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative. Contact the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 362 G Practical hints What to do if … i Switching on the ignition causes all instrument cluster lamps (expect low beam headlamp indicator lamp, high beam headlamp indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) as well as the multifunction display to come on. Make sure the lamps and multifunction display are in working order before starting your journey. On the pages that follow, you will find a compilation of the most important warning and malfunction messages that may appear in the multifunction display. For your convenience the messages are devided into two sections: 앫 Text messages (컄 page 364) 앫 Symbol messages (컄 page 373) 363 Practical hints What to do if … Text messages Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution ABS Malfunction Visit workshop The ABS has detected a malfunction and has switched off. 왘 Continue driving with added caution. Wheels will lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability. 왘 Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. The ESP and the BAS are also deactivated. The SBC brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS Failure to follow these instructions increases available. the risk of accident. Display malfunction Visit workshop The ABS or the ABS display is malfunctioning. 왘 Continue driving with added caution. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident. 364 Practical hints What to do if … Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution Low Battery Conven. functions temporarily unavailable The battery has insufficient voltage As soon as the on-board voltage is sufficient, and can no longer supply convethe consumers will switch on again. nience functions such as the rear window defroster. Please note: Conven. functions available again On-board voltage is sufficient; the consumers will switch on again. Cruise control Drive to workshop Cruise control or Distronic* is malfunctioning. 왘 Have the cruise control or Distronic* checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Distronic External interference Reactivate The Distronic* is switched off and is temporarily unavailable. 왘 Try activating the Distronic* again later. Visit workshop The Distronic* is malfunctioning or the display is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. 365 Practical hints What to do if … Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution Distronic Currently unavailable See Operator’s Manual DISTRONIC* is switched off if: 왘 If necessary, clean the DISTRONIC cover in the area of the radiator grille. 왘 Restart the vehicle. 앫 앫 the DISTRONIC cover in the area of the radiator grille is dirty the functionality is impaired by heavy rain or thick fog or DISTRONIC* becomes operational again without the engine being restarted when: 앫 dirt on the grille falls off while driving (e.g. slush or snow) 앫 the system recognizes full sensor availability (due to lessening rain or the road surface drying) 앫 the message in the multifunction display disappears 앫 the speed last stored flashes in the display for five seconds. You can operate DISTRONIC* as usual again. 366 Practical hints What to do if … Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution ESP Malfunction Visit workshop The ESP has detected a malfunction and switched off. 왘 Continue driving with added caution. 왘 Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. The ABS may not be operational. The SBC brake system is still func- Failure to follow these instructions increases tioning normally but without the ESP the risk of an accident. available. unavailable See Operator’s Manual The ESP is deactivated because the power supply was interrupted. 왘 The SBC brake system is still functioning normally but without the ESP available. Synchronize the ESP. With the vehicle stationary, turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right to synchronize the ESP. If the ESP message does not go out: 왘 Continue driving with added caution. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident. ! When synchronizing the ESP, make sure you can turn the steering wheel in both directions as far as it will go without the wheels hitting any objects, e.g. a road curb. 367 Practical hints What to do if … Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution ESP Display malfunction Visit workshop The ESP or the ESP display is malfunctioning. 왘 Continue driving with added caution. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident. You have attempted to turn off the engine with the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button with the gear selector lever not in P. You have opened the driver's door with the gear selector lever not in P. 왘 Place the gear selector lever in position P. P Gear selector lever in Park P/N Shift to Neutral or Park You have attempted to start the en- 왘 Place the gear selector lever in position P gine with the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button while the gear selector lever was in position R or D. 368 or N. Make sure the brake pedal is depressed. Practical hints What to do if … Display Display messages Possible cause Possible solution Front passenger airbag activated see Oper.’s Man. Front passenger front air Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible bag is activated while driv- and check the following: ing even though a child, 왘 Make sure that there is nothing between seat cushsmall individual, or object ion and child seat and check installation of the child below the system's weight seat. threshold is on the front 왘 Make sure that no objects applying supplemental passenger seat, or the weight onto the seat are present. front passenger seat is empty. Objects on the seat 왘 Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the or forces acting on the seat seat are present (e.g. objects such as books, briefmay make the system cases etc. lodged behind or around the seat, head sense supplemental restraints pushing against roof etc.). The system weight. may recognize such forces as supplemental weight and sense that an occupant on the front passenger seat is of a heavier weight than actually present. (Continued on next page) 369 Practical hints What to do if … Display Display messages Front passenger airbag activated see Oper.’s Man. Possible cause Possible solution If performing any of the above corrective steps is successful, the message Front passenger airbag deactivated will appear in the multifunction display, confirming the situation has been remedied. Note that after performing the corrective steps, it may take up to 60 seconds for the message Front passenger airbag deactivated to appear. If the message Front passenger airbag activated remains on in the multifunction display and/or the 75 indicator lamp remains out even after performing the above corrective steps, have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not have any children12 years old and under and other small individuals use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. Warning! G If the message Front passenger airbag activated remains on in the multifunction display and/or the 75 indicator 370 lamp remains out even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any children12 years old and under and other small individuals use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. Practical hints What to do if … Display Display messages Possible cause Possible solution Front passenger airbag deactivated see Oper.’s Man. Front passenger front air Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible bag is deactivated while and check the following: driving even though an 왘 Do not lean on armrests or lift yourself up using hanadult or someone larger dle over the door. than a small individual is 왘 Adjust the seat in a height position (컄 page 39). occupying the front passenger seat. Forces acting 왘 Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the on the seat may make the seat are present (e.g. objects such as books, briefsystem sense a decrease cases etc. lodged underneath, behind or around the in weight. seat). Such forces may cause the system to sense that an occupant of a lesser weight than actually present is on the front passenger seat. 왘 Re-position yourself. 왘 Sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with your back against the seat backrest. If performing any of the above corrective steps is successful, the message Front passenger airbag activated will appear in the multifunction display, confirming the situation has been remedied. (Continued on next page) 371 Practical hints What to do if … Display Display messages Front passenger airbag deactivated see Oper.’s Man. Possible cause Possible solution Note that after performing the corrective steps, it may take up to 60 seconds for the message Front passenger airbag activated to appear. If the message Front passenger airbag deactivated remains on in the multifunction display and/or the 75 indicator lamp remains on even after performing the above corrective steps, have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not have any passenger use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. Warning! G If the message Front passenger airbag deactivated remains on in the multifunction display and/or the 75 indicator lamp remains illuminated even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any passenger use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. 372 Practical hints What to do if … Symbol messages Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution # Undervoltage Switch off consumers The battery has insufficient voltage. 왘 Turn off unnecessary electrical consumers. Visit workshop The battery was charged with a battery charger or jump started. 왘 Have the battery checked at a service station. The battery is no longer charging. Possible causes: 왘 Stop immediately and check the poly-V-belt. 앫 alternator malfunctioning If it is broken: 앫 broken poly-V-belt 왘 Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not forget that the brake system requires electrical energy and may be operating with restricted capability. Considerably greater brake pedal force is required and the stopping distance is in- If it is intact: creased. 왘 Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking responsiveness. 373 Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution # Battery/Alternator Stop vehicle The battery is malfunctioning. 왘 Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking responsiveness. 왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 왘 Start the engine (컄 page 47). ( 374 The SBC brake system requires electrical energy and therefore has only limited operation. Considerably greater brake pedal force is required and the stopping distance is increased. Low voltage Start engine The battery has insufficient voltage. Malfunction Electrical consumers switched off The consumer battery has insufficient The electrical consumers will come back voltage and can no longer supply the con- online as soon as on-board voltage is sufvenience functions such as seat ventila- ficient. tion*. Backrest, right rear not locked The rear seat backrest is not engaged. 왘 Adjust the rear seat backrest until it is fully engaged in position. Backrest, left rear not locked The rear seat backrest is not engaged. 왘 Adjust the rear seat backrest until it is fully engaged in position. Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution 2 Brake wear Visit workshop The brake pads have reached their wear limit. 왘 Brake pad thickness must be visually inspected at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet. 왘 Have the brake pads replaced as soon as possible. 왘 Do not drive any further. 왘 Stop the vehicle and notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 왘 Significantly greater force must be applied to the brake pedal. 왘 Call for Roadside Assistance. 왘 Start the engine. T Reduced braking power Depress brake pedal fully The SBC brake system is in emergency operation mode. Considerably greater brake pedal force is required and the stopping distance is increased. The maximum speed is limited to 55 mph (90 km/h). (USA only) ; Reduced braking power Start engine (Canada only) 3 The battery has insufficient voltage and cannot supply sufficient power to the SBC brake system. The message disappears when sufficient voltage is available. ! Brake pad thickness must be visually inspected by a qualified technician at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet. 375 Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution (USA only) Reduced braking power Visit workshop The SBC brake system is in emergency operation mode. Considerable brake pedal force is required and the stopping distance is increased. 왘 Continue driving with added caution. 왘 Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking responsiveness. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. ; (Canada only) 3 Service brake Visit workshop There are malfunctions, but the SBC brake system is operating normally. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Brake overheated Drive carefully The brake system is overheated due to an excessive load on the brakes. 왘 Relieve the load on the brake system. 왘 Drive more smoothly and think ahead to avoid unnecessary braking. 왘 When driving down slopes, shift into a lower gear to use the engine’s braking power (컄 page 185). 왘 Cautiously continue driving so that the air stream will cool down the brakes. 왘 Release the parking brake (컄 page 49). Release parking brake 376 You are driving with the parking brake set. Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution (USA only) Brake fluid Visit workshop There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir. 왘 ; (Canada only) 3 Warning! G Driving while these messages are displayed can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately. If there is a malfunction in the SBC brake system, we recommend that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. A tow bar must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the recommended towing methods and the vehicle requires towing with all four wheels on the ground. Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is only permissible for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, refer to “Towing the vehicle” (컄 page 430). If the SBC brake system enters its emergency operation mode, the driver must apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further than normal to obtain braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes may only be applied to the front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle and notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem. Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned. ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks. 377 Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution ? ± Visit workshop There may be a malfunction in the: 왘 Have the measuring system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 왘 Add coolant (컄 page 303). 왘 If you have to add coolant frequently, have the cooling system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. (USA only) (Canada only) B Warning! Coolant Check level G Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You can be seriously burned. 378 앫 fuel injection system 앫 ignition system 앫 exhaust system 앫 fuel system The coolant level is too low. ! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with the message and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will overheat causing major engine damage. Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution Ï Coolant Stop, engine off The coolant is too hot. 왘 Stop the vehicle. 왘 Only start the engine again after the message disappears. You could otherwise damage the engine. Warning! G Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned. Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. During severe operation conditions and stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C). ! The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Doing so may cause serious damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. 379 Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution Ï Coolant Stop, engine off The poly-V-belt could be broken. 왘 Stop immediately and check the poly-V-belt. If it is broken: 왘 Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If it is intact: Coolant Visit workshop 380 The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunctioning. 왘 Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this message displayed. Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Warranty. 왘 Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 왘 Observe the coolant temperature display. 왘 Have the fan replaced as soon as possible. Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution G Display malfunction Visit workshop The displays for several systems have malfunctioned. Some systems themselves may also have malfunctioned. 왘 ± J Display malfunction Visit workshop Doors open Certain electronic systems are unable to relay information to the control system. The following systems may have failed: 앫 Coolant temperature display 앫 Tachometer 앫 Cruise control display You are attempting to drive with one or more doors open. Continue driving with added caution. When the display is malfunctioning, warnings and malfunction messages might not be displayed. 왘 Have the electronic systems checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 왘 Have the electronic systems checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 왘 Close the doors. 381 Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution : USA only: The engine oil level is too low. 왘 Add engine oil (컄 page 302) and check the engine oil level (컄 page 301). There is no oil in the engine. There is a danger of engine damage. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as soon as possible. 왘 Turn off the engine. 왘 Add engine oil (컄 page 302) and check the engine oil level (컄 page 301). 왘 Have oil siphoned or drained off. Observe all legal requirements with respect to its disposal. Add 1 Qt. engine oil at next refueling Canada only: Add 1 Liter engine oil at next refueling Engine oil level Stop, engine off Engine oil level Reduce oil level 382 You have added too much engine oil. There is a risk of damaging: 앫 the engine 앫 the catalytic converter Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution : Engine oil Visit workshop The engine oil has dropped to a critical level. 왘 Check the engine oil level (컄 page 301) and add oil as required (컄 page 302). 왘 If you must add engine oil frequently, have the engine checked for possible leaks. It may be that there is water in the engine oil. 왘 Have the engine oil checked. The measuring system is malfunctioning. 왘 Have the measuring system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Engine oil level Visit workshop When the Engine oil - Visit workshop message appears while the engine is running and at operating temperature, the engine oil level has dropped to approximately the minimum level. When this occurs, the warning will first come on intermittently and then stay on if the oil level drops further. If no oil leaks are noted, continue to drive to the nearest service station where the engine oil should be topped to the required level with an approved oil specified in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet. ! The engine oil level warnings should not be ignored. Extended driving with the symbol displayed could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. 383 Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution % F Hood open You are driving with the hood open. 왘 Close the hood (컄 page 299). Key Check battery The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* batteries are discharged. 왘 Change the batteries (컄 page 408). Key not recognized The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not recognized while the engine is running because 왘 Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. 왘 Search for the SmartKey. Key not recognized 384 앫 the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not in the vehicle 앫 there is strong radio-frequency interference The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is momentarily not recognized. Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally locked nor can the engine be started again after the engine is stopped. 왘 Change the position of the SmartKey in the vehicle. 왘 Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch if necessary. Key still in vehicle A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* left in the vehicle was recognized while locking the vehicle from the outside. 왘 Take the SmartKey out of the vehicle. Keyless Go Check system The KEYLESS-GO* system is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution F Do not forget key This display appears (for a maximum of 60 seconds) if the driver’s door is opened with the engine shut off and no SmartKey in the starter switch. This message is only a reminder. 왘 Insert SmartKey in the starter switch. 왘 Take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you when leaving the vehicle. Remove key You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey. 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. Replace key There is no additional code available for SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Reserve fuel The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark. 왘 Refuel at the next gas station (컄 page 296). Check gas cap See Operator’s Manual A loss of pressure has been detected in 왘 Check the fuel cap (컄 page 297). the fuel system. The fuel cap may not be If it is not closed properly: closed properly or the fuel system may be 왘 Close the fuel cap. leaky. A If it is closed properly: 왘 Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 385 Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution . Brake lamp Drive to workshop Brake lamp illumination is delayed or lamp is permanently on. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Brake lamp, left Substitute bulb on The left brake lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Brake lamp, right Substitute bulb on The right brake lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Display malfunction Visit workshop The display for the lamps or the system is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Front foglamp, left The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Front foglamp, right The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Active Hdlmp. currently unavailable The active headlamps are malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Active Hdlmp. Backup lamp on The active headlamps are malfunctioning. Another light is being used. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Active Hdlmp. malfunction Drive to workshop The active headlamps have malfunctioned several times in succession. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. 386 Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution . High beam, left The left high beam lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. High beam, right The right high beam lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. License plate lamp, left The left license plate lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. License plate lamp, right The right license plate lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Light sensor Drive to workshop The lamp sensor is malfunctioning. The headlamps switch on automatically. 왘 In the control system, set lamp operation to manual mode (컄 page 170). 왘 Switch on headlamps using the exterior lamp switch. Low beam, left The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning. Halogen headlamp: 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Bi-Xenon* headlamp: 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Backup lamp, left The left reverse lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Backup lamp, right The right reverse lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. 387 Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution . Low beam, right The right low beam lamp is malfunction- Halogen headlamp: ing. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Bi-Xenon* headlamp: 388 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Front Marker light, left The front left side marker lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Front Marker light, right The front right side marker lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Fr. Park. lamp, left The left parking lamps are malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Fr. Park. lamp, right The right parking lamps are malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Rear foglamp Substitute bulb on The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Switch off lamps Lamps have been turned on although the SmartKey in the starter switch is in position 0. 왘 Switch off the headlights. Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution . Taillamp, left Substitute bulb on The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Taillamp, right Substitute bulb on The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Turn sig., left rear Substitute bulb on The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Turn sig., right rear Substitute bulb on The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Turn sig., left front The left front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Turn sig., right front The right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Turn signal, left mirror The left turn signal in the side mirror is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working. 왘 Have the LEDs replaced as soon as possible. Turn signal, right mirror The right turn signal in the side mirror is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working. 왘 Have the LEDs replaced as soon as possible. 389 Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display messages Possible cause H Tire pres. monitor reactivated The tire pressure monitoring system* is using the current pressure values as the basis for monitoring. Tire pressure displayed only after driving a few mins. The tire inflation pressure is being checked. Tire pres. monitor temporarily unavailable The tire pressure monitoring system* is unable to monitor the tire inflation pressure due to 앫 앫 Tire pres. Please rectify 390 Possible solution 왘 Remove any extra wheel sensors from the vehicle. As soon as the causes of the malfunction the presence of several wheel sensors have been removed, the tire pressure monitoring system* automatically bein the vehicle. comes active again. excessive wheel sensor temperatures. 앫 a nearby radio interference source. 앫 unrecognized wheel sensors mounted. The pressure is too low in one or more tires. 왘 Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required (컄 page 318). Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution H Reactivate tire pres. monitor after corr. pres. There was a tire pressure warning message. 왘 Reactivate the tire pressure monitoring system* after correcting the tire pressure values (컄 page 320). Tire pres. monitor deactivated Drive to workshop The tire inflation pressure monitor is malfunctioning. 왘 Have the tire inflation pressure monitor checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. A wheel without proper sensor was installed. 왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 419). The yellow warning lamp for the tire pressure monitoring system* comes on and you have not reactivated the system since the last tire pressure warning message. 391 Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution H Caution Tire pressure One or more tires is deflating. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you. 왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 419). 왘 Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The tire inflation pressure in one or more tires is already below the minimum value. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you. The tire inflation pressure in one or more tires is low. 왘 Check the tires. 왘 Check and correct the tire inflation pressure as required. 왘 If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 419). Tire pres. Check tire Warning! G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. 392 You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution H Caution Tire pres., RL The left rear tire is deflating. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you. 왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 419). 왘 Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt. 왘 Check the tire. 왘 Check and correct the tire inflation pressure as required. 왘 If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 419). Tire pressure, RL Check tire Warning! G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. The left rear tire inflation pressure is low. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. 393 Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution H Caution Tire pres., RR The right rear tire is deflating. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you. 왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 419). 왘 Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt. 왘 Check the tire. 왘 Check and correct the tire inflation pressure as required. 왘 If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 419). Tire pressure, RR Check tire Warning! G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. 394 The right rear tire inflation pressure is low. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution H Caution Tire pres., FL The left front tire is deflating. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you. 왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 419). 왘 Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt. 왘 Check the tire. 왘 Check and correct the tire inflation pressure as required. 왘 If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 419). Tire pressure, FL Check tire Warning! G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. The left front tire inflation pressure is low. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. 395 Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution H Caution Tire pres., FR The right front tire is deflating. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you. 왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 419). 왘 Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt. 왘 Check the tire. 왘 Check and correct the tire inflation pressure as required. 왘 If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 419). Tire pressure, FR Check tire Warning! G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. 396 The right front tire inflation pressure is low. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution < Seat belt system Drive to workshop The seat belt system is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. 9 Service memory full See Operator’s Manual The maintenance system service memory cannot save any more data. 왘 Have the service memory checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Close Sunroof You have opened the driver’s door with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch and the tilt/sliding sunroof open. 왘 Close the tilt/sliding sunroof (컄 page 225). Close Sunroof You have opened the driver’s door with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch and the tilt/sliding sunroof open. 왘 Close the tilt/sliding sunroof (컄 page 225). K J 397 Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution L Tele Aid malfunction Drive to workshop One or more main functions of the Tele Aid system are malfunctioning. 왘 Have the Tele Aid system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 1 Restraint system malfunction Drive to workshop The system is malfunctioning. 왘 Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Warning! G In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be operational. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz 398 Center immediately to have the system checked; otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury. Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Function unavailable This display appears if button t or s on the multifunction steering wheel is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped with a telephone. & Tailgate open This message will appear whenever the tailgate is open. 왘 Close the tailgate. W Washer fluid, please refill The fluid level has dropped to about 1/3 of total reservoir capacity. 왘 Add washer fluid (컄 page 306). t Possible solution 399 Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution @ Vehicle rising Your vehicle is adjusting to your level selection. Leveling cancelled The “Raised” level setting is canceled at vehicle speeds of over 75 mph (120 km/h). 왘 Stop, car too low The vehicle level control is malfunctioning. Avoid excessive steering input. The fender or tires could otherwise be damaged. Listen for scraping noises. Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). 왘 Reactivate the “Raised” level setting. Drive to the side of the road and select a higher vehicle level. Depending on the type of malfunction, this may raise the vehicle’s level. There is otherwise danger of an accident. Visit workshop 400 The system is functional only to a limited extent. 왘 Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). The system display or the system is malfunctioning. 왘 Have the vehicle checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Practical hints Where will I find ...? 왔 Where will I find ...? First aid kit Vehicle tool kit, jack and spare wheel The first aid kit is in the storage compartment at the front edge of the front passenger seat. The vehicle tool kit is located in the cargo compartment underneath the third row seat cushions and footwell. 1 Release handle 2 Footwell 1 Tab 왘 Pull tab 1 upward. 왘 Fold the covering forward. 왘 Remove the first aid kit. i Check expiration dates and contents for completeness at least once a year and replace missing/expired items. 1 Release handle for seat backrest 2 Release handle for seat cushion 왘 왘 Pull release handle 1 and fold seat backrest for the folding bench seat upward. Pull release handle 2, fold seat cushion upward and remove it (컄 page 136). 왘 Pull release handle 1 and fold footwell 2 up. 왘 To lock, fold footwell 2 back into its original position and press it down until it engages. i In order to access the vehicle tool kit, you must first detach the side cover. 401 Practical hints Where will I find ...? Minispare wheel Warning! 1 Handle 2 Cover 왘 Turn handle 1 to the right as far as it will go and remove cover 2. Spare wheel The spare wheel is located in the cargo compartment underneath the third row seat cushions and footwell. To access the spare wheel, fold seat cushions and footwell up (컄 page 401). 402 1 Vehicle tool kit Wheel bolt wrench and Jack 2 Spare wheel 3 Luggage bowl Removing the spare wheel 왘 Turn luggage bowl counterclockwise. 왘 Remove spare wheel 2. Storing the spare wheel 왘 Place spare wheel 2 in wheel well. 왘 Turn luggage bowl clockwise to its stop to secure the spare wheel. G The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are different from those of the road wheels. As a result, the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a Minispare wheel mounted. The Minispare wheel should only be used temporarily, and replaced with a regular road wheel as quickly as possible. In the case of a flat tire, you may temporarily use the Minispare wheel when observing the following restrictions: 앫 Do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80km/h). 앫 Drive to the nearest tire repair facility to have the flat tire repaired or replaced as appropriate. 앫 Do not operate vehicle with more than one spare wheel mounted. Practical hints Where will I find ...? More information can be found in the “Technical data” section (컄 page 446). Vehicle tool kit Setting up the collapsible wheel chock 왘 Tilt both plates upward 1. The collapsible wheel chock serves to additionally secure the vehicle, e.g. while changing the wheel. 왘 Fold the lower plate outward 2. 왘 Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the way into the openings of the base plate 3. The vehicle tool kit is stored in the compartment underneath the cargo compartment floor (컄 page 402). The vehicle tool kit includes: 앫 One pair of universal pliers 앫 One towing eye bolt 앫 One wheel wrench 앫 One alignment bolt 앫 One fuse extractor 앫 Spare fuses 앫 Collapsible wheel chock 앫 A pair of gloves 1 Tilt the plates upward 2 Fold the lower plate outward 3 Insert the plate 403 Practical hints Unlocking/locking in an emergency Unlocking the driver’s door Unlocking the vehicle If you are unable to unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey, open the driver’s door using the mechanical key. i Unlocking driver’s door and/or the trunk with the mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch. 404 1 Mechanical key locking tab 2 Mechanical key 왘 Move locking tab 1 in the direction of the arrow and slide mechanical key 2 out of the housing. 3 Unlocking 4 Locking 왘 Unlock the door with the mechanical key. To do so, push the mechanical key in the lock until it stops and turn it to the left. Practical hints Unlocking/locking in an emergency Locking the vehicle Fuel filler flap emergency release If you are unable to lock the vehicle with the SmartKey, lock it with the mechanical key as follows: 왘 In the case of power failure, the transmission selector lever can be manually unlocked, e.g. to tow the vehicle. Close the passenger doors and the tailgate. 왘 Press the central locking switch in the cockpit (컄 page 123). 왘 Check to see whether the locking knobs on the passenger doors are still visible. If necessary, push them down manually. 왘 Slide mechanical key 2 out of the SmartKey. 왘 Lock the driver’s door with the mechanical key. Manually unlocking the gear selector lever Depending on production date, your vehicle is equipped with cup holders in either the center console or in the center armrest. 1 Release knob 왘 Remove right-side tail trim. 왘 Turn release knob 1 clockwise (arrow). Cup holder in the center console The fuel filler flap can know be opened. 1 Pin 405 Practical hints Unlocking/locking in an emergency 왘 Open the storage compartment in the center console (컄 page 263). 왘 Take out the cup holder (컄 page 263). 왘 Hold the cover at a 45° angle. 왘 Insert a suitable object 1 (e.g. a pin) through the hole and press the pin downward. 왘 Remove pin 1. i The selector lever is locked again when moving it to position P. Cup holder in the center armrest 1 Pin 왘 Open the storage compartment in the center armrest (컄 page 263). 왘 Take out the cup holder (컄 page 263). 왘 Insert a suitable object 1 (e.g. a pin) through the hole and press the pin downward. 왘 Remove pin 1. i The selector lever is locked again when moving it to position P. 406 Practical hints Opening/closing in an emergency 왔 Opening/closing in an emergency i Tilt/sliding sunroof* 왘 Do not disconnect the electrical connectors. You can open or close the tilt/sliding sunroof or manually should an electrical malfunction occur. 왘 The tilt/sliding sunroof drive is located behind cover 1 of the interior overhead light. Turn crank 3 clockwise to: 앫 slide sunroof closed 앫 raise sunroof at the rear Turn crank 3 counterclockwise to: 앫 slide sunroof open 앫 lower sunroof at the rear i Turn crank 3 slowly and smoothly. The tilt/sliding sunroof or must be resynchronized after being operated manually (컄 page 227). 2 Hole 3 Crank 1 Cover 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. 왘 Press on cover 1 in direction of the arrow to release it. 왘 Take crank 3 out of the glove box. 왘 Insert crank 3 through hole 2. 407 Practical hints Replacing SmartKey batteries If the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged, the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked. It is recommended to have the batteries replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Warning! G Keep the batteries out of reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help immediately. Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling. i When inserting the batteries, make sure they are clean and free of lint. i SmartKey Replacement batteries: Lithium, type CR 2025 or equivalent. 왘 When replacing batteries, always replace both batteries. Remove the mechanical key 1 (컄 page 408). The required replacement batteries are available at any Mercedes-Benz Center. 1 Mechanical key 2 Battery compartment 왘 Insert the mechanical key 1 in side opening and push gray slide. Battery compartment 2 is unlatched. 408 왘 Pull battery compartment 2 out of the housing in direction of arrow. 왘 Remove the batteries. Practical hints Replacing SmartKey batteries SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 왘 Pull battery compartment out of the housing in direction of arrow. Replacement batteries: Lithium, type CR 2025 or equivalent. 왘 Using mechanical key 3 apply pressure to position 2. 왘 Remove mechanical key (컄 page 408). 3 Battery 4 Contact spring 왘 Using a lint-free cloth, insert new batteries under the contact spring with the plus (+) side facing up. 왘 Return battery compartment into housing until it locks into place. Battery 1 tilts up slightly. 왘 Pull out batteries 1 in direction of arrow. 왘 Using a lint-free cloth, insert new batteries with the plus (+) side facing up. 왘 Return battery compartment into housing until it locks into place. 1 Battery 2 Tilt battery up 3 Mechanical key 왘 Insert the mechanical key 3 in side opening and push grey slide. Battery compartment is unlatched. 409 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Bulbs Safe vehicle operation depends on proper exterior lighting and signaling. It is therefore essential that all bulbs and lamp assemblies are in good working order at all times. Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important. Have headlamps checked and readjusted at regular intervals and when a bulb has been replaced. See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp adjustment. 410 i i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are fogged up on the inside as a result of high humidity, driving the vehicle a distance with the lights on should clear up the fogging. Substitute bulbs will be brought into use when lamps malfunction. Observe the messages in the multifunction display (컄 page 386). Practical hints Replacing bulbs Front lamps Lamp Rear lamps Type Lamp Type 1 Additional turn signal lamps LED 7 High mounted brake lamp LED 2 Turn signal lamp 1156 NA 8 Brake lamp 3 Side marker lamp W5W HiP LED* 4 Halogen headlamps: Low beam H7 (55 W) Bi-Xenon* headlamps: Low and high beam1 D2S-35 W 5 Halogen headlamps: High beam/high beam flasher H7 (55 W) Turn signal lamp HiP Tail, parking, standing and side marker lamp HiP Rear fog lamp (driver’s HiP side) 9 License plate lamps C5W Bi-Xenon* headlamps: High beam flasher H7 (55 W) Parking and standing lamps 6 Front fog lamp 1 W5W H1 (55 W) Vehicles with Bi-Xenon* headlamps: Low beam and high beam use the same D2S-35W lamp. Do not replace the Bi-Xenon bulbs yourself. See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 411 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Warning! G Notes on bulb replacement 앫 Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allow the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb. Only use 12 volt bulbs of the same type and with the specified watt rating. 앫 Switch lights off before changing a bulb to prevent short circuits. Keep bulbs out of reach of children. 앫 Always use a clean lint-free cloth when handling bulbs. Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A bulb can explode if you: 앫 touch or move it when hot 앫 drop the bulb 앫 scratch the bulb Wear eye and hand protection. Because of high voltage in Bi-Xenon* lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician. 412 앫 Your hands should be dry and free of oil and grease. 앫 If the newly installed bulb does not light up, visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 앫 Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following lamps replaced by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: 앫 Additional turn signals in the exterior rear view mirrors 앫 High mounted brake lamp 앫 Bi-Xenon* lamps 앫 Front fog lamps 앫 Rear lamps (except license plate lamps) i Have the headlamp adjustment checked regularly. Practical hints Replacing bulbs Replacing bulbs for front lamps Warning! G Do not remove the cover 3 for the Bi-Xenon* headlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenon* lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician. 1 Bulb socket for high beam headlamp/high beam flasher bulb 2 Bulb socket for parking and standing lamp bulb 3 Housing cover for low beam/Bi-Xenon* headlamp 4 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp bulb 5 Electrical connector for high beam headlamp/high beam flasher bulb 6 Bulb socket for parking and standing lamp bulb 7 Electrical connector for low beam headlamp bulb (halogen headlamps only) Before you start to replace a bulb for a front lamp, do the following first: 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to position M (컄 page 141). 왘 Open the hood (컄 page 299) (except for side marker lamps). 413 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Low beam bulb (halogen headlamps only) 왘 Turn housing cover 3 counterclockwise and remove it. 왘 Pull electrical connector 7 off. 왘 Unclip the retainer spring on the bulb socket and take out the bulb. 왘 Insert the new bulb so that its base locates in the recess on the lower left and is level to it. High beam bulb/high beam flasher bulb (halogen headlamps)/high beam flasher bulb (Bi-Xenon* headlamps) 왘 Turn bulb socket 4 with the bulb counterclockwise and remove it. 왘 Press gently onto the bulb and turn counterclockwise out of bulb socket 4. 왘 Turn bulb socket 1 with the bulb counterclockwise and remove it. 왘 Pull electrical connector 5 off. 왘 Press gently onto the bulb and turn counterclockwise out of bulb socket 1. 왘 Press the new bulb gently into bulb socket 4 and turn clockwise until it engages. 왘 Press the new bulb gently into bulb socket 1 and turn clockwise until it engages. 왘 Place bulb socket 4 back into the lamp and turn it clockwise. Plug electrical connector 5 onto the bulb. 왘 Clip on the retainer spring. 왘 Plug electrical connector 7 onto the bulb. 왘 왘 Align housing cover 3 and turn it clockwise. 왘 414 Front turn signal lamp bulb Place bulb socket 1 back into the lamp and turn it clockwise. Parking and standing lamp bulb 왘 Pull out bulb socket 6 with the bulb. 왘 Press gently onto the bulb and turn counterclockwise out of bulb socket 6. 왘 Press the new bulb gently into bulb socket 6 and turn clockwise until it engages. 왘 Press bulb socket 6 back into the lamp. Practical hints Replacing bulbs Side marker lamp bulb Replacing bulbs for rear lamps License plate lamp Tail lamp assemblies The tail lamps are equipped with HiP bulbs. Warning! 왘 Carefully slide the lamp towards the front in direction of arrows. 왘 Remove the rear end first. 왘 Turn the bulb socket with the bulb counterclockwise and remove it. 왘 Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket. 왘 Insert the new bulb into the bulb socket. 왘 Place the bulb socket back into the lamp and turn it clockwise. 왘 To reinstall the lamp, set the front end in the bumper and let the rear end engage. G The bulbs in the tail lamps cannot be replaced individually. The tail lamp bulbs are under pressure and could explode during an attempt to replace them. If the tail lamps are malfunctioning, have them exchanged at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 1 Screw 왘 Switch off the lights. 왘 Loosen both screws 1 and remove lamp. 왘 Replace the tubular lamp and reinstall lamp. 왘 Retighten the screws. 415 Practical hints Replacing wiper blades ! To avoid damage to the hood, the wiper arms should only be folded forward when in the vertical position. Removing wiper blades 왘 Turn SmartKey in starter switch to position 1. 왘 Turn combination switch to wiper setting II (컄 page 52). 왘 With wiper arm in the vertical position, turn SmartKey in starter switch to position 0. Warning! G For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the vehicle's on-board electronics have status 0) before replacing a wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury. 416 왘 Fold the wiper arm forward until it snaps into place. 왘 Turn the wiper blade at a right angle to wiper arm. 왘 Slide the wiper blade sideways out of the retainer. Practical hints Replacing wiper blades Installing wiper blades ! 왘 Slide the wiper blade onto wiper arm until it locks in place. Never open the hood when the wiper arm is folded forward. 왘 Rotate the wiper blade into position parallel to wiper arm. 왘 Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the windshield. Make sure you hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back. Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back. If released, the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield. Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the windshield glass without a wiper blade inserted. Make certain that the wiper blades are properly installed. Improperly installed wiper blades may cause windshield damage. For your convenience, we recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 417 Practical hints Flat tire Warning! G The dimensions of the Minispare wheel and the collapsible tire are different from those of the road wheels. As a result, the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a spare wheel mounted. The spare wheel should only be used temporarily, and replaced with a regular road wheel as quickly as possible. In the case of a flat tire, you may temporarily use the spare wheel when observing the following restrictions: 앫 Do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). 앫 Drive to the nearest tire repair facility to have the flat tire repaired or replaced as appropriate. 앫 Do not operate vehicle with more than one spare wheel mounted. 418 Preparing the vehicle 왘 Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving traffic on a hard surface. 왘 Turn on the hazard warning flashers. 왘 Engage the steering wheel lock in the straight-ahead position and set the parking brake. 왘 Move the selector lever to P. Vehicles with SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*: 왘 Turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button on the gear selector lever once (컄 page 59). 왘 Open the driver’s door (this puts the ignition in position 0, same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch). The driver’s door then can be closed again. Vehicles with SmartKey: 왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 57). 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. i Open door only when conditions are safe to do so. 왘 Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the roadway. Practical hints Flat tire Mounting the spare wheel When changing wheel on a hill: 왘 Preparing the vehicle Prepare the vehicle as described under “Preparing the vehicle” on this page. 왘 Take the spare wheel out of the cargo compartment (컄 page 402). 왘 Take the wheel wrench and the jack out of the cargo compartment (컄 page 402). Lifting the vehicle 왘 Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking wheels with wheel chocks or other sizable objects. When changing wheel on a level surface: 왘 Place one chock in front of and one behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed. Place chocks on the downhill side blocking both wheels of the other axle. Warning! G The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built into either side of the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack. 왘 On wheel to be changed, loosen but do not yet remove the wheel bolts (approximately one full turn with wrench). Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack on level surface. Be sure that the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle. 419 Practical hints Flat tire The jack take-up brackets are located directly behind the front wheel housing and in front of the rear wheel housing. Warning! G Position the jack only on the jack take-up brackets designed for this purpose. If the jack is not properly positioned, the vehicle may slip off of the jack. Warning! 1 Jack take-up bracket 2 Jack 3 Crank 왘 Position jack 2 on firm ground under the respective jack take-up bracket 1. 420 Make sure the foot of the jack is directly under the take-up bracket so that it is always vertical (plumb-line) as seen from the side, even if the vehicle is parked on an incline. 왘 Turn crank 3 until the tire is a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground. Never start engine while vehicle is raised. G The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited for performing maintenance work under the vehicle. Never lie down under the raised vehicle. Do not start the engine when the vehicle is raised. Practical hints Flat tire Removing the wheel Mounting the Minispare wheel 왘 왘 왘 Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub. Guide the spare wheel onto the alignment bolt and push it on. Insert wheel bolts and tighten them slightly. ! 1 Alignment bolt 왘 Unscrew the upper-most wheel bolt and remove. 왘 Replace this wheel bolt with alignment bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit. 왘 Remove the remaining bolts. To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat against hub and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt. Warning! G Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted. Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts. Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately. Do not continue to drive under these circumstances! Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call Roadside Assistance. Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off. This could cause an accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel bolts. ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. This could result in damage to the bolt and wheel hub threads. 왘 Remove the wheel. 421 Practical hints Flat tire Warning! G Warning! Use only genuine equipment Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. They are identified by the Mercedes star. Other wheel bolts may come loose. G The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are different from those of the road wheels. As a result, the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a Minispare wheel mounted. Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could tip over. Lowering the vehicle 왘 Lower vehicle by turning crank counterclockwise until vehicle is resting fully on its own weight. 왘 Remove the jack. The spare wheel should only be used temporarily, and replaced with a regular road wheel as quickly as possible. In the case of a flat tire, you may temporarily use the Minispare wheel when observing the following restrictions: 왘 Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last wheel bolt and tighten slightly. 422 앫 Do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). 앫 Drive to the nearest tire repair facility to have the flat tire repaired or replaced as appropriate. 앫 Do not operate vehicle with more than one spare wheel mounted. 1 - 5 Wheel bolts 왘 Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, following the diagonal sequence illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight. Observe a tightening torque of 96 lb-ft (130 Nm). Practical hints Flat tire Warning! G Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel. The wheels could come loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 96 lb-ft (130 Nm). 왘 Before storing the jack in the cargo compartment, it should be fully collapsed. i Wrap the damaged wheel in the protective film that comes with the spare wheel and put the wheel in the cargo compartment. Do not activate the tire inflation pressure monitor until the depressurized tire is no longer in the vehicle. 423 Practical hints Batteries i Your vehicle is equipped with two batteries: 앫 Main battery (battery for starter and electrical consumers; located in the cargo compartment). 앫 Auxiliary battery (back-up battery; stabilizes the electrical system if the main battery is discharged; located in the engine compartment). The battery is located on the right-hand side under a cover. 1 Negative terminal 2 Positive terminal Warning! 왘 G Pull cover up and detach it. Jump starting must only be done using the designated terminal connections in the engine compartment (컄 page 429). 424 Practical hints Batteries Warning! G Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death. Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries (컄 page 305). Never lean over batteries while connecting, you might get injured. Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary. A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking etc. ! Never loosen or detach battery terminal clamps while the engine is running or the SmartKey is in the starter switch. Otherwise the alternator and other electronic components could be severely damaged. Have the battery checked regularly by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for maintenance intervals or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. Warning! G Do not place metal objects on the battery as this could result in a short circuit. Warning! G The SBC brake system requires electrical power to operate. A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. The same applies if battery is disconnected. To brake, the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes may only be applied to the front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! Adjust your driving style accordingly. For more information, refer to “SBC brake system” (컄 page 92). Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk of acid burns in the event of an accident. 425 Practical hints Batteries 왘 Disconnecting the battery Remove SmartKey from starter switch. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Warning! G With a disconnected battery 앫 앫 you will no longer be able to turn the SmartKey in the starter switch and pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button on the gear selector lever will have no effect the gear selector lever will remain locked in position P 왘 Depress parking brake firmly or move gear selector lever to position P. 왘 Turn off all electrical consumers. 426 왘 Press the start/stop button until the engine shuts off. 왘 Open the driver’s door. 왘 Open the tailgate. 왘 Read and observe safety instructions and precautions (컄 page 425). 왘 Access the cargo compartment underneath the third row seat cushions and footwell (컄 page 401). 왘 Remove cover to access battery (컄 page 424). 왘 Disconnect battery negative lead 1. 왘 Remove cover 2 from the positive terminal. 왘 Disconnect the battery positive lead. Removing the battery 왘 Remove the screw-nuts securing the battery. 왘 Remove the battery bracket. 왘 Take out the battery. Practical hints Batteries Charging and reinstalling the battery Warning! 왘 G Reinstall the charged battery. Follow the previously described steps in reverse order. Reconnecting the battery Never charge a battery while still installed in the vehicle unless the accessory battery charge unit* approved by Mercedes-Benz is being used. Gases may escape during charging and cause explosions that may result in paint damage, corrosion or personal injury. An accessory battery charge unit* specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available, permitting the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information and availability. Charge battery in accordance with the instructions for the accessory battery charger*. 왘 Charge battery in accordance with the instructions of the battery charger manufacturer. i The following procedures must be carried out following any interruption of battery power (e.g. due to reconnection): 왘 Turn off all electrical consumers. 앫 왘 Connect the positive lead and fasten its cover. Set the clock (컄 page 167) (see COMAND operator’s manual). 앫 Resynchronize the ESP (컄 page 367). 앫 Resynchronize the side windows (컄 page 223). 앫 Resynchronize the tilt/sliding sunroof* (컄 page 227). 왘 Connect the negative lead. ! Never invert the terminal connections! ! The battery, its filler caps and the vent tube must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation. Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Large 12 volt storage batteries contain lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling. 427 Practical hints Jump starting Warning! G Failure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components, and can lead to a battery explosion and severe injury or death. Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting, you might get injured. Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary. A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and very explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking, etc. Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can result in it exploding, causing personal injury. Read all instructions before proceeding. 428 If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started with jumper cables and the battery of another vehicle. Observe the following: 앫 ! Jump starting of the main battery must only be done using the designated jump start terminals located in the engine compartment (컄 page 429). Jump starting should only be performed when the engine and catalytic converter are cold. Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. 앫 Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw out first. Do not attempt to start the engine using a battery quick charge unit. 앫 Only jump start from batteries with the same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting with a more powerful battery could damage the vehicle’s electrical system, which will not be covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. If the engine does not run after several unsuccessful starting attempts, have it checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 앫 앫 Use only jumper cables with sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. Always make sure the jumper cables are not on or near pulleys, fans or other parts that move when the engine is started or running. Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated failed starting attempts may damage the catalytic converter. Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation. Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any other metal part while the other end is still attached to a battery. Practical hints Jump starting Warning! 왘 G i Keep flames or sparks away from battery. Do not smoke. The message Malfunction - electric consumers switched off may appear in the instrument cluster. It will disappear as soon as the battery is sufficiently charged. Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries (컄 page 305). The jump-start contacts are located in the engine compartment. 왘 Make sure the two vehicles do not touch. 왘 Turn off all electrical consumers. 왘 Apply parking brake. 왘 Shift gear selector lever to position P. ! Never invert the terminal connections! Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. 1 Negative (-) terminal 2 Cover of Positive (+) terminal 왘 Open cover 2 of the positive terminal of both vehicles. 왘 Connect positive terminal 2 and the positive terminal of the charged battery with the jumper cable. Clamp cable to charged battery first. 왘 Start engine of the vehicle with the charged battery and run at idle speed. 왘 Connect negative terminal 1 and the negative terminal of the charged battery with the jumper cable. Clamp cable to charged battery first. Now you can again turn on the electrical consumers. Do not turn on the lights under any circumstances. 왘 Remove the jumper cables first from negative terminals 1 and then from the positive terminals 2. Now you can turn on the lights. 왘 Have the battery checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ! Do not tow-start the vehicle. 429 Practical hints Towing the vehicle Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. This method is preferable to other types of towing. ! Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment with SmartKey in starter switch turned to position 0. Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Towing with sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will damage radiator and supports. To prevent damage during transport, do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts. Switch off the tow-away alarm and the automatic central locking. Do not tow-start the vehicle. 430 When circumstances do not permit the recommended towing methods, the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the ground or front wheels raised (except vehicles with 4MATIC) only so far as necessary to have the vehicle moved to a safe location where the recommended towing methods can be employed. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing so could damage the transfer case, which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels must be on or off the ground. Observe instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground. ! If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised (not permissible for vehicles with 4MATIC), the engine must be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1). Otherwise the ESP will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes. When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, the selector lever must be in position N and the SmartKey must be in starter switch position 2. When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground or the front axle raised, the vehicle may be towed only for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Practical hints Towing the vehicle ! To be certain to avoid a possibility of damage to the drive train, however, we recommend the drive shaft be disconnected at the rear axle drive flange (vehicles with 4MATIC: disconnected at the front and rear axle drive flanges) for any towing beyond a short tow to a nearby garage. Warning! G If circumstances require towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, always tow with a tow bar if: 앫 the engine will not run 앫 there is a malfunction in the SBC brake system 앫 there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle’s electrical system as that will be necessary to adequately control the towed vehicle. Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, make sure the SmartKey is in starter switch position 2. If the SmartKey is left in the starter switch position 0 for an extended period of time, it can no longer be turned in the switch. In this case, the steering is locked. To unlock, remove SmartKey from starter switch and reinsert. Warning! G The brake system requires electrical power to operate. A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. To brake, the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes may only be applied to the front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! Adapt your driving style accordingly. For more information, refer to “SBC brake system” (컄 page 92). With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the steering system. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly. 431 Practical hints Towing the vehicle i ! i To signal turns while being towed with the hazard warning flasher in use, turn SmartKey in starter switch to position 2 and activate the combination switch for the left or right turn signal in the usual manner – only the selected turn signal will operate. When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, please note the following: The selector lever will remain locked in position P and the SmartKey will not turn in the starter switch if the battery is disconnected or discharged. For more information, see “Battery” (컄 page 424) and “Jump starting” (컄 page 428). Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning flasher will operate again. With the automatic central locking activated and the SmartKey in starter switch position 2, or KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in position 2, the vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel as well as the right rear wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. Switch off the tow-away alarm (컄 page 99). To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking, deactivate the automatic central locking (컄 page 122). Towing of the vehicle should only be done using the properly installed towing eye bolt. Never attach tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis, frame or suspension parts. 432 For information on manual unlocking of the transmission selector lever, see (컄 page 405). Practical hints Towing the vehicle Installing towing eye bolt To remove cover: 왘 Press mark on cover in direction of arrow. 왘 Lift cover off to reveal threaded hole for towing eye bolt. Front of vehicle Rear of vehicle The towing eye bolt is supplied with the tool kit (located in the storage compartment under the cargo compartment floor). 왘 Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and tighten with lug wrench. To reinstall cover: 1 Cover on right side of front bumper 왘 Fit cover and snap into place. 2 Cover on right side of rear bumper To remove cover: 왘 Pull cover in the direction of the arrow. 왘 Fold cover down to reveal threaded hole for the towing eye bolt. The towing eye bolt is supplied with the tool kit (located in the storage compartment under the cargo compartment floor). 왘 Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and tighten with lug wrench. To reinstall cover: 왘 Fit cover and snap into place. 433 Practical hints Fuses Fuses are designed to protect the electrical circuits in your vehicle from a short circuit. If a fuse is blown, the component(s) and systems controlled by that fuse will stop working. ! Aids for replacing fuses Only install fuses that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz and that have the specified amperage rating. Fuse chart The following aids are available to help you change fuses (컄 page 434): Otherwise, electrical parts or systems could be damaged. 앫 Fuse chart 앫 Spare fuses 앫 Fuse extractor Warning! Never attempt to repair or bridge a blown fuse. Have the cause determined and remedied by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. G Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz and which have the specified amperage rating. Using other fuses may cause an overload and lead to a fire, or cause damage to electrical components and/or systems. 434 The electrical fuses are located in different fuse boxes: 앫 Fuse box in passenger compartment (컄 page 435) 앫 Fuse box in cargo compartment (컄 page 435) The fuse chart is found in the fuse box in the passenger compartment (컄 page 435). The amperages of the fuses are also given there. Spare fuses Spare fuses are found in the vehicle tool kit in the cargo compartment (컄 page 403). Fuse extractor The fuse extractor is found in the vehicle tool kit in the cargo compartment (컄 page 403). Practical hints Fuses Fuse box in passenger compartment 왘 Loosen cover 2 from the dashboard using lever. 왘 Using your hands, pull cover 2 in the direction of the arrow and remove. Closing 1 Recess in the cover 2 Cover ! Do not use sharp objects such as a screw driver to open the fuse box cover 2 in the dashboard, as this could damage it. 왘 Hook cover 2 into the opening at the front. 왘 Press cover 2 back on until it engages. Fuse box in cargo compartment The fuse box is located in the cargo compartment behind the left-hand trim panel. 1 Trim panel 2 Button for unlocking trim panel Opening trim panel 왘 Press button 2. 왘 Fold down trim panel 1. Closing trim panel 왘 Fold up trim panel 1. Opening 왘 Open the driver’s door. 왘 Insert flat, blunt object as a lever in recess 1 on the edge of cover 2. 435 436 Technical data Parts service Warranty coverage Identification labels Layout of poly-V-belt drive Engine Rims and tires Electrical system Main dimensions Weights Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 437 Technical data Parts service The “Technical data” section provides the necessary technical data for your vehicle. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a stock of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts required for maintenance and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts service. More than 300 000 different parts for Mercedes-Benz models are available. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subjected to stringent quality inspections. Each part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Therefore, genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should be installed. 438 ! The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz parts and accessories not authorized by Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle, which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or could compromise the vehicle’s durability or safety. Technical data Warranty coverage 왔 Warranty coverage Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the warranties printed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the following warranties: 앫 New Car Limited Warranty 앫 Emission System Warranty 앫 Emission Performance Warranty 앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories Warranties, copies of which are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information Booklet, have your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you. 439 Technical data Identification labels 1 Driver’s door B-pillar with Certification labels (includes Paintwork code) 2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 3 Vacuum line routing diagram label 4 Engine number (engraved on engine) 5 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) (lower edge of windshield) 6 Emission control information label, includes both federal and California certification exhaust emission standards i When ordering parts, please specify vehicle identification and engine numbers. 440 Technical data Layout of poly-V-belt drive 왔 Layout of poly-V-belt drive E 320/E 500 1 Automatic belt tensioner 2 Power steering pump 3 Air conditioning compressor 4 Crankshaft 5 Coolant pump 6 Generator (alternator) 7 Idler pulley 441 Technical data Engine E 320 (211.2651) E 5002 (211.2701) E 320 4MATIC (211.2821) E 500 4MATIC (211.2831) Engine 112 113 Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection No. of cylinders 6 8 Bore 3.54 in (89.90 mm) 3.82 in (97.00 mm) Stroke 3.31 in (84.00 mm) Model 3.31 in (84.00 mm) 3 Total piston displacement 195.2 cu.in. (3199 cm ) 303.0 cu.in. (4966 cm3) Compression ratio 10:1 10:1 Output acc. to SAE J 1349 221 hp/5600 rpm (165 kW/5600 rpm) 302 hp/5600 rpm 3 (225 kW/5600 rpm) Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 232 lb-ft/3000 rpm - 4800 rpm (315 Nm/3000 rpm - 4800 rpm) 339 lb-ft/2700 rpm - 4250 rpm (460 Nm/2700 rpm - 4250 rpm) Maximum engine speed 6000 rpm 6000 rpm Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8 Poly-V-belt 2390 mm 2390 mm 1 3 The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment. Not available in the U.S. 3 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating. 2 442 Technical data Rims and tires 왔 Rims and tires Use only tires and rims which have been specifically developed for your vehicle and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Other tires and rims can have detrimental effects, such as: 앫 Poor handling characteristics 앫 Increased noise 앫 Increased fuel consumption ! i Moreover, tires and rims not approved by Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit dimensional variations and different tire deformation characteristics that could cause them to come into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts. This may result in damage to the tires or the vehicle. Further information on tires and rims is available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. A placard with the recommended tire inflation pressures is located on the on the driver’s door B-pillar. Some vehicles may have supplemental tire pressure information for driving at high speeds (컄 page 317) or for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. If such information is provided, it can be found on the placard located on the fuel filler flap. The tire pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires. Follow the tire manufacturer’s maintenance recommendation included with the vehicle. 443 Technical data Rims and tires Same size tires 16’’ tires E 320/E 320 4MATIC Rims (light alloy) 8 J x 16 H2 Wheel offset 1.42 in (36 mm) Summer tires (radial-ply tires) - All-season tires (radial-ply tires) 225/55 R16 95H M+S Winter tires (radial-ply tires) - 17’’ tires E 320/E 5001 (Appearance Package*) E 500 1/E 500 4MATIC E 320 4MATIC E 500 4MATIC (Appearance Package*) Rims (light alloy) 8 J x 17 H2 8 J x 17 H2 8 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset 1.5 in (38 mm) 1.5 in (38 mm) 1.5 in (38 mm) Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 245/45 R17 95H - - All-season tires (radial-ply tires) - 245/45 R17 95H M+S 245/45 R17 95H M+S Winter tires (radial-ply tires) 245/45 R17 95H M+S 245/45 R17 95H M+S 245/45 R17 95H M+S 1 Not available in the U.S. 444 Technical data Rims and tires 18’’ tires E 320 4MATIC (Sport Package*) E 500 4MATIC (Sport Package*) AMG light alloy rims 8 J x 18 EH2 Wheel offset 1.18 in (30 mm) Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 245/40 R18 97Y XL (Extra Load) All-season tires (radial-ply tires) - Winter tires (radial-ply tires) - Mixed size tires E 320/E 5001 (Sport Package*) Front axle: AMG light alloy rims Rear axle: 1 2 8 J x 18 EH2 Wheel offset 1.18 in (30 mm) Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 245/40 ZR18 AMG light alloy rims 9 J x 18 EH2 Wheel offset 1.54 in (39 mm) Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 265/35 ZR18 XL (Extra Load) M02 Not available in the U.S. Must not be used with snow chains. 445 Technical data Rims and tires Minispare wheel E 320/E 320 4MATIC E 500 1/E 500 4MATIC Rim 4 B x 17 Wheel offset 1.34 (34 mm) Tire T 155/70 R17 110 M2 1 2 Not available in the U.S. Must not be used with snow chains. i Please note that the tire pressure of the Minispare differs from the tire pressure of the road tires. Make sure the Minispare wheel is inflated to approx. 61 psi (4.2 bar). 446 Technical data Electrical system 왔 Electrical system Model E 320/E 320 4MATIC E 5001 /E 500 4MATIC Generator (alternator) 14 V/150 A 14 V/150 A Starter motor 14 V/1.4 kW 14 V/1.7 kW Battery (auxiliary) 12 V/12 Ah 12 V/12 Ah Battery (main) 12 V/95 Ah 12 V/95 Ah Spark plugs Bosch F8 DPP 332U NGK PFR 5R-11 Bosch F8 DPP 332U NGK PFR 5R-11 Electrode gap 0.039 in (1.00 mm) 0.039 in (1.00 mm) Tightening torque 18.5 - 22 lb-ft (25 - 30 Nm) 18.5 - 22 lb-ft (25 - 30 Nm) 1 Not available in the U.S. 447 Technical data Main dimensions Model E 320/E 320 4MATIC E 5001 /E 500 4MATIC Overall vehicle length 191.7 in (4868 mm) 191.7 in (4868 mm) Overall vehicle width 71.7 in (1822 mm) 71.7 in (1822 mm) Overall vehicle height 58.9 in (1495 mm) Overall vehicle height (Airmatic DC*) 58.5 in (1485 mm) (optional with E 320 Appearance Package*; standard on E 500) 58.5 in (1485 mm) Wheelbase 112.4 in (2854 mm) 112.4 in (2854 mm) Track, front 61.4 in (1559 mm) 61.7 in (1567 mm) Track, rear 61.1 in (1552 mm) 61.4 in (1560 mm) 1 not available in the U.S. 448 Technical data Weights 왔 Weights Roof load max. 220 lbs (100 kg) 449 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. Vehicle components and their respective lubricants must match. Therefore use only products tested and approved by us. Capacities Engine with oil filter Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products Pamphlet, or inquire at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. E 320 / E 320 4MATIC 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) Approved engine oils 1 E 500 / E 500 4MATIC Automatic transmission 8.0 US qt (7.5 l) 8.0 US qt (7.5 l) MB Automatic Transmission Fluid Front axle E 320 4MATIC / E 500 4MATIC 0.63 US qt (0.6 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90 Rear axle E 320 / E 320 4MATIC 1.06 US qt (1 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90 1 Transfer case 1 Not available in the U.S. 450 E 500 / E 500 4MATIC 1.37 US qt (1.3 l) E 320 4MATIC / E 500 4MATIC 0.62 US qt (0.585 l) MB Transfer Case Fluid Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. Power steering approx. 1.1 US qt (1 l) MB Power Steering Fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S) Front wheel hubs approx. 3.0 oz (85 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease Brake system 1.1 US qt (1.05 l) MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+) 10.7 US qt (10 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze Cooling system E 320 / E 320 4MATIC 1 E 500 / E 500 4MATIC Fuel tank including a reserve of 1 11.9 US qt (11.3 l) 21.12 US gal (80.0 l) 2.38 US gal (9.0 l) Premium unleaded gasoline: Minimum Posted Octane 91 (Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON) Not available in the U.S. 451 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil (never R-12) Air conditioning system Windshield washer 4.8 US qt (4.5 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system 7.4 US qt (7.0 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1 1 Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄 page 458). 452 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. Engine oils Engine oils are specifically tested for their suitability in our engines and durability for our service intervals. Therefore, only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles). For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles) will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Please follow Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles) recommendations for scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so could result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Engine oil additives Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. They may damage the engine.Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil additives are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Brake fluid During vehicle operation, the boiling point of the brake fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of moisture from the atmosphere. Under extremely strenuous operating conditions, this moisture content can lead to the formation of bubbles in the system, thus reducing the system’s efficiency. Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced every two years, preferably in the spring.Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will provide you with additional information. Air conditioning refrigerant R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning system. Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the system will occur. 453 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. Premium unleaded gasoline ! To maintain the engine’s durability and performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium unleaded gasoline is not available and low octane fuel is used, follow these precautions: Gasoline additives A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the use of quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the build-up of carbon deposits. 앫 Have the fuel tank only partially filled with unleaded regular and fill up with premium unleaded as soon as possible After an extended period of using fuels without such additives, carbon deposits can build up especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance problems such as: 앫 Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration 앫 Warm-up hesitation 앫 Do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two persons and no luggage 앫 Unstable idle 앫 Knocking/pinging 앫 Misfire 앫 Power loss 앫 454 Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous terrain In areas where carbon deposits may be encountered due to lack of availability of gasolines which contain these additives, Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of additives approved by us for use on Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Refer to Factory Approved Service Products Pamphlet for a listing of approved product(s). Follow directions on product label. Do not blend any specific fuel additives with fuel. This only results in unnecessary costs and may be harmful to the engine operation. Damage or malfunction resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives other than those tested and approved by us for use on Mercedes-Benz vehicles listed in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. Fuel requirements Use only premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D 439: 앫 The octane number (posted at the pump) must be 91 “min”. It is an average of both the Research (R) Octane Number and the Motor (M) Octane Number: (R+M)/2). This is also known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%. The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents. Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be used. These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements, such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc. Coolants The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides: 앫 Corrosion protection 앫 Freeze protection 앫 Boiling protection (by increasing the boiling point) The cooling system was filled at the factory with a coolant providing freeze protection to approximately -22°F (-30°C) and corrosion protection. If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling system is reached at approximately 266°F (130°C). The coolant solution must be used year-round to provide the necessary corrosion protection and increase boil-over protection. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval. 455 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. Coolant system design and coolant used determine the replacement interval. The replacement interval published in the Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze solution or other Mercedes-Benz approved products of equal specification (see Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet) are used to renew the coolant concentration or bring it back up to the proper level. To provide important corrosion protection, the solution must be at least 45% anticorrosion/antifreeze [equivalent to freeze protection to approximately - 22°F (-30°C)]. If you use a solution that is more than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze [freeze protection to approximately - 49°F (-45°C)], the engine temperature will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution. Therefore, do not use more than this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze. 456 If the coolant level is low, water and MB Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper level (have cooling system checked for signs of leakage). Please make sure the mixture is in accordance with label instructions. The water in the cooling system must meet minimum requirements, which are usually satisfied by normal drinking water. If you are not sure about the water quality, consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Anticorrosion/antifreeze Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the aluminum parts. (Failure to use such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service life). Therefore, the following product is strongly recommended for use in your vehicle: Mercedes-Benz 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze agent. Before the start of the winter season (or once a year in hot southern regions), you should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze concentration checked. The coolant is also regularly checked each time you bring your vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for service. Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity Model E 320/E 320 4MATIC 1 E 500 /E 500 4MATIC 1 Approx. freeze protection – 35°F (– 37°C) – 49°F (– 45°C) 5.3 US qt (5.0 l) 5.9 US qt (5.5 l) 6.0 US qt (5.65 l) 6.6 US qt (6.2 l) not available in the U.S. 457 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. Windshield and headlamp washer system Both the windshield and headlamp washer systems are supplied from the windshield washer fluid reservoir. The washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of approximately: 앫 앫 7.4 US qt. (7 l) in vehicles with a headlamp cleaning system* or heated reservoir 4.8 US qt. (4.5 l) in vehicles without a headlamp cleaning system 왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate and water (or concentrate and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures). Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio For temperatures above freezing point, use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water: 앫 Warning! G Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You can be seriously burned. 1 part “S” to100 parts water (1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “S” to 1 gallon [4 l] water) For temperatures below freezing point, use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze: 앫 1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent (1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “S” to 1 gallon [4 l] solvent) 458 Technical terms ABS (Antilock Brake System) Prevents the wheels from locking up during braking so that the vehicle can continue to be steered. Accessory weight (컄 page 332) ADS (Adaptive Damping System) Automatically adapts the optimum suspension damping to prevailing driving conditions. Air pressure (컄 page 332) Airmatic DC (Airmatic Dual Control) Automatically selects the optimum suspension tuning and ride height for your vehicle. Airmatic consists of two components: 앫 Adaptive Damping System 앫 Vehicle level control Alignment bolt Metal pin with thread. The centering pin is an aid used when changing a tire to align the wheel with the wheel hub. Aspect ratio (컄 page 332) Bar (컄 page 333) BAS (Brake Assist System) System for potentially reducing braking distances in emergency braking situations. The system is activated when it senses an emergency based on how fast the brake is applied. Bead (컄 page 333) Bi-Xenon headlamps* Headlamps which use an electric arc as a light source and produce a more intense light than filament headlamps. Bi-Xenon headlamps produce low beam and high beam. CAC (Customer Assistance Center) Mercedes-Benz customer service center which can help you with any questions about your vehicle and provide assistance in the event of a breakdown. CAN system (Controller Area Network) Data bus network serving to control vehicle functions such as door locking or windshield wiping. Cockpit All instruments, switches, buttons and indicator/warning lamps in the passenger compartment needed for vehicle operation and monitoring. Cold tire inflation pressure (컄 page 333) 459 Technical terms COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System) Information and operating center for vehicle sound and communications systems, including the radio and navigation system, as well as other optional equipment (CD changer, telephone, etc.). Control system The control system is used to call up vehicle information and to change component settings. Information and messages appear in the multifunction display. The driver uses the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel to navigate through the system and to adjust settings. Cruise control Driving convenience system for automatically maintaining the vehicle speed set by the driver. 460 Distronic* A driving convenience cruise control system which helps the driver maintain a pre-selected speed: 앫 If there is no vehicle directly ahead, the system operates in the same way as conventional ->cruise control. 앫 If a slower moving vehicle is ahead, Distronic will reduce your vehicle speed to the extent permitted by reduced throttle and up to 20% braking power to maintain the preset minimum following distance. DOT (Department of Transportation) (컄 page 333) DTR (->Distronic*) Engine number The number set by the manufacturer and placed on the cylinder block to uniquely identify each engine produced. Engine oil viscosity Measurement for the inner friction (viscosity) of the oil at different temperatures. The higher the temperature an oil can tolerate without becoming thin, or the lower the temperature it can tolerate without becoming viscous, the better the viscosity. ESP (Electronic Stability Program) Improves vehicle handling and directional stability. ETD (Emergency Tensioning Device) Device which deploys in certain frontal and rear collisions exceeding the system's threshold to tighten the seat belts. ->SRS Technical terms FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles) (Flexible Service System PLUS) Maintenance service indicator in the multifunction display that informs the driver when the next vehicle maintenance service is due. FSS evaluates engine temperature, oil level, vehicle speed, engine speed, distance driven and the time elapsed since your last service, calculates other maintenance service work required, and calls for the next maintenance service accordingly. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) (컄 page 333) Gear range Number of gears which are available to the automatic transmission for shifting. The automatic gear shifting process can be adapted to specific operating conditions using the selector lever. GPS (Global Positioning System) Satellite-based system for relaying geographic location information to and from vehicles equipped with special receivers. Employs DVD digital maps for navigation. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (컄 page 333) GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) (컄 page 333) Instrument cluster The displays and indicator/warning lamps in the driver’s field of vision, including the tachometer, speedometer and fuel gauge. KEYLESS-GO* System for entering and operating the vehicle without the use of a SmartKey. Kickdown Depressing the accelerator past the point of resistance shifts the transmission down to the lowest possible gear. This very quickly accelerates the vehicle and should not be used for normal acceleration needs. Kilopascal (kPa) (컄 page 333) Lock button Button on the door which indicates whether the door is locked or unlocked. Pushing the lock button down on an individual door from inside will lock that door. 461 Technical terms Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) Maintenance service indicator in the multifunction display that informs the driver when the next vehicle maintenance service is due. The Vehicle Maintenance System in your vehicle tracks distance driven and the time elapsed since your last maintenance service, calculates other maintenance service work required, and calls for the next maintenance service accordingly. MON (Motor Octane Number) The Motor Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized method. It is an indication of a gasoline's ability to resist undesired detonation (knocking). The average of both the MON (Motor Octane Number) and ->RON (Research Octane Number) is posted at the pump, also known as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. Maximum load rating (컄 page 333) Multifunction display The display field in the instrument cluster used to present information provided by the control system. Maximum loaded vehicle weight (컄 page 333) Maximum tire inflation pressure (컄 page 334) Multifunction steering wheel Steering wheel with buttons for operating the control system. Memory function* Used to store three individual seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror positions for each SmartKey. Normal occupant weight (컄 page 334) 462 Overspeed range Engine speeds within the red marking on the tachometer dial. Avoid this engine speed range, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Poly-V-belt drive Drives engine-components (alternator, AC compressor, etc.) from the engine. Technical terms Power train Collective term designating all components used to generate and transmit motive power to the drive axles, including: 앫 Engine 앫 Clutch/torque converter 앫 Transmission 앫 Transfer case* 앫 Drive shaft 앫 Axle shafts/axles Production options weight (컄 page 334) PSI (Pounds per square inch) (컄 page 334) Program mode selector switch Used to switch the automatic transmission between standard operation S and operation C. E 55 AMG with steering wheel gearshift control and manual shift program: in addition to S and C (for sporty S or comfortable C operation), you can use M for manual shift program. Restraint systems Seat belts, belt tensioners, air bags and child restraint systems. As independent systems, their protective functions complement one another. Rim (컄 page 334) RON (Research Octane Number) The Research Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized method. It is an indication of a gasoline's ability to resist undesired detonation (knocking). The average of both the ->MON (Motor Octane Number) and RON (Research Octane Number) is posted at the pump, also known as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. SBC (Sensotronic Brake Control) Electronically controlled hydraulic braking system for increased braking safety and comfort. Shift lock When the vehicle is parked, this lock prevents the transmission selector lever from being moved out of position P without the ignition or engine on and brake pedal depressed. 463 Technical terms SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Seat belts, emergency tensioning device and air bags. Though independent systems, they are closely interfaced to provide effective occupant protection. Tele Aid System (Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand) The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response: automatic and manual emergency, roadside assistance and information. Tele Aid is initially activated by completing a subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call. The Tele Aid system is operational provided that the vehicle’s battery is charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available. Telematics* A combination of the terms “telecommunications” and “informatics”. 464 Tightening torque Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug wrench) with which threaded fasteners such as wheel bolts are tightened. TIN (Tire Identification Number) (컄 page 334) Tire load rating (컄 page 334) Tire ply composition and material used (컄 page 334) Tire speed rating (컄 page 335) Traction (컄 page 335) Tread (컄 page 335) Treadwear indicators (컄 page 335) Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (컄 page 335) Vehicle capacity weight (컄 page 335) Vehicle level control The ground clearance of the vehicle is automatically controlled according to a selected setting and speed.The driver can set the ground clearance manually for example on very rough roads. Vehicle maximum load on the tire (컄 page 335) VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) The number set by the manufacturer and placed on the body to uniquely identify each vehicle produced. Voice control system* Voice control system for car phones, portable cell phones and audio systems (radio, CD, etc.). Index A ABS 87, 459 ABS control 87 Malfunction indicator lamp 352 Messages in display 364 Warning lamp 352 Accelerator position, automatic transmission* 189 Accessory weight 332 Accident In case of 55 Activating Air conditioning (cooling) 206, 218 Air recirculation mode 204, 216 Anti-theft alarm system 98 Automatic climate control (4-zone*) 213 Automatic climate control (Dual-zone) 201 Central locking (control system) 174 Climate control 198, 199 Defrosting 203, 215 Distance warning function* 241 Distronic* 237 Easy-entry/exit feature* 175 ESP 92 Exterior headlamps 51 Exterior lamps 142 Fog lamps 144 Hazard warning flasher 146 Headlamps 51 Ignition 34 Ignition with KEYLESS-GO* 36 Immobilizer 57, 97 Rear window defroster 195 Residual heat 207, 219 Seat heater* 132 Tow-away alarm 99 Windshield wipers 52 Activating intermitted wipe 54 Activating intermittent wipe 54 Adding Engine oil 302 Additional turn signal 411 Adjustable air vents, rear passenger compartment 219 Adjusting 38 Air distribution 214 Air volume 202, 215 Backrest tilt 39 Drive-dynamic seat* with multicontour features 130 Exterior rear view mirror 42 Head restraint height 40, 128 Head restraint tilt 40 Instrument cluster illumination 150 Interior rear view mirror 42 Mirrors 41 Rear head restraints 129 Seat cushion tilt 39 Seat fore and aft adjustment 39 Seat height 39 Seats 38 Steering column height 41 Steering wheel 40 Adjusting seat backrest position 249 Adjusting steering column in or out 41 Adjusting steering column up or down 41 Adjusting the dynamic seat 177 Air conditioning (cooling) Turning off 206, 218 Turning on 206, 218 Air distribution Adjusting 201, 214 Air pressure 332 Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure 318 465 Index Air recirculation mode 204, 216 Activating 204, 216 Deactivating 205, 217 Air vents, rear passenger compartment Adjustable 219 Air volume Adjusting 202, 215 Airbags 63 Children 64 Front 67 Passenger 67 Safety guidelines 66 Side impact 68 Window curtain 68 Airmatic DC (Dual Control)* 244 Alarm Audible 86, 99 Canceling 99 Visual 98 Alarm system Anti-theft 98 Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 403, 421, 459 Ambient lighting 149 Antilock brake system (ABS) 459 466 Anti-theft alarm system Arming 98 Canceling alarm 99 Disarming 98 Anti-theft systems 97 Anti-theft alarm system 98 Immobilizer 97 Tow-away alarm 99 Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning 289 Ashtray 265 Aspect ratio 332 At the gas station 296 AUDIO menu 158 Selecting radio station 158 Selecting satellite radio* station 159 Audio system CD mode 159 Auto-dimming mirror 191 Automatic central locking Activating/deactivating (control system) 174 Automatic climate control (4-zone*) 208 Adjusting air distribution 214 Adjusting air volume 215 Air conditioning 218 Air recirculation mode 216 Deactivating 213 Defrosting 215 Residual heat utilization 219 Residual ventilation 219 Setting the temperature 214 Automatic climate control (Dual-zone) 196 Adjusting air distribution 201 Adjusting air volume 202 Air conditioning 206 Air recirculation mode 204 Deactivating 201 Defrosting 203 Residual heat utilization 207 Residual ventilation 207 Setting the temperature 201 Automatic headlamp mode 142 Automatic lighting control Activating 147 Deactivating 147 Automatic locking when driving 122 Index Automatic transmission 183 Comfort program mode 188 Emergency operation (Limp Home Mode) 190 Gear ranges 186 Gear selector lever position 187 Gear shifting malfunctions 190 Manual shifting 185 One-touch gearshifting 185 Program mode selector switch 188 Selector lever position 183 Starting the engine 47 Automatic transmission* Accelerator position 189 Kickdown 189 B Backrest Folding forward 247 Folding rearward 248 Bar 333 BAS 89, 459 Batteries, SmartKey Changing 408, 409 Check lamp 105, 111 Checking 106, 112 Batteries, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Changing 408, 409 Batteries, vehicle Charging 427 Disconnecting 426 Reconnecting 427 Removing 426 Service 424 Battery discharged Jump starting 428 Bead 333 Belt reel 254 Bi-Xenon headlamps* 459 Block heater* 338 Blocking Rear window operation 84 Brake assist system (BAS) 459 Brake fluid 297, 377 Brake pads Message in display 375 Brakes Brake fluid 298 Warning lamp 354 Break-in period 284 Bulbs, replacing Additional turn signals 410 Fog lamps 410 Front lamps 410, 413 High beam 411 High mounted brake lamp 411 License plate lamps 411, 415 Low beam 411 Parking lamps 411 Side marker lamps 410, 415 Standing lamps 411 Tail lamp 411 Tail lamp assemblies 415 Turn signal lamp 410 C CAC (Customer Assistance Center) 459 Calling up Distronic* settings 160 Maintenance service indicator 341 Range (distance to empty) 179 CAN system 459 Cargo compartment Fuse box 435 Cargo compartment cover 257 Cargo management system* 252 Cargo net 256 467 Index Cargo tie-down rings 251 CD player Operating 159 Center console Lower part 28 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp 360 Upper part 27 Centigrade Setting temperature units 165 Central locking From inside 122 Switch 122 Switching on/off (control system) 174 Unlocking from inside 122 Central locking switch 122 Changing Batteries (SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*) 408, 409 Batteries (SmartKey) 408, 409 SmartKey setting 175 Vehicle level 246 Charging Vehicle batteries 427 468 CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator lamp 355 Checking Coolant level 303 Oil level 297, 300 Tire inflation pressure 297 Vehicle lighting 297 Child safety 73 Airbags 64 Infant and child restraint systems 69, 73 LATCH child seat anchors 83 Child safety switch see Blocking of rear window operation 84 Cigarette lighter 266 Cleaning Headlamps 191 Windshield 53 Wood trims 350 Cleaning tires 309 Clock 168 Closing Glove box 259 Power tilt /sliding sunroof* 225 Side windows 222 Tailgate Vehicle with KEYLESS-GO* 119, 121 Windows 221 Closing the tailgate 117, 119, 121 Closing the tailgate from the outside (vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*) 118 Cockpit 22, 459 Cockpit management and data system (COMAND) 460 Cold tire inflation pressure 333 Collapsible wheel chock 403 COMAND 460 COMAND* see separate operating instructions Combination switch 145 Turn signals 51 Windshield wipers 52 Comfort driving Transmission program mode 188 Index Control system 153, 460 AUDIO menu 158 Convenience submenu 175 Display digital speedometer 158 Distronic* menu 160 Functions 157 Instrument cluster submenu 165, 167 Lighting submenu 170 Menus 156, 157 Multifunction display 153 Multifunction steering wheel 154 Selecting radio system 158 Selecting satellite radio* system 159 Settings menu 162 Standard display menu 158 Submenus 155, 157 TEL* menu 179 Trip computer menu 178 Vehicle status message memory menu 161 Vehicle submenu 174 Convenience submenu 175 Activating easy-entry/exit feature* 175 Setting parking position for exterior rear view mirror 176 Setting SmartKey-dependency 176 Coolant Adding water 298 Checking level 303 Messages in display 378, 379, 380 Warning lamp 356 Coolant temperature 295 Cruise control 228, 460 Canceling 230 Driving downhill 229 Driving uphill 229 Fine adjustment 231 Lever 236 Saving current speed 229 Setting speeds 231 Cruise control lever 228 Cup holder in the center console 262, 264 Cup holders 262 Curb weight 333 Customer Assistance Center (CAC) 459 D Daytime running lamp mode 143 Setting 170 Deactivating 213 Air conditioning (cooling) 206 Air recirculation mode 205, 217 Alarm 98 Anti-theft alarm system 98 Automatic climate control (Dual-zone) 201 Central locking (control system) 174 Climate control 198, 199 Cruise control 230 Defrosting 203, 216 Distance warning function* 241 Distronic* 239 Engine with KEYLESS-GO* 59 Engine with the SmartKey 57 ESP 91 Exterior lamps 142 Hazard warning flasher 146 Headlamps 57 Immobilizer 97 Interior lighting delayed switch-off 173 Rear window defroster 195 469 Index Residual heat 207, 219 Seat heater* 132 Seat ventilation* 133 Tow-away alarm 100 Deactivating intermittent wipe 54 Deceleration With Distronic* 235 Defogging Windshield 202, 203, 215 Defrosting 203, 215 Delayed switch-off Interior lighting 173 Department of Transportation see DOT Dialing A number (telephone) 181 Difficulties While driving see Problems while driving 55 With starting 49 Digital speedometer 158 Direction of rotation (tires) 310 Discharged battery Jump starting 428 Disconnecting Vehicle battery 426 470 Display Selecting 166, 167 Displays Digital speedometer 158 Distronic* 234 Maintenance service indicator 339 Messages 301 Selecting 166 Showing malfunctions 161 Distance Decreasing in Distronic* 240 Increasing in Distronic* 240 Warning function 240 Distance to empty (range) Calling up 178 Distance warning function* 240 Activating 241 Deactivating 241 DTR* warning lamp 240 Intermittent warning sound 240 Symbol in multifunction display 160 Distronic* 232, 460 Activated 236 Activating 237 Calling up settings 160, 235 Cleaning system sensor 347 Cruise control lever 236 Deactivated 236 Deactivating 239 Deceleration 235 Decreasing distance 240 Displays in the speedometer dial 234 Distance warning function 240 Driving hints 241 Increasing distance 240 Intermittent signal tone 234 Menu 235 Messages in display 365 Sensor cover 347 Setting a higher speed 237 Setting a slower speed 238 Setting the current speed 237 Setting the following distance in Distronic 239 Warning and indicator lamps 234 Door control panel 30 Door entry lamps 149 Door handle 30 Door unlock With Tele Aid* 276 Index Doors Message in display 381 Opening from inside vehicle 114 Opening from outside 110 DOT 333, 460 Downhill driving Cruise control 229 Downshifting 185 Drive-dynamic seat* with multicontour features 130 Driving General instructions 44 Hydroplaning 289 In winter 291 Problems 55 Safety systems 87 With Distronic* 241 Driving hints SBC brake system 95 Driving instructions 285 Driving off 288 Driving safety systems 4MATIC 95 ABS 87 BAS 89 ESP 89, 460 SBC brake system 92 Driving systems 228 Airmatic DC* 244 Cruise control 228 Distronic* 232 Driving safety systems 87 Vehicle level control 245 DTR see Distronic* 460 Dual control* Airmatic DC* 244 Dual-zone automatic climate control 196 E Easy-entry/exit Message in display 376 Easy-entry/exit feature* 124 Activating 175 Interrupting movement 124, 175 Electrical fuses 434 Electrical system 447 Electronic Stability Program see ESP 89, 460 Emergency call system* 270 Emergency calls Initiating an emergency call 272 With Tele Aid* 271 Emergency operation (Limp Home Mode) 190 Emergency operations Opening/closing Sliding/pop-up roof* 407 Remote door unlock 276 Unlocking the vehicle 404 Emergency tensioning device see ETD 72, 460 Emission control 294 Ending A call (telephone) 181 Engine 442 Compartment 299 Message in the display 355, 378 Starting 47 Starting with KEYLESS-GO* 48, 54 Starting with the SmartKey 47 Turning off the engine with the SmartKey 57 Engine compartment Hood 299 Engine malfunction indicator lamp 355, 378 Engine number 460 471 Index Engine oil Adding 302 Checking level 300 Consumption 300 Display messages 382 Messages in display 301 Viscosity 460 ESP 89, 460 Four wheel electronic traction system with ESP 95 Switching off 91 Switching on 92 Synchronizing 367 Warning lamp 353 ETD 460 Safety guidelines 66 Exterior lamp switch 141 Exterior rear view mirrors Adjusting 42 Parking position for 176 F Fahrenheit Setting temperature units Fastening the seat belts 44 Fine adjustment Cruise control 231 472 165 First aid kit 401 Flat tire 418 Mounting the spare wheel 419 Spare wheel 419 Flexible Service System (FSS) 461 Floormats 268 Fog lamp, rear 145 Fog lamps Switching on 144 Fog lamps, front Messages in display 386 Switching on 144 Folding back folding bench seat 136 Folding bench seat in cargo compartment 134 Folding head restraints back 127 Following distance in Distronic* 239 Four wheel electronic traction system (4MATIC) with ESP 95 4MATIC 95 4-zone automatic climate control* 208 Front airbags 67 Front doors Opening from inside vehicle 115 Front fog lamp Replacing bulb 411 Front interior lighting 148 Front lamps 411 Messages in display 387 Replacing bulbs 413 Switching on 141 Front reading lamps Switching on/off 148 Front seat head restraints Power seat 126 Removing and installing 126 Front seats Heater* 132 FSS (Flexible Service System) 461 Fuel 297 Fuel tank reserve warning lamp 357 Premium unleaded gasoline 297 Fuel consumption statistics After start 178 Since last reset 178 Fuel filler flap 296 Locking 296 Unlocking 296 Fuel reserve tank Message in display 385 Fuel tank Filler flap 296 Index Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 450 Functions (control system) 157 Resetting 163 Fuse box Passenger compartment 435 Fuse box in cargo compartment 435 Fuse chart 434 Fuses 434 Fuse chart 434 Fuse extractor 434 Spare fuses 434 G Garage door opener 29, 277 Erasing the integrated remote control 282 Integrated remote control 279 Rolling code programming 280 Gasoline see Fuel 297 GAWR 333 Gear range 461 Automatic transmission 186 Limiting 186 Shifting into optimal 185 Gear range limit Canceling 185 Gear selector lever Position 187 Global Locking 104 Locking with KEYLESS-GO* 110 Unlocking 104 Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* 110 Global Positioning System (GPS) 461 Glove box 259 Closing 259 Opening 259 Good visibility 191 GPS 461 GPS see COMAND 270 Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW GVW 333 GVWR 333 H Hand-held transmitter Programming integrated remote control 279 Reprogramming integrated remote control 282 Hazard warning flasher 146 Switching off 146 Switching on 146 Headlamps Automatic control 142 Bi-Xenon* 459 Cleaning system* 191 Switching off 57 Switching on 51 Heated seats* 132 Heated steering wheel* 267 Height adjustment Head restraints 40, 128 Steering wheel 40 Vehicle level 245 High beam flasher 145 High beam headlamps 51 Activating 145 Messages in display 387 Replacing bulbs 411 Switching on 145 Hood 299 Closing 299 Message in display 384 Opening 299 Hydroplaning 289 473 Index I Identification labels 440 Ignition 34, 36 Switching on 47, 48, 54 Immobilizer 97 Activating 97 Deactivating 97 Indicator lamps see Lamps, indicator and warning Infant and child restraint systems 73 Installing 82 LATCH child seat anchors 83 Information About service and warranty 10 Button for Tele Aid* 274 Inserting the cargo tie-down ring in the mounting element 253 Inserting the mounting elements into the cargo rails 252 Inside rear view mirror Antiglare 191 Installing Infant and child restraint systems 82 Towing eye bolt 433 Wiper blades 417 Installing the storage box 256 474 Instrument cluster 24, 150, 349, 461 Coolant Temperature indicator 151 Illumination 150 Multifunction display 153 Outside temperature indicator 152 Selecting language 166 Integrated remote control Canadian programming 281 Erasing memory 282 Gate operator 281 Hand-held transmitter 279 Operation 282 Rolling code programming 280 Interior lighting 147 Activating automatic control 147 Deactivating automatic control 147 Delayed switch-off 173 Manual operation 148 Interior lighting in the rear 149 Interior rear view mirror Adjusting 42 Interior storage spaces Glove box 259 J Jack 402 Jump starting 428 K Key, Mechanical 404 Key, SmartKey Changing the batteries 408, 409 Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Changing the batteries 408, 409 KEYLESS-GO* 461 Activating ignition with 36 Closing Tailgate 119, 121 Factory setting 110 Global locking 110 Global unlocking 110 Important notes 108 Locking the vehicle 113 Opening the tailgate 112 Remote control 107 Starting the engine 48, 54 Turning off engine 59 Unlocking the tailgate 112 Unlocking with 33 Kickdown 189, 461 Kilometers/miles in speedometer 165 Index Kilopascal 333 Km/h or mph in speedometer 165 L Lamp bulbs, exterior 410 Lamps, exterior Front 411 Light sensor 387 Messages in display 387 Replacing bulbs for rear 411, 415 Lamps, indicator and warning ABS 352 Airbag Off 68 Battery (SmartKey) 104, 111 Brakes 354 CHECK ENGINE 355 Coolant 356 DTR* 234 Engine diagnostics 355 ESP 353 Fuel reserve 355 SBC 92 Seat belts 355, 357 SRS 63 Language Multifunction display 166 Setting 166 LATCH child seat anchors 83 Layout of poly-V-belt drive 441 Leather upholstery Cleaning 350 Level control system* Airmatic DC* 244 Lever For cruise control 236 License plate lamps 411 Messages in display 387 Replacing bulbs 415 Light alloy wheels Cleaning 348 Light sensor 387 Lighter see Cigarette lighter 266 Lighting 141 Automatic headlamp mode 142 Daytime running lamp mode 143 Door entry lamps 149 Exterior lamp switch 141 Fog lamps 144 Front fog lamps 144 High beams 145 Instrument cluster illumination 150 Interior 147 Interior in the rear 149 Locator lighting 144 Low beam 141 Manual headlamp mode 142 Night security illumination 144 Parking lamps 141 Settings (control system) 170 Limiting the gear range 186 Limp Home Mode 190 Loading 247 Instructions 250 Split rear bench seat* 247 Loading terminology 332 Loading the storage box 256 Loading the vehicle 310 Locator lighting 144 Setting 171 Lock button 461 Door handle (KEYLESS-GO*) 60 Locking 56, 102 Fuel filler flap 296 Global with KEYLESS-GO* 110 Global, SmartKey 104 The vehicle with KEYLESS-GO* 113 Vehicle in an emergency 405 Loss of SmartKey 106 Loss of SmartKeys 114 475 Index Low beam headlamps 51 Messages in display 387 Replacing bulbs 410, 411 Lowering Vehicle 422 M Main Dimensions 448 Maintenance 12 Maintenance service Maintenance service data information 343 Overdue 340 Resetting maintenance service indicator 341 When due 339 Maintenance service indicator 339 Calling up 341 Clearing 340 Resetting 341 Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) 462 Malfunction Displaying 161 Manual headlamp mode 142 Manual operations Fuel filler flap 405 Interior lighting control 148 476 Sliding/pop-up roof* 407 Unlocking the driver’s door 404 Unlocking the gear selector lever 405 Massage function 131 MAXCOOL maximum cooling 216 Maximum inflation pressure 334 Maximum load rating 333 Maximum loaded vehicle weight 333 Mechanical key 404 Memory function 138, 462 Recalling positions from memory 139 Storing exterior rear view mirror parking positions 140 Storing SmartKey dependent settings 139 Menus 156 AUDIO 158 Distronic* 160, 235 In control system 156, 157 Settings menu 162 Standard display 158 Submenus 155 TEL* 179 Trip computer 178 Vehicle status message memory 161 Miles/kilometers in speedometer Setting 165 Minispare wheel Mounting 421 Mirrors Adjusting 41 Auto-dimming for rear view mirrors 191 Auto-dimming mirror 191 Exterior rear view mirror 42 Exterior rear view mirror parking positions 176, 192 Interior rear view mirror 42 Storing exterior mirror parking position 140 MON 297 MON (Motor Octane Number) 462 Mph or km/h in speedometer 165 Multifunction display 153, 462 Selecting language 166 Standard display 157 Index Multifunction display messages ABS 364 Brake fluid 377 Brake pads 375 Check engine 355 Coolant 379, 380 Coolant level 378 Distronic* 365 Doors 381 Easy-entry/exit feature 376 Fuel reserve tank 385 Hood 384 Lamps 387 Parking brake 376 SBC brake system 375, 376 SmartKey 385 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 384 Tailgate 399 Tele Aid 397, 398 Telephone* 399 Tires 392 Washer fluid 399 Multifunction steering wheel 26, 154, 462 Buttons 154 N Navigation system See separate COMAND operating instructions 160 Night security illumination 144 Normal occupant weight 334 O Occupant Classification System 76 Self-test 81 Occupant distribution 334 Occupant safety 62 Airbags 63 Children and airbags 64 Children in the vehicle 73 Fastening the seat belt 44 Infant and child restraint systems 73 LATCH child seat anchors 83 Seat belts 44, 66 Oil Adding 302 Checking level with the control system 301 Consumption 300 Filler neck 302 Viscosity 460 Oil level Checking level with the control system 301 One-touch gearshifting 185 Canceling gear range limit 185 Downshifting 185 Upshifting 185 Opening 407 Ashtray 265 Doors from the inside 114 Front doors from the inside 115 Fuel filler flap 296 Fuel filler flap manually 405 Glove box 259 Panorama sliding/pop-up roof* in an emergency 407 Power tilt /sliding sunroof* 225 Rear doors from the inside 115 Side windows 222 Sliding/pop-up roof* in an emergency 407 Tailgate 115 Windows 221 Opening the tailgate from the inside automatically* 116 477 Index Opening the tailgate from the inside with handle 116 Operating CD player 159 Radio 158 Safety 16 Telephone* 179 Vehicle outside the USA and Canada 13 Operating safety 16 Operation Garage door opener 282 Integrated remote control 282 Operator’s Manual 10 Ornamental moldings 347 Outer seats Rear seat head restraints 129 Outside temperature indicator 152 Overhead control panel 29 Garage door opener 277 Overspeed range 462 P Paintwork 346 Panic alarm 86 Panic button on SmartKey 478 86 Parcel net in front passenger footwell 259 Parking 56 Parking brake 49, 56 Engaging 56 Message in display 376 Releasing 49 Parking lamps 411 Switching on 141 Parking position Exterior rear view mirrors 140, 176, 192 Parts service 438 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp 360 Passenger compartment Fuse box 435 Interior lighting 147 Interior rear view mirror 42 Passenger safety see Occupant safety 62 Pedals 285 Phone book* Loading 181 Quick search 181 Phone number* Dialing 181 Redialing 181 Plastic and rubber parts Cleaning 350 Pliers, universal (vehicle tool kit) 403 Poly-V-belt drive 462 Positions (Memory function) Recalling from memory 139 Positions (Memory function*) Storing in memory 139 Potential problems associated with underinflated and overinflated tires 322 Power assistance 286 Power seat Adjusting backrest tilt 39 Adjusting head restraint height 40 Adjusting head restraint tilt 40 Adjusting seat cushion tilt 39 Adjusting seat height 39 Memory function 138 Removing/installing head restraints 126 Seat fore and aft adjustment 39 Index Power tilt /sliding sunroof* 225 Closing 225 Opening 225 Stopping 227 Power tilt /sliding sunroof** Synchronizing 227 Power train 463 Power washer 345 Power windows 221 Blocking of rear window operation 84 Convenience closing feature 224 Summer opening feature 223 Synchronizing 223 Practical hints Collapsible wheel chock 403 First aid kit 401 Jump starting 428 Lamp in center console 360 Lamps in instrument cluster 352 Spare wheel 402 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 362 Vehicle tool kit 403 Problems While driving 55 With vehicle 17 Product information 9 Production options weight 334 Program mode selector switch 463 Automatic transmission 188 PSI 334 PULSE function (Massage function) 131 Q Quick search Phone book* 181 R Radio Selecting stations 158 Selecting stations (satellite*) 159 Radio transmitters, control and operation 293 Range (distance to empty) Calling up 179 Rear bench seat Foldable 247 Rear doors Opening from inside vehicle 115 Rear fog lamp Bulb 410 Switching on 145 Rear interior lighting 148 Rear lamp bulbs 411 Rear lamps see Tail lamps Rear outer seats Adjusting head restraint height 128 Rear passenger compartment Adjustable air vents 219 Rear reading lamps 149 Rear seat head restraints Adjusting manually 129 Folding back manually 127 Folding back with switch in the center console 127 Installing 130 Outer seats 129 Removing 129 Rear view mirrors see Mirrors 191 Rear window Blocking operation 84 Rear window defroster 195 Activating 195 Deactivating 195 Rear window sunshade* 194 Recommended inflation pressure 334 Reconnecting Vehicle battery 427 479 Index Recovery services For stolen vehicle 277 Regular checks 297 Reinstalling the battery 427 Remote control SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 107 Remote controls Integrated 279 SmartKey 102, 107 Remote door unlock With Tele Aid* 276 Removing Vehicle battery 426 Wheel 421 Wiper blades 417 Removing and installing Front seat head restraints 126 Removing and installing seat cushions 136 Removing the storage box 256 Removing the twin roller blind 258 Replacing Bulbs 410 Front lamp bulbs 413 Fuses 434 License plate lamp bulbs 415 480 Rear lamp bulbs 411, 415 Side marker lamp bulb 415 Wiper blades 416 Reporting Safety defects 18 Reprogramming integrated remote control 282 Reset button in the instrument cluster 162 Resetting All functions (control system) 162 All functions of a submenu 163 Fuel consumption 178 Maintenance service indicator 341 Service indicator (FSS) 342 Trip odometer 151 Residual heat utilization 207, 219 Residual ventilation 219 REST (Residual engine heat utilization) 219 Restraint system see Infant and child restraint systems 73 Rim 334 Rims and Tires 443 Roadside Assistance Tele Aid* 269 Roadside assistance 12 Rolling code programming 280 Rolling up the cargo compartment cover 257 RON 297 RON (Research Octane Number) 463 Rubber parts Cleaning 350 S Safety Occupant 62 Safety belts see Seat belts 44 Safety defects Reporting 18 Safety systems Driving 87 Saving current speed 229 SBC 92 SBC brake system 463 Activation 93 Deactivation 94 Driving hints 95 Messages in display 375, 376 Self-check 94 Warning lamp 92 Seat belt force limiter 72 Index Seat belts 69 Cleaning 349 Fastening 44 Proper use of 46, 71 Safety guidelines 66 Warning lamp 357 Seat heater* Switching off 132 Switching on 132 Seat ventilation* Switching off 133 Switching on 133 Seating capacity 312 Seats 124 Adjusting 38 Drive-dynamic seat* with multicontour features 130 Easy entry/exit feature* 124 Heater* 132 Split rear bench seat* 247 Ventilation 133 Selecting display 166, 167 Selector lever Lock 47, 183 Message in the display 368 Position (automatic transmission) 183 Self-test Occupant Classification System 81 Tele Aid* 270 Service Batteries 424 Calling up the maintenance service indicator 341 Service and warranty information 10 Service life (tires) 308 Service memory Messages in display 397 Setting Convenience functions 164, 175 Cruise control 229 Daytime running lamp mode 170 Distronic* time interval 239 Exterior rear view mirror parking position 140 Higher speed in cruise control 231 Higher speed in Distronic* 237 Hours (clock) 168 Individual vehicle settings 162 Interior lighting delayed switch-off 173 Lamps and lighting (control system) 170 Language, multifunction display 166 Locator lighting 171 Lower speed in cruise control 231 Lower speed in Distronic* 238 Miles/kilometers in speedometer 165 Minutes (clock) 168, 169 Parking position for exterior rear view mirrors 176 Slower speed in cruise control 231 Slower speed in Distronic* 238 SmartKey dependent memory 176 Speed in cruise control 231 Speed in Distronic* 237 Speedometer display mode 165 Suspension tuning 244 Temperature (interior) 201, 214 Temperature indicator 165 Tire inflation pressure 167 Units Speedometer 165 Temperature 165 Tire inflation pressure 167 Vehicle level control 245 481 Index Settings Calling up Distronic* 160, 235 Convenience functions 175 Factory, KEYLESS-GO* 110 Factory, SmartKey 104 Individual 176 Lighting (control system) 170 Menus and submenus 155 Resetting all (control system) 162 Resetting in the submenu 163 Selective 104, 111 Settings menu Functions in 162 Individual vehicle settings 162 Submenus 163 Shift lock 463 Shifting Gear selector lever positions 187 Into optimal gear range (automatic transmission) 185 Side impact airbags 68 Side marker lamps 411, 415 Side windows Automatic opening 222 Cleaning 348 Closing 221, 222 482 Opening 221 Opening fully (Express-open) 222 Stopping 223 Synchronizing power windows 223 Sidewall 334 Simultaneous wiping and washing Windshield wipers 53 Single wipe 53 Sliding/pop-up roof* Emergency operations 407 SmartKey 102 Battery check lamp 104, 111 Checking the batteries 106 Factory setting 104 Global locking 104 Global unlocking 104 Locking and unlocking 102 Loss of 106 positions in starter switch 34 Remote controls 102, 107 Restoring to factory setting 105 Selective setting 104, 111 Starting the engine 47 Turning off the engine 57 Unlocking with 32 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 107 Checking the batteries 112 Global locking and unlocking 110 Loss of 114 Messages in display 384 Remote control 107 Restoring to factory setting 111 Turning off the engine 59 Unlocking with 33 SmartKey-dependency memory Settings 176 Snow chains 338 Spare fuses 434 Spare wheel 402 Speed Saving current 229 Speed settings Cruise control 231 Distronic* 237, 238 Speedometer Displays 234 Settings units 165 Speedometer display mode Selecting 165 Split rear bench seat* 247 Sporty driving style 244 Index SRS 464 SRS indicator lamp 25, 359 Standing lamps 141 Standing water 292 Starter switch 34 Positions 34 Starting difficulties 49 Starting position 34 Starting the engine 47 Steering column Height adjustment 41 Length adjustment 41 Steering wheel Adjusting 40 Cleaning 350 Electrical adjustment 41 Stolen vehicle Recovery services 277 Stopping Power tilt /sliding sunroof* 227 Windows 223 Storage box in cargo compartment 255 Storage compartment with cup holder in the center armrest 263 Storage compartments 259 Glove box 259 Storage space under center armrest (Vehicles with cup holder in the center console) 260 Storing (Memory function*) Positions in memory 139 Storing tires 309 Submenus Convenience 175 For settings 155 In control system 157 Instrument cluster 165, 167 Lighting 170 Resetting functions in Control system 163 Selecting 163 Settings menu 163 Vehicle 174 Sun visors 193 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 464 Suspension tuning For comfortable driving style 244 For sporty driving style 244 Switching off Automatic central locking (control system) 174 Engine 57 ESP 91 Hazard warning flasher 146 Headlamps 57 Seat heating* 132 Switching on Automatic central locking (control system) 174 ESP 92 Hazard warning flasher 146 Headlamps 51 Parking lamps 141 Seat heating* 132 Windshield wipers 52 Symbol (Distronic*) Distance warning function* 160 Synchronizing ESP 367 Power tilt /sliding sunroof* 227 Power windows 223 Synchronizing the time 168 T Tachometer 152 Displaying gear range 186 Overspeed range 152 Tail lamps 411, 415 483 Index Tailgate Message in display 399 Opening 115 opening with KEYLESS-GO* 112 Opening with SmartKey 106 Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* 112 Unlocking with SmartKey 106 Tar stains 346 Tele Aid Messages in display 397, 398 Tele Aid System 464 Tele Aid* 269 Emergency calls 271 Information 274 Initiating an emergency call manually 272 Remote door unlock 276 Roadside Assistance 273 Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 277 System self-check 270 Tele Aid System 270 Upgrade scenario 275 Telematics* 464 Telephone* 26, 268 Answering a call 180 484 Dialing a number from the phone book 181 Ending a call 181 Loading phone book* 181 Messages in display 399 Messages in the display 399 Operating 179 Redialing 181 Telescoping rod 254 Temperature Display mode 165 Setting interior temperature 201 Setting units in display 165 Tires 317 The coolant level is correct if the level 304 Tightening torque 422, 464 Time Setting hours 168 Setting minutes 168, 169 TIN 334 Tire Vehicle maximum load on 335 Tire and Loading Information 311 Tire and loading terminology 332 Tire care and maintenance 308 Tire Identification Number see TIN Tire inflation pressure Checking 316 Setting units 167 Tire inflation pressure see the placard on the fuel filler flap Tire inspection 308 Tire load rating 334 Tire ply composition and material used 334 Tire speed rating 325, 335 Tire terminology 332 Tire traction 290 Tires Direction of rotation 310 Driving instructions 288 Messages in display 390, 391, 392 Retreads 307 Rotating 335 Service life 308 Temperature 317, 331 Tire pressure monitor warning lamp* 358 Tread depth 309, 337 Wear pattern 336 Winter 337 Index Tires and wheels Tire inflation pressure 318 Tools 403 Tow-away alarm 99 Arming 99 Disarming 99 Disarming for transport 99 Towing eye bolt (vehicle tool kit) Installing 433 Towing the vehicle 430 Traction 189, 335 Transmission fluid level 303 Tread 335 Tread depth 309 Tread depth (tires 337 Treadwear indicators 335 Trip computer 178 Trip odometer Resetting 151 Trunk Lock button, KEYLESS-GO* 113 Turn signals 51 Additional in mirrors 411 Front bulbs 411 Turning off Engine 57 Twin roller blind 256 U Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 335 Units Setting speedometer units 165 Setting temperature units 165 Setting tire inflation pressure units 167 Unlocking 32, 102, 404 Driver’s door in an emergency 404 Fuel filler flap 296 Global 104 Global with KEYLESS-GO* 110 Selective setting 104, 111 Vehicle in an emergency 276 With KEYLESS-GO* 33 With the SmartKey 32 Upgrade scenario Tele Aid* 275 Uphill driving Cruise control 229 Upshifting 185 Useful features 259 Ashtrays 265 Cigarette lighter 266 Garage door opener 277 Heated steering wheel* 267 Tele Aid* 269 Telephone* 268 V Vehicle Individual settings 162, 164 Locking in an emergency 405 Lowering 422 Towing 430 Unlocking in an emergency 404 Vehicle capacity weight 335 Vehicle care Cup holder 349 Distronic* system sensor cover 347 Engine cleaning 346 Gear selector lever 349 Hard plastic trim items 349 Leather upholstery 350 Light alloy wheels 348 Ornamental moldings 347 Paintwork 346 Plastic and rubber parts 350 Power washer 345 Seat belts 349 Steering wheel 349 485 Index Tar stains 346 Vehicle washing 346 Window cleaning 348 Wood trims 350 Vehicle level Changing 246 Setting 246 Automatic 246 Manual 246 Vehicle level control system* Airmatic DC* 244 Vehicle loading terminology 332 Vehicle maximum load on the tire 335 Vehicle status message memory Calling up 161 Vehicle tool kit 403 Alignment bolt 403 Fuse extractor 403 Hex-socket wrench 403 Open-end wrench 403 Screwdriver 403 Spare fuses 403 Towing eye bolt 403 Universal pliers 403 Wheel wrench 403 486 Vehicle tool kit, jack and spare wheel 401 Vehicle washing 346 VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) Voice control system* 464 464 W Warning lamps see Lamps, indicator and warning Warning sounds Distance warning function* 240 Distronic* 234 Drivers seat belts 69 Parking brake 50 Warranty coverage 439 Washing the vehicle 344 Wear pattern (tires) 336 Weights 449 Wheel change 419 Tightening torque 422 Wheels Tires and wheels 307 Window curtain airbags 68 Windshield Defogging 202, 203, 215 Refilling washer fluid 306 Replacing wiper blades 417 Washer fluid 306 Windshield washer fluid Message in display 399 Refilling 306 Wiping with 53 Windshield wipers 52 Fast wiper speed 52 Intermittent wiping 52 Replacing wiper blades 416, 417 Single wipe 53 Switching on 52 Wiping with windshield washer fluid 53 Winter driving Block heater* 338 Snow chains 338 Tires 337 Winter tires 337 Winter driving instructions 291 Winter tires 337 Wiper blades 347 Installing 417 Removing 417 Replacing 417 Index Wiping And washing simultaneously 53 Interval 52 With windshield washer fluid 53 Wiping with window washer fluid 54 Wood trims Cleaning 350 X Xenon headlamps* Bi-Xenon* 459 487 488 Service and Literature Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle. For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca. G Warning! To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury. If you have any questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual. Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing. Title illustration no. P00.01-2508-31 Press time July 20, 2004 GSP/TIP Printed in Germany Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG Ê5/tbÁ3Ë 2115846696 Order No. 6515 1130 13 Part No. 211 584 66 96 USA Edition B, 2005 Operator’s Manual E-Class Wagon Operator’s Manual E-Class Wagon
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.5 Linearized : Yes Encryption : Standard V2.3 (128-bit) User Access : Print, Extract, Print high-res Page Count : 491 Page Mode : UseOutlines XMP Toolkit : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6 About : uuid:366547ff-fdcf-45c9-a03f-31c303479e0f Producer : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows) Create Date : 2004:08:19 09:25:40Z Modify Date : 2004:08:31 09:56:40-04:00 Metadata Date : 2004:08:31 09:56:40-04:00 Creator Tool : FrameMaker+SGML 5.5.6p145 Document ID : uuid:15af4010-ae9e-4ef6-9703-0ebf678a634a Format : application/pdf Title : S211.boo Creator : FrameMaker+SGML 5.5.6p145EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools